Home

Edge-Core ES3528M EU

Contents

1. Quality of Service Configures Differentiated Services 4 197 Multicast Filtering Configures IGMP multicast filtering query parameters specifies ports 4 200 attached to a multicast router and enables multicast VLAN registration IP Interface Configures IP address for the switch 4 215 DHCP Snooping Configures DHCP snooping 4 223 IP Source Guard Configures IP source guard security 4 219 IP Cluster Configures switch clustering 4 230 The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations ACL Access Control List Configuration MST Multiple Spanning Tree 4 Command Line Interface CM Class Map Configuration NE Normal Exec GC Global Configuration PE Privileged Exec IC Interface Configuration PM Policy Map Configuration LC Line Configuration VC VLAN Database Configuration Line Commands You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the server s serial port These commands are used to set communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet i e a virtual terminal Table 4 5 Line Commands Command Function Mode Page line Identifies a specific line for configuration and starts the line GC 4 10 configuration mode login Enables password checking at login LC 4 11 password Specifies a password on a line LC 4 12 timeout login Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the L
2. Related Commands ip http secure port 4 32 copy tftp https certificate 4 64 ip http secure port This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS connection to the switch s web interface Use the no form to restore the default port Syntax ip http secure port port_number no ip http secure port port_number The UDP port used for HTTPS Range 1 65535 Default Setting 443 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port e If you change the HTTPS port number clients attempting to connect to the HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL in this format https device port_number Example Console config ip http secure port 1000 Console config Related Commands ip http secure server 4 31 4 32 System Management Commands 4 Telnet Server Commands Table 4 14 Telnet Server Commands Command Function Mode Page ip telnet port Specifies the port to be used by the Telnet interface GC 4 30 ip telnet server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from Telnet GC 4 30 ip telnet port This command specifies the TCP port number used by the Telnet interface Use the no form to use the default port Syntax ip telnet port port number no ip telnet port port number The TCP port to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 Default Setting 23 Command Mode Glo
3. v Js e y 9 a O ala alan 3 135 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5 and community VLAN 6 Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped to VLAN 5 while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as host ports and associated with VLAN 6 This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3 Console show vlan private vlan 4 179 Primary Secondary Type Interfaces 5 primary Eth1 3 5 6 community Ethl 4 Eth1 5 Console Configuring Private VLAN Interfaces Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration and Private VLAN Trunk Configuration menus to set the private VLAN interface type and assign the interfaces to a private VLAN Command Attributes e Port Trunk The switch interface PVLAN Port Type Sets the private VLAN port types Normal The port is not assigned to a private VLAN Host The port is a community port or an isolated port A community port can communicate with other ports in its own community VLAN and with designated promiscuous port s An isolated port can only communicate with the single designated promiscuous port in the isolated VLAN it cannot communicate with any other host ports Promiscuous A promiscuous port can communicate with all interfaces within a private VLAN Primary VLAN Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports and
4. 3 92 Port Configuration 3 Configuring Rate Limits This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic received on a port or transmitted from a port Rate limiting is configured on ports at the edge of a network to limit traffic coming in and out of the network Packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes Rate Limit Configuration Use the rate limit configuration pages to apply rate limiting Command Usage Input and output rate limits can be enabled or disabled for individual interfaces Command Attributes e Port Trunk Displays the port trunk number Input Output Rate Limit Status Enables or disables the rate limit Default Enabled Input Output Rate Limit Sets the rate limit level Web Click Port Rate Limit Input Output Port Trunk Configuration Enable the Rate Limit Status for the required interfaces set the Rate Limit Level and click Apply Input Rate Limit Port Configuration For a 100 Mbps port the threshold range is 64 to 100000 kilobits per second For a1 Gbps port the threshold range is 64 to 1000000 kilobits per second Port Input Rate Limit Status Input Rate L
5. DHCP Snooping Port Configuration Configures switch ports as trusted or untrusted An untrusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the network Command Attributes e Trust Status Enables or disables port as trusted Web Click DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration a DHCP Snooping Port Configuration Port Trust Status 1 Cl Enabled 2 Enabled 3 E Enabled 4 C Enabled 5 Enabled 6 Enabled 7 LJEnabled 8 Enabled 9 C Enabled J Figure 3 108 DHCP Snooping Port Configuration 3 171 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example shows how to enable the DHCP Snooping Trust Status for ports Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if ip dhcp snooping trust 4 226 Console config if DHCP Snooping Binding Information Displays the DHCP snooping binding information Command Attributes No Entry number for DHCP snooping binding information e Unit Stack unit e Port Port number e VLAN ID ID of a configured VLAN Range 1 4094 MAC Address A valid unicast MAC address IP Address A valid unicast IP address IP Address Type Indicates an IPv4 or IPv6 address type e Lease Time Seconds The time after which an e
6. switchport priority default This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames Use the no form to restore the default value 4 184 Priority Commands 4 Syntax switchport priority default default priority id no switchport priority default default priority id The priority number for untagged ingress traffic The priority is a number from 0 to 7 Seven is the highest priority Default Setting The priority is not set and the default value for untagged frames received on the interface is zero Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP DSCP and default switchport priority The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used e This switch provides eight priority queues for each port It is configured to use Weighted Round Robin which can be viewed with the show queue bandwidth command Inbound frames that do not have VLAN tags are tagged with the input port s default ingress user priority and then placed in the appropriate priority queue at the output port The default priority for all ingress ports is zero Therefore any inbound frames that do not have priority tags
7. 4 6 Entering Commands 4 Configuration Commands Configuration commands are privileged level commands used to modify switch settings These commands modify the running configuration only and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To store the running configuration in non volatile storage use the copy running config startup config command The configuration commands are organized into different modes Global Configuration These commands modify the system level configuration and include commands such as hostname and snmp server community e Access Control List Configuration These commands are used for packet filtering e Interface Configuration These commands modify the port configuration such as speed duplex and negotiation Line Configuration These commands modify the console port and Telnet configuration and include command such as parity and databits e VLAN Configuration Includes the command to create VLAN groups To enter the Global Configuration mode enter the command configure in Privileged Exec mode The system prompt will change to Console config which gives you access privilege to all Global Configuration commands Console configure Console config To enter the other modes at the configuration prompt type one of the following commands Use the exit or end command to return to the Privileged Exec mode Table 4 2 Configuration Modes Mode
8. Console config queue mode wrr 4 184 Console config exit Console show queue mode 4 187 Queue mode wrr Console Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin WRR algorithm to determine the frequency at which it services each priority queue As described in Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues on page 3 140 the traffic classes are mapped to one of the eight egress queues provided for each port You can assign a weight to each of these queues and thereby to the corresponding traffic priorities This weight sets the frequency at which each queue will be polled for service and subsequently affects the response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value Note This switch does not allow the queue service weights to be set The weights are fixed as 1 2 4 8 for queues 0 through 3 respectively Command Attributes e Interface Select port or trunk as an interface WRR Setting Table11 Displays a list of weights for each traffic class i e queue Weight Value Set a new weight for the selected traffic class Range 1 15 Web Click Priority Queue Scheduling Select the required interface highlight a traffic class i e output queue enter a weight then click Apply Queue Scheduling Traffic Class 0 weight 1 Traffic Class 1 weight 2 Traffic Class 2 weight 4 Traffic Class 3 weight 8 WRR Setting Table
9. Console config boot system config startup Related Commands dir 4 68 whichboot 4 69 Authentication Commands You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or RADIUS authentication methods You can also enable port based authentication for network client access using IEEE 802 1X Table 4 27 Authentication Commands Command Group Function Page Authentication Sequence Defines logon authentication method and precedence 4 70 RADIUS Client Configures settings for authentication via a RADIUS server 4 72 TACACS Client Configures settings for authentication via a TACACS server 4 76 Port Security Configures secure addresses for a port 4 78 Port Authentication Configures host authentication on specific ports using 802 1X 4 79 Authentication Sequence Table 4 28 Authentication Sequence Command Function Mode Page authentication login Defines logon authentication method and precedence GC 4 70 authentication enable Defines the authentication method and precedence for GC 4 71 command mode change authentication login This command defines the login authentication method and precedence Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication login local radius tacacs no authentication login e local Use local password e radius Use RADIUS server password tacacs Use TACACS server passw
10. Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if protocol vlan protocol group 1 vlan 2 Console config if show protocol vlan protocol group This command shows the frame and protocol type associated with protocol groups Syntax show protocol vlan protocol group group id group id Group identifier for a protocol group Range 1 2147483647 Default Setting All protocol groups are displayed Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This shows protocol group 1 configured for IP over Ethernet Console show protocol vlan protocol group ProtocolGroup ID Frame Type Protocol Type Console show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group This command shows the mapping from protocol groups to VLANs for the selected interfaces Syntax show interfaces protocol vilan protocol group interface interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 4 182 Priority Commands 4 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting The mapping for all interfaces is displayed Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This shows that traffic entering Port 1 that matches the specifications for protocol group 1 will be mapped to VLAN 2 Console show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group Port ProtocolGroup ID Vlan ID Eth 1 1 1 vlan2 Console Priority Commands The commands described in this section allow you to specify which d
11. SNMPv3 Groups New Group Properties Group Name Security Model vE Security Level noAuthNoPriv SNMPv3 Views e Poad VGW C defaultview e a C defaultview x G ad Mai C defaultview z Back Add Figure 3 30 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups Setting SNMPv3 Views SNMPv3 views are used to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree The predefined view defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree Command Attributes View Name The name of the SNMP view Range 1 64 characters View OID Subtrees Shows the currently configured object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree that define the SNMP view Edit OID Subtrees Allows you to configure the object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string 3 42 Simple Network Management Protocol 3 Type Indicates if the object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree is included or excluded from the SNMP view Web Click SNMP SNMPVv3 Views Click New to configure a new view In the New View page define a name and specify OID subtrees in the switch MIB to be included or excluded in the view Click Back to save the new view and return to the SNMPv3 Views list For a specific view click on View OID Subtrees to display the current configuration or click on Edit OID Subtrees to make changes to the view settings
12. 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation e 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation flowcontrol Supports flow control symmetric Gigabit only When specified the port transmits and receives pause frames when not specified the port will auto negotiate to determine the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames The current switch ASIC only supports symmetric pause frames Default Setting 100BASE TX 10half 10full 100half 100full e 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full e SFP 1000full Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage When auto negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilites command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands 4 117 4 Command Line Interface Example The following example configures Ethernet port 5 capabilities to 100half 100full and flow control Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if capabilities 100half Console config if capabilities 100full Console config if capabilities flowcontrol Console config if Related Commands negotiation 4 116 speed duplex 4 115 flowcontrol 4 118 flowcontrol This command enables flow control Use the no form to disable flow control Syntax no flowcontrol Defaul
13. v2270 Destination File Name MRF Figure 3 9 Copy Firmware If you download to a new destination file go to the System File Set Start Up menu mark the operation code file used at startup and click Apply To start the new firmware reboot the system via the System Reset menu Set Start Up Name Type Startup Size bytes Factory_Default_Config cfg Config_File Y 5197 2270 Operation_Code N 1761944 V2271 F Operation_Code 1761944 Figure 3 10 Setting the Startup Code 3 18 Basic Configuration 3 To delete a file select System File Delete Select the file name from the given list by checking the tick box and click Apply Note that the file currently designated as the startup code cannot be deleted Delete Name Type Startup Size bytes F Factory_Default_Config cfg Config_File Y 5197 E v2270 Operation_Code N 1761944 m N2271 F Operation_Code Y 1761944 Figure 3 11 Deleting Files CLI To download new firmware form a TFTP server enter the IP address of the TFTP server select opcode as the file type then enter the source and destination file names When the file has finished downloading set the new file to start up the system and then restart the switch To start the new firmware enter the reload command or reboot the system Console tcopy tftp file 4 64 TFTP server ip address 192 168 1 23 Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 2 Source file name V2 2 7 1 bix
14. 1 Client attempts management access 2 Switch contacts authentication server 3 Authentication server challenges client 4 Client responds with proper password or key 5 Authentication server approves access 6 Switch grants management access Command Usage By default management access is always checked against the authentication database stored on the local switch If a remote authentication server is used you must specify the authentication sequence and the corresponding parameters for the remote authentication protocol Local and remote logon authentication control management access via the console port web browser or Telnet e RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assign a specific privilege level for each user name password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server e You can specify up to three authentication methods for any user to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you select 1 RADIUS 2 TACACS and 3 Local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted using the TACACS server and finally the local user name and password is checked 3 46 User Authentication 3 Command Attributes e Authentication Select the authentication or authentication sequence required Local User authentication is performed only locally by the switch
15. 2 Use the switchport mode private vlan command to configure one port as promiscuous i e having access to all ports in the isolated VLAN one or more ports as host i e isolated port 3 Use the switchport private vlan isolated command to assign a port to an isolated VLAN 4 Use the show vlan private vlan command to verify your configuration settings private vian Use this command to create a primary community or isolated private VLAN Use the no form to remove the specified private VLAN Syntax private vlan vian id community primary isolated no private vian vian id e vian id ID of private VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes community A VLAN in which traffic is restricted to host members in the same VLAN and to promiscuous ports in the associate primary VLAN e primary A VLAN which can contain one or more community VLANs and serves to channel traffic between community VLANs and other locations e isolated Specifies an isolated VLAN Ports assigned to an isolated VLAN can only communicate with the promiscuous port within their own VLAN Default Setting None Command Mode VLAN Configuration Command Usage e Private VLANs are used to restrict traffic to ports within the same community or isolated VLAN and channel traffic passing outside the community through promiscuous ports When using community VLANs they must be mapped to 4 175 4 Command Line Interface an associated primary V
16. 3 168 DHCP Snooping 3 If the DHCP snooping is globally disabled all dynamic bindings are removed from the binding table Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client The port s through which the switch submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted Note that the switch will not add a dynamic entry for itself to the binding table when it receives an ACK message from a DHCP server Also when the switch sends out DHCP client packets for itself no filtering takes place However when the switch receives any messages from a DHCP server any packets received from untrusted ports are dropped DHCP Snooping Configuration Command Attributes e DHCP Snooping Status Enables or disables DHCP snooping globally DHCP Snooping MAC Address Verification Enables or disables MAC address verification DHCP packets will be dropped if the source MAC address in the Ethernet header of the packet is not same as the client s hardware address in the DHCP packet Web Click DHCP Snooping Configuration DHCP Snooping Configuration DHCP Snooping Status Enabled DHCP Snooping MAC Address Verification M Enabled Figure 3 105 DHCP Snooping Configuration CLI This example first enables DHCP Snooping and then enables DHCP Snooping MAC Address Verification Console config ip dhcp snooping 4 223 Console config ip dhcp snooping verify mac address 4 227
17. Maximum number of reauthentication attempts max req Maximum number of times a port will retransmit an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session page 4 81 Status Authorization status authorized or not Operation Mode Shows if single or multiple hosts clients can connect to an 802 1X authorized port Max Count The maximum number of hosts allowed to access this port page 4 82 Port control Shows the dot1x mode on a port as auto force authorized or force unauthorized page 4 81 Supplicant MAC address of authorized client Current Identifier The integer 0 255 used by the Authenticator to identify the current authentication session Authenticator State Machine State Current state including initialize disconnected connecting authenticating authenticated aborting held force_authorized force_unauthorized Reauth Count Number of times connecting state is re entered Backend State Machine State Current state including request response success fail timeout idle initialize Request Count Number of EAP Request packets sent to the Supplicant without receiving a response Identifier Server Identifier carried in the most recent EAP Success Failure or Request packet received from the Authentication Server Reauthentication State Machine State Current state including initialize
18. SNMP Configuration SNMP Community SNMP Community Capability 5 Current New private RW public RO lt lt Add Community String spiderman Remove Access Mode Read Write v Figure 3 23 Configuring SNMP Community Strings CLI The following example adds the string spiderman with read write access Console config snmp server community spiderman rw 4 100 Console config Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types Traps indicating status changes are issued by the switch to specified trap managers You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to your management station using network management platforms such as HP OpenView You can specify up to five management stations that will receive authentication failure messages and other trap messages from the switch Command Attributes e Trap Manager Capability This switch supports up to five trap managers Current Displays a list of the trap managers currently configured e Trap Manager IP Address IP address of the host the targeted recipient Trap Manager Community String Community string sent with the notification operation Range 1 32 characters case sensitive Trap UDP Port Sets the UDP port number Default 162 Trap Version Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1 v2c or v3 traps The default is version 1 e Trap Security Level Specifies the security l
19. Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 192 Quality of Service Commands 4 Command Usage First enter this command to designate a class map and enter the Class Map configuration mode Then use the match command page 4 193 to specify the criteria for ingress traffic that will be classified under this class map Up to 16 match commands are permitted per class map The class map is used with a policy map page 4 194 to create a service policy page 4 198 for a specific interface that defines packet classification service tagging and bandwidth policing Example This example creates a class map call rd_class and sets it to match packets marked for DSCP service value 3 Console config class map rd_class match any Console config cmap match ip dscp 3 Console config cmap Related Commands show class map 4 198 match This command defines the criteria used to classify traffic Use the no form to delete the matching criteria Syntax no match access list ac name ip dscp dscp ip precedence ip precedence vlan vlan acl name Name of the access control list Any type of ACL can be specified including standard or extended IP ACLs and MAC ACLs Range 1 16 characters dscp A DSCP value Range 0 63 jp precedence An IP Precedence value Range 0 7 vian A VLAN Range 1 4094 Default Setting None Command Mode Class Map Configuration Comman
20. Default Setting e Status Disabled e Action None e Maximum Addresses 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet 4 78 Authentication Commands 4 Command Usage e If you enable port security the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted First use the port security max mac count command to set the number of addresses and then use the port security command to enable security on the port Use the no port security max mac count command to disable port security and reset the maximum number of addresses to the default You can also manually add secure addresses with the mac address table static command A secure port has the following restrictions Cannot use port monitoring Cannot be a multi VLAN port Cannot be connected to a network interconnection device Cannot be a trunk port e Ifa portis disabled due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled using the no shutdown command Example The following example enables port security for port 5 and sets the response to a security violation to issue a trap message Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if port security action trap Related Commands shutdown 4 119 mac address table static 4 138 show mac address table
21. Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range Then click Add Standard ACL Name Standard ACL Action IP Address Subnet Mask Remove Action Permit Address TypelJAny IP Address Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Add Figure 3 43 Configuring Standard IP ACLs CLI This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 21 and another rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 4 90 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Console config std acl Configuring an Extended IP ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules e Source Destination Address Type Specifies the source or destination IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any e Source Destination IP Address Source or destination IP address e Source Destination Subnet Mask Subnet mask for source or destination address Service Type Packet priority settings based on the following criteria Precedence IP precedence level Range 0 7 TOS Type of Service level Range 0 15
22. Radius User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only TACACS User authentication is performed using a TACACS server only authentication sequence User authentication is performed by up to three authentication methods in the indicated sequence e RADIUS Settings Global Provides globally applicable RADIUS settings Serverlndex Specifies one of five RADIUS servers that may be configured The switch attempts authentication using the listed sequence of servers The process ends when a server either approves or denies access to a user Server Port Number Network UDP port of authentication server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 1812 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Number of Server Transmits Number of times the switch tries to authenticate logon access via the authentication server Range 1 30 Default 2 Timeout for a reply The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the RADIUS server before it resends the request Range 1 65535 Default 5 TACACS Settings Server IP Address Address of the TACACS server Default 10 11 12 13 Server Port Number Network TCP port of TACACS server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 49 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authen
23. You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and end address System Management Commands 4 Example This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses Console config management all client 192 168 1 19 Console config management all client 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Console config show management This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Syntax show management all client http client snmp client telnet client all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP web and Telnet groups http client Adds IP address es to the web group snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show management all client Management IP Filter HTTP Client Start IP address End IP address 1 192 168 1 19 192 168 11 19 2 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 SNMP Client Start IP address End IP address 1 192 168 11 19 192 168 1 19 2 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 TELNET Client Start IP address End IP address 1 192 168 1 19 192 168 12 19 2 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Console 4 29 A Command Line Interface Web Server Commands Table 4 12 Web Server Commands Command Function Mode Page ip http
24. Command Usage e You can configure up to 64 policers i e meters or class maps for each of the following access list types MAC ACL IP ACL including Standard ACL and Extended ACL IPv6 Standard ACL and IPv6 Extended ACL This limitation applies to each switch chip ES4524D ports 1 26 ES4548D ports 1 25 ports 26 50 e Policing is based on a token bucket where bucket depth i e the maximum burst before the bucket overflows is by specified the burst byte field and the average rate tokens are removed from the bucket is by specified by the rate bps option Example This example creates a policy called rd_policy uses the class command to specify the previously defined rd_class uses the set command to classify the service that incoming packets will receive and then uses the police command to limit the average bandwidth to 100 000 Kbps the burst rate to 1522 bytes and configure the response to drop any violating packets Console config policy map rd_policy Console config pmap class rd_class Console config pmap c set ip dscp 3 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522 exceed action drop Console config pmap c 4 197 4 Command Line Interface service policy This command applies a policy map defined by the policy map command to the ingress queue of a particular interface Use the no form to remove the policy map from this interface Syntax no service policy input policy map name input Ap
25. Console config ip dhcp snooping Console config Related Commands ip dhcp snooping vlan 4 225 ip dhcp snooping trust 4 226 ip dhcp snooping vian This command enables DHCP snooping on the specified VLAN Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no ip dhcp snooping vlan vian id vlan id ID of a configured VLAN Range 1 4094 Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When DHCP snooping enabled globally using the ip dhcp snooping command page 4 223 and enabled on a VLAN with this command DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN as specified by the ip dhcp snooping trust command page 4 226 When the DHCP snooping is globally disabled DHCP snooping can still be configured for specific VLANs but the changes will not take effect until DHCP snooping is globally re enabled When DHCP snooping is globally enabled configuration changes for specific VLANs have the following effects If DHCP snooping is disabled on a VLAN all dynamic bindings learned for this VLAN are removed from the binding table 4 225 4 Command Line Interface Example This example enables DHCP snooping for VLAN 1 Console config ip dhcp snooping vlan 1 Console config Related Commands ip dhcp snooping 4 223 ip dhcp snooping trust 4 226 ip dhcp snooping trust This command configures the specified interface
26. Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Interface Configuration Line Configuration and VLAN Database Configuration Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Interface Configuration mode Console config if end Console 4 22 General Commands 4 exit This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exit the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Any Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Global Configuration mode and then quit the CLI session Console config exit Consoletexit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username quit This command exits the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program Example This example shows how to quit a CLI session Console quit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username 4 23 4 Command Line Interface System Management Commands These commands are used to control system logs passwords user names browser configuration options and display or configure a variety of other system information Table 4 7 System Management Commands Command Group Function Page Device Designati
27. Port number Range 1 28 Default Setting No configured entries Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Table entries include a MAC address IP address lease time entry type Static IP SG Binding Dynamic DHCP Binding Static DHCP Binding VLAN identifier and port identifier All static entries are configured with an infinite lease time which is indicated with a value of zero by the show ip source guard command page 4 222 e When source guard is enabled traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping static entries configured in the DHCP snooping table or static addresses configured in the source guard binding table with this command e Static bindings are processed as follows 4 221 4 Command Line Interface If there is no entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address a new entry is added to binding table using the type of static IP source guard binding If there is an entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address and the type of entry is static IP source guard binding then the new entry will replace the old one If there is an entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address and the type of the entry is dynamic DHCP snooping binding then the new entry will replace the old one and the entry type will be changed to static IP source guard binding Example This example configures a static source guard binding on port 5 Console config ip source guard binding 11 22 33 44 55 66 vlan 1
28. Powered by Accton ES3528M ES3552M Fast Ethernet Switch Management Guide www edge core com Management Guide Fast Ethernet Switch Layer 2 Workgroup Switch with 24 48 10 100BASE T RJ 45 Ports and 4 Combination Gigabit RJ 45 SFP Ports ES3528M ES3552M E092006 MT R02 149100010700H Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Key Features 1 1 Description of Software Features 1 2 System Defaults 1 5 Chapter 2 Initial Configuration 2 1 Connecting to the Switch 2 1 Configuration Options 2 1 Required Connections 2 2 Remote Connections 2 3 Basic Configuration 2 3 Console Connection 2 3 Setting Passwords 2 4 Setting an IP Address 2 4 Manual Configuration 2 4 Dynamic Configuration 2 5 Enabling SNMP Management Access 2 6 Community Strings for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients 2 6 Trap Receivers 2 7 Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients 2 8 Saving Configuration Settings 2 8 Managing System Files 2 9 Chapter 3 Configuring the Switch 3 1 Using the Web Interface 3 1 Navigating the Web Browser Interface 3 2 Home Page 3 2 Configuration Options 3 3 Panel Display 3 3 Main Menu 3 4 Basic Configuration 3 10 Displaying System Information 3 10 Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions 3 11 Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities 3 13 Setting the Switch s IP Address 3 14 Manual Configuration 3 15 Using DHCP BOOTP 3 16 Enabling Jumbo Frames 3 17 Managing Firmware 3 17 Downloading System Software from a Server
29. Related Commands ip access group 4 92 MAC ACLs The commands in this section configure ACLs based on hardware addresses packet format and Ethernet type To configure MAC ACLs first create an access list containing the required permit or deny rules and then bind the access list to one or more ports Table 4 35 MAC ACL Commands Command Function Mode Page access list mac Creates a MAC ACL and enters configuration mode GC 4 94 permit deny Filters packets matching a specified source and MAC ACL 4 94 destination address packet format and Ethernet type show mac access list Displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs PE 4 96 mac access group Adds a port to a MAC ACL IC 4 96 show mac access group Shows port assignments for MAC ACLs PE 4 97 4 93 4 Command Line Interface access list mac This command adds a MAC access list and enters MAC ACL configuration mode Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax no access list mac acl_name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one rule to the list To remove a rule use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configu
30. admin Home Page When your web browser connects with the switch s web agent the home page is displayed as shown below The home page displays the Main Menu on the left side of the screen and System Information on the right side The Main Menu links are used to navigate to other menus and display configuration parameters and statistics Unt 1 8 CET CE CE oe A E E a Vode Acive z F Link up f Link Down py es ES3528M Manager System Name Object ID Address Table Location panning Tree Contact LAN Priority System Up Time 0 days 2 hours 36 minutes and 37 5 seconds QoS IGMP Snooping MVR l Connect to textual user interface DHCP Snooping a Cluster Send mail to technical support lemem Connect to Edge Core Web Site Apply Revert Help Figure 3 1 Home Page Note The examples in this manual are based on the 28 port switch Other than the number of fixed ports there are no major differences between the 28 port and 52 port switch 3 2 Panel Display 3 Configuration Options Configurable parameters have a dialog box or a drop down list Once a configuration change has been made on a page be sure to click on the Apply button to confirm the new setting The following table summarizes the web page configuration buttons Table 3 1 Configuration Options Button Action Revert Cancels specified values and restores current values prior to pressing Apply A
31. display description Field Description Engineld String identifying the engine ID User Name Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Authentication Protocol The authentication protocol used with SNMPv3 Privacy Protocol The privacy protocol used with SNMPv3 Storage Type The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry SNMP remote user A user associated with an SNMP engine on a remote device 4 113 4 Command Line Interface Interface Commands These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an Ethernet port aggregated link or VLAN switchport nterface Table 4 42 Interface Commands Command Function Mode Page interface Configures an interface type and enters interface configuration GC 4 114 mode description Adds a description to an interface configuration IC 4 115 speed duplex Configures the speed and duplex operation of a given interface IC 4 115 when autonegotiation is disabled negotiation Enables autonegotiation of a given interface IC 4 116 capabilities Advertises the capabilities of a given interface for use in IC 4 117 autonegotiation flowcontrol Enables flow control on a given interface IC 4 118 shutdown Disables an interface IC 4 119 switchport broadcast Configures the broadcast storm control threshold IC 4 120 packet rate clear counters Clears statistics on an interface PE 4 120
32. line console 1 line vty 1 end Console 4 58 System Management Commands 4 Related Commands show running config 4 59 show running config This command displays the configuration information currently in use Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Use this command in conjunction with the show startup config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by symbols and includes the configuration mode command and corresponding commands This command displays the following information MAC address for each switch in the stack SNTP server settings Local time zone SNMP community strings Users names access levels and encrypted passwords Event log settings VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface IP address configured for the switch Layer 4 precedence settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet 4 59 A Command Line Interface Example Console show running config building startup config please wait 1 phymap 00 12 cf ce 2a 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 1 SNTP server 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 clock timezone hours 0 minu
33. new cos New Class of Service CoS value Range 0 7 e new dscp New Differentiated Service Code Point DSCP value Range 0 63 new precedence New IP Precedence value Range 0 7 Default Setting None Command Mode Policy Map Class Configuration Example This example creates a policy called rd_policy uses the class command to specify the previously defined rd_class uses the set command to classify the service that incoming packets will receive and then uses the police command to limit the average bandwidth to 100 000 Kbps the burst rate to 1522 bytes and configure the response to drop any violating packets Console config policy map rd_policy Console config pmap class rd_class Console config pmap c set ip dscp 3 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522 exceed action drop Console config pmap c 4 196 Quality of Service Commands 4 police This command defines an policer for classified traffic Use the no form to remove a policer Syntax no police rate kbps burst byte exceed action drop set e rate kbps Rate in kilobits per second Range 1 100000 kbps or maximum port speed whichever is lower burst byte Burst in bytes Range 64 1522 bytes drop Drop packet when specified rate or burst are exceeded set Set DSCP service to the specified value Range 0 63 Default Setting Drop out of profile packets Command Mode Policy Map Class Configuration
34. s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet against the source MAC address in the Ethernet header Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip dhcp snooping verify mac address Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If MAC address verification is enabled and the source MAC address in the Ethernet header of the packet is not same as the clients hardware address in the DHCP packet the packet is dropped Example This example enables MAC address verification Console config ip dhcp snooping verify mac address Console config Related Commands ip dhcp snooping 4 223 ip dhcp snooping vlan 4 225 ip dhcp snooping trust 4 226 ip dhcp snooping information option This command enables the DHCP Option 82 information relay for the switch Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip dhcp snooping information option Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage DHCP provides a relay mechanism for sending information about the switch and its DHCP clients to the DHCP server Known as DHCP Option 82 it allows compatible DHCP servers to use the information when assigning IP addresses or to set other services or policies for clients 4 227 4 Command Line Interface e When the DHCP Snooping Information Option is enabled clients can be identified by the switch port to which they are connected rather than just their MAC ad
35. untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet II packets tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets any Any MAC source or destination address host A specific MAC address source Source MAC address destination Destination MAC address range with bitmask e address bitmask 5 Bitmask for MAC address in hexidecimal format e vid VLAN ID Range 1 4093 e vid bitmask VLAN bitmask Range 1 4093 e protocol A specific Ethernet protocol number Range 600 fff hex e protocol bitmask Protocol bitmask Range 600 fff hex Default Setting None Command Mode MAC ACL Command Usage e New rules are added to the end of the list e The ethertype option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include the following 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 IPX 15 For all bitmasks 1 means care and 0 means ignore 4 95 4 Command Line Interface Example This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00 e0 29 94 34 de where the Ethernet type is 0800 Console config mac acl permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console config mac acl1 Related Commands access list mac 4 94 show mac access list This command displays the rules for config
36. 24 48 L2 L4 IPV4 IPV6 GE Switch Vty O Cluster Candidate Information Displays information about discovered switches in the network that are already cluster Members or are available to become cluster Members Command Attributes Role Indicates the current status of Candidate switches in the network MAC Address The MAC address of the Candidate switch Description The system description string of the Candidate switch 3 179 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Cluster Candidate Information Cluster Candidate Information Clear cluster candidate table Clear Role MAC Address Description Active Member 00 12 CF 23 49 CO 24 48 L2 L4 IPV4 IPV6 GE Switch Candidate _00 T2 CF 0B 47 A0 24 48 2 LAPVA IPVE GE Switch Figure 3 116 Cluster Candidate Information CLI This example shows information about cluster Candidate switches Vty O show cluster candidates 4 234 Cluster Candidates Role Mac Description ACTIVE MEMBER 00 12 cf 23 49 cO 24 48 L2 L4 IPV4 IPV6 GE Switch CANDIDATE 00 12 cf 0b 47 a0 24 48 L2 L4 IPV4 IPV6 GE Switch Vty 0 3 180 Chapter 4 Command Line Interface This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI Using the Command Line Interface Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the switch can be
37. 3 Excellent Effort 4 Controlled Load 5 6 7 Video less than 100 milliseconds latency and jitter Voice less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter Network Control Command Attributes e Priority CoS value Range 0 7 where 7 is the highest priority e Traffic Class10 Output queue buffer Range 0 3 where 3 is the highest CoS priority queue Web Click Priority Traffic Classes The current mapping of CoS values to output queues is displayed Assign priorities to the traffic classes i e output queues then click Apply Traffic Classes Priority Traffic Class o ft 03 1 0 0 3 2 0 0 3 3 M 03 4 R 03 5 R 03 6 E 03 7 E03 Figure 3 85 Traffic Classes 10 CLI shows Queue ID 3 141 3 Configuring the Switch CLI The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments Conso Conso config interface ethernet 1 1 4 114 config if queue cos map 0 0 4 186 Conso config if queue cos map 1 1 Conso config if queue cos map 2 2 Console config if end Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 4 188 Information of Eth 1 1 CoS Value 012 Priority Queue 0 1 2 Console e e e e 3 4 12 Wa 5 T 2 3 Mapping specific values for CoS priorities is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the swi
38. 6 Unicast output 5 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 QLen output 0 Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 3064 Broadcast input 262 Broadcast output 1 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 227208 Packets 3338 Broadcast pkts 263 Multi cast pkts 3064 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octets 3150 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 139 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 49 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 0 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 0 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 0 ethernet 1 7 show interfaces switchport This command displays the administrative and operational status of the specified interfaces Syntax show interfaces switchport interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 52 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Default Setting Shows all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfa
39. Command Usage The management interfaces are open to all IP addresses by default Once you add an entry to a filter list access to that interface is restricted to the specified addresses e If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager IP address can be configured for SNMP web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges e When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP web or Telnet the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the switch will accept overlapping address ranges 3 72 Access Control Lists 3 You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and end address Command Attributes Web IP Filter Configures IP address es for the web group SNMP IP Filter Configures IP address es for the SNMP group Telnet IP Filter Configures IP address es for the Telnet group IP Filter List IP address which are allowed management access to this interface Start IP Address A single IP address or
40. Destination file name V2271 F Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console config Console config boot system opcode V2271 F 4 69 Console config exit Console reload 4 22 Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings You can upload download configuration settings to from a TFTP server The configuration files can be later downloaded to restore the switch s settings Command Attributes File Transfer Method The configuration copy operation includes these options file to file Copies a file within the switch directory assigning it a new name file to running config Copies a file in the switch to the running configuration file to startup config Copies a file in the switch to the startup configuration file to tftp Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server running config to file Copies the running configuration to a file running config to startup config Copies the running config to the startup config running config to tftp Copies the running configuration to a TFTP server startup config to file Copies the startup configuration to a file on the switch startup config to running config Copies the startup config to the running config startup config to tftp Copies the startup configuration to a TFTP server 3 19 3 Configuring the Switch tftp to file Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch tftp to runnin
41. Disable the port Trap and Shutdown Send an SNMP trap message and disable the port e Security Status Enables or disables port security on the port Default Disabled Max MAC Count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 1024 where 0 means disabled Trunk Trunk number if port is a member page 3 80 and 3 81 3 56 User Authentication 3 Web Click Security Port Security Set the action to take when an invalid address is detected on a port mark the checkbox in the Status column to enable security for a port set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a port and click Apply Configuration Port Name Action Security Status Max MAC Count 0 1024 Trunk 1 Noe H I Enabled boo 2 None D Enabled fo 3 Mme z Enabled fo 4 None J F Enabled ooo 5 Trap and Shutdown F Enabled po 6 None Enabled fo y Figure 3 37 Configuring Port Security CLI This example selects the target port sets the port security action to send a trap and disable the port and sets the maximum MAC addresses allowed on the port and then enables port security for the port Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if port security action trap and shutdown 4 78 Console config if port security max mac count 20 4 78 Console config if port security 4 78 Console config if Configuri
42. HP OpenView The switch s web interface CLI configuration program and SNMP agent allow you to perform the following management functions e Set user names and passwords Set an IP interface for a management VLAN Configure SNMP parameters e Enable disable any port Set the speed duplex mode for any port e Configure the bandwidth of any port by limiting input rates Control port access through IEEE 802 1X security or static address filtering e Filter packets using Access Control Lists ACLs e Configure up to 255 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs Enable GVRP automatic VLAN registration e Configure IGMP multicast filtering Upload and download system firmware via TFTP Upload and download switch configuration files via TFTP e Configure Spanning Tree parameters e Configure Class of Service CoS priority queuing 2 Initial Configuration e Configure up to 8 static or LACP trunks e Enable port mirroring Set broadcast storm control on any port Display system information and statistics Required Connections The switch provides an RS 232 serial port that enables a connection to a PC or terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch A null modem console cable is provided with the switch Attach a VT100 compatible terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program to the switch You can use the console cable provided with this package or use a null modem cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown in the I
43. Parity none Stopbits 1 VTY configuration Password threshold 3 times timeout 600 sec Login timeout 300 sec General Commands Table 4 6 General Commands Command Function Mode Page enable Activates privileged mode NE 4 19 disable Returns to normal mode from privileged mode PE 4 20 configure Activates global configuration mode PE 4 21 show history Shows the command history buffer NE PE 4 21 reload Restarts the system PE 4 22 end Returns to Privileged Exec mode any 4 22 config mode exit Returns to the previous configuration mode or exits the CLI any 4 23 quit Exits a CLI session NE PE 4 23 help Shows how to use help any NA 2 Shows options for command completion context sensitive any NA enable This command activates Privileged Exec mode In privileged mode additional commands are available and certain commands display additional information See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 5 Syntax enable level level Privilege level to log into the device The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode 4 19 4 Command Line Interface Default Setting Level 15 Command Mode Normal Exec Command Usage e super is the default password required to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec To set this password see the enable password comm
44. Privileged Configuration Global Access Control List Class Map Interface Line Multiple Spanning Tree Policy Map VLAN Database You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes Exec Commands When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and password guest the system enters the Normal Exec command mode or guest mode displaying the Console gt command prompt Only a limited number of the commands are available in this mode You can access all commands only from the Privileged Exec command mode or administrator mode To access Privilege Exec mode open a new console session with the user name and password admin The system will now display the Console command prompt You can also enter Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode by entering the enable command followed by the privileged level password super page 4 27 To enter Privileged Exec mode enter the following user names and passwords Username admin Password admin login password CLI session with the ES3528M is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console Username guest Password guest login password CLI session with the ES3528M is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console gt enable Password privileged level password Console
45. Related Commands negotiation 4 116 capabilities 4 117 negotiation This command enables autonegotiation for a given interface Use the no form to disable autonegotiation Syntax no negotiation Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e When auto negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilities command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands 4 116 Interface Commands 4 e If autonegotiation is disabled auto MDI MDI X pin signal configuration will also be disabled for the RJ 45 ports Example The following example configures port 11 to use autonegotiation Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if negotiation Console config if Related Commands capabilities 4 117 speed duplex 4 115 capabilities This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during autonegotiation Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised capability or the no form without parameters to restore the default values Syntax no capabilities 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half flowcontrol symmetric 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation e 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation e 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation
46. Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS for secure access a Secure Sockets Layer SSL certificate appears for the switch By default the certificate that Netscape and Internet Explorer display will be associated with a warning that the site is not recognized as a secure site This is because the certificate has not been signed by an approved certification authority If you want this warning to be replaced by a message confirming that the connection to the switch is secure you must obtain a unique certificate and a private key and password from a recognized certification authority Caution For maximum security we recommend you obtain a unique Secure Sockets Layer certificate at the earliest opportunity This is because the default certificate for the switch is not unique to the hardware you have purchased When you have obtained these place them on your TFTP server and use the following command at the switch s command line interface to replace the default unrecognized certificate with an authorized one Console copy tftp https certificate 4 64 TFTP server ip address lt server ip address gt Source certificate file name lt certificate file name gt Source private file name lt private key file name gt Private password lt password for private key gt Note The switch must be reset for the new certificate to be activated To reset the switch type console reload
47. Specify opcode operational code to copy firmware 3 17 3 Configuring the Switch e File Name The file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Note Up to two copies of the system software i e the runtime firmware can be stored in the file directory on the switch The currently designated startup version of this file cannot be deleted Downloading System Software from a Server When downloading runtime code you can specify the destination file name to replace the current image or first download the file using a different name from the current runtime code file and then set the new file as the startup file Web Click System File Management Copy Operation Select tftp to file as the file transfer method enter the IP address of the TFTP server set the file type to opcode enter the file name of the software to download select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name then click Apply If you replaced the current firmware used for startup and want to start using the new operation code reboot the system via the System Reset menu Copy tftp to file z TFTP Server IP Address 192 168 1 19 File Type opcode Source File Name V2 2 1 bix f
48. System Management Commands 4 logging sendmail source email This command sets the email address used for the From field in alert messages Use the no form to delete the source email address Syntax no logging sendmail source email email address email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 0 41 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You may use an symbolic email address that identifies the switch or the address of an administrator responsible for the switch Example This example will set the source email john acme com Console config logging sendmail source email john acme com Console config logging sendmail destination email This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages Use the no form to remove a recipient Syntax no logging sendmail destination email email address email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 1 41 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages However you must enter a separate command to specify each recipient Example Console config logging sendmail destination email ted this company com Console config 4 51 4 Command Line Interface logging sendmail This command enables SMTP event handling Use the no form to disable this func
49. The switch only supports EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to the client The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP authentication type MD5 Some clients have native support in Windows otherwise the dot1x client must support it Displaying 802 1X Global Settings The 802 1X protocol provides client authentication Command Attributes 802 1X System Authentication Control The global setting for 802 1X Web Click Security 802 1X Information 3 58 User Authentication 3 802 1X Information 8021x System Authentication Control Disabled Figure 3 38 802 1X Global Information CLI This example shows the default global setting for 802 1X Console show dot1x 4 85 Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control enable 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized L71 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 2 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 1 802 1X is disabled on port 1 52 Console Configuring 802 1X Global Settings The 802 1X protocol provides port authentication The 802 1X protocol must be enabled globally for the switch system before port settings are active Command Attributes 802 1X System Authentication Control Sets the global setting for 802 1X Default Disabled Web Select Security 802 1X Configuration Enable 802 1X globally fo
50. To delete a view check the box next to the view name then click Delete SNMPv3 Views New Delete Name OID Subtrees Actions D defaultview View OID Subtrees Edit OID Subtrees SNMPv3 Views View view defaultview OID Subtree Type 1 Included Back SNMPv3 View Edit View Name defaultview Current New 1 included olD Subteef Cid sAn Type Included z Back Remove Figure 3 31 Configuring SNMPv3 Views 3 43 3 Configuring the Switch User Authentication You can restrict management access to this switch using the following options e User Accounts Manually configure access rights on the switch for specified users e Authentication Settings Use remote authentication to configure access rights e HTTPS Settings Provide a secure web connection e SSH Settings Provide a secure shell for secure Telnet access e Port Security Configure secure addresses for individual ports 802 1X Use IEEE 802 1X port authentication to control access to specific ports IP Filter Filters management access to the web SNMP or Telnet interface Configuring User Accounts The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters However the administrator has write access for all parameters governing the onboard agent You should therefore assign a new administrator password as soon as possible and store it in a
51. i e Differentiated Services Code Point mapping Use the no form to disable IP DSCP mapping Syntax no map ip dscp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP DSCP and default switchport priority Example The following example shows how to enable IP DSCP mapping globally Console config map ip dscp Console config map ip dscp Interface Configuration This command sets IP DSCP priority i e Differentiated Services Code Point priority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip dscp dscp value cos cos value no map ip dscp e dscp value 8 bit DSCP value Range 0 63 cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 4 189 A Command Line Interface Default Setting The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 Table 4 64 IP DSCP to CoS Vales IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 48 46 56 NL OD oy AJl N gt Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP DSCP and default switchport priority e DSCP priority values are mapped to default Class of Service values according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and
52. lacp port priority This command configures LACP port priority Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner port priority priority no lacp actor partner port priority actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e priority LACP port priority is used to select a backup link Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e Setting a lower value indicates a higher effective priority e If an active port link goes down the backup port with the highest priority is selected to replace the downed link However if two or more ports have the same LACP port priority the port with the lowest physical port number will be selected as the backup port Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor port priority 128 show lacp This command displays LACP information Syntax show lacp port channel counters internal neighbors sysid e port channel Local identifier for a link aggregation group Range 1 8 counters Statistics for
53. show interfaces status Displays status for the specified interface NE PE 4 121 show interfaces Displays statistics for the specified interfaces NE PE 4 122 counters show interfaces Displays the administrative and operational status of an NE PE 4 123 interface This command configures an interface type and enter interface configuration mode Use the no form to remove a trunk Syntax interface interface no interface port channel channel id interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 52 port channel channel id Range 1 8 e vlan vian id Range 1 4094 Default Setting None 4 114 Interface Commands 4 Command Mode Global Configuration Example To specify port 24 enter the following command Console config interface ethernet 1 24 Console config if description This command adds a description to an interface Use the no form to remove the description Syntax description string no description string Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached to this interface Range 1 64 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following example adds a description to port 24 Console config interface ethernet 1 24 Console config if description RD SW 3 Console config if speed duplex This command configures t
54. status and immediate leave status Group IP Information Displays the ports attached to an MVR multicast stream 3 164 Port Configuration Configures MVR interface type and immediate leave status 3 165 Trunk Configuration Configures MVR interface type and immediate leave status 3 165 Group Member Configuration Statically assigns MVR multicast streams to an interface 3 167 DHCP Snooping 3 168 Configuration Enables DHCP Snooping and DHCP Snooping MAC Address 3 169 Verification VLAN Configuration Enables DHCP Snooping for a VLAN 3 169 Information Option Enables DHCP Snooping Information Option 3 170 Configuration Port Configuration Selects the DHCP Snooping Information Option policy 3 171 Binding Information Displays the DHCP Snooping binding information 3 172 IP Source Guard 3 173 3 8 Main Menu 3 Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Port Configuration Enables IP source guard and selects filter type per port 3 173 Static Configuration Adds a static addresses to the source guard binding table 3 174 Dynamic Information Displays the source guard binding table for a selected interface 3 175 Cluster 3 176 Configuration Globally enables clustering for the switch 3 177 Member Configuration Adds switch Members to the cluster 3 178 Member Information Displays cluster Member switch information 3 178 Candidate Information Displays network Candidate switch information 3 179 3 Configur
55. type receiver source immediate group jp address e receiver Configures the interface as a subscriber port that can receive multicast data source Configure the interface as an uplink port that can send and receive multicast data for the configured multicast groups immediate Configures the switch to immediately remove an interface from a multicast stream as soon as it receives a leave message for that group jp address Statically configures an interface to receive multicast traffic from the IP address specified for an MVR multicast group Range 224 0 1 0 239 255 255 255 Default Setting The port type is not defined Immediate leave is disabled e No receiver port is a member of any configured multicast group Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 211 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage A port which is not configured as an MVR receiver or source port can use IGMP snooping to join or leave multicast groups using the standard rules for multicast filtering MVR receiver ports cannot be members of a trunk Receiver ports can belong to different VLANs but should not be configured as a member of the MVR VLAN IGMP snooping can be used to allow a receiver port to dynamically join or leave multicast groups within the MVR VLAN Multicast groups can also be statically assigned to a receiver port using the group keyword One or more interfaces may be configured as MVR source ports
56. 00 12 CF 12 34 72 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Flow control status Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Current status Created by LACP Link status Up Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 11 Eth1 12 Eth1 13 Console lacp system priority This command configures a port s LACP system priority Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner system priority priority no lacp actor partner system priority actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e priority This priority is used to determine link aggregation group LAG membership and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 4 131 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e Port must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG e System priority is combined with the switch s MAC address to form the LAG identifier This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not i
57. 1 Eth 1 1 GARP timer status Join timer 100 centiseconds Leave timer 60 centiseconds Leaveall timer 1000 centiseconds Console Related Commands garp timer 4 164 Editing VLAN Groups Table 4 55 Editing VLAN Groups Command Function Mode Page vian database Enters VLAN database mode to add change and delete GC 4 165 VLANs vlan Configures a VLAN including VID name and state VC 4 166 vlan database This command enters VLAN database mode All commands in this mode will take effect immediately Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 165 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage e Use the VLAN database command mode to add change and delete VLANs After finishing configuration changes you can display the VLAN settings by entering the show vlan command e Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port membership mode and add or remove ports from a VLAN The results of these commands are written to the running configuration file and you can display this file by entering the show running config command Example Console config vlan database Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 4 173 vlan This command configures a VLAN Use the no form to restore the default settings or delete a VLAN Syntax vlan vlan id name vlan name media ethernet state active suspend no vlan vlan id name state e vian id ID
58. 1 error number Information VLAN 1 link up notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 5 functions 1 error number Information System coldStart notification Figure 3 16 Displaying Logs 3 25 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example shows the event message stored in RAM Console show log ram 4 47 1 00 00 27 2001 01 01 VLAN 1 link up notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 0 00 00 25 2001 01 01 System coldStart notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 Console System Log Configuration The system allows you to enable or disable event logging and specify which levels are logged to RAM or flash memory Severe error messages that are logged to flash memory are permanently stored in the switch to assist in troubleshooting network problems Up to 4096 log entries can be stored in the flash memory with the oldest entries being overwritten first when the available log memory 256 kilobytes has been exceeded The System Logs page allows you to configure and limit system messages that are logged to flash or RAM memory The default is for event levels 0 to 3 to be logged to flash and levels 0 to 6 to be logged to RAM Command Attributes e System Log Status Enables disables the logging of debug or error messages to the logging process Default Enabled e Flash Level Limits log messages saved to the switch s permanent flash memory for all levels
59. 1 Eth 1 11 Static Console Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your switch you can manually configure the interface and a specified VLAN to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the switch Command Attributes Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router 3 158 Multicast Filtering 3 Web Click IGMP Snooping Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Specify the interfaces attached to a multicast router indicate the VLAN which will forward all the corresponding multicast traffic and then click Add After you have finished adding interfaces to the list click Apply Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Current New Vilan1 Unit Portl1 Interface Port lt lt Add VLAN ID 1 Remove Port 15 Trunk J Figure 3 97 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration CLI This example configures port 11 as a multicast router p
60. 10 sec Router Port Expire Time 300 sec Immediate Leave Processing Enabled on VLAN L IGMP Snooping Version Version 2 Console Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information obtained from IGMP along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet These routers may be dynamically discovered by the switch or statically assigned to an interface on the switch You can use the Multicast Router Port Information page to display the ports on this switch attached to a neighboring multicast router switch for each VLAN ID Command Attributes VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 e Multicast Router List Multicast routers dynamically discovered by this switch or those that are statically assigned to an interface on this switch 3 157 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Port Information Select the required VLAN ID from the scroll down list to display the associated multicast routers Multicast Router Port Information VLAN ID 1 gt Multicast Router List Unit Portl1 Static Figure 3 96 Displaying Multicast Router Port Information CLI This example shows that Port 11 has been statically configured as a port attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4 209 VLAN M cast Router Port Type
61. 192 168 0 99 interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if Related Commands ip source guard 4 219 ip dhcp snooping 4 223 ip dhcp snooping vlan 4 225 show ip source guard This command shows whether source guard is enabled or disabled on each interface Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip source guard Interface Filter type Eth 1 1 DISABLED Eth 1 2 DISABLED Eth 1 3 DISABLED Eth 1 4 DISABLED Eth 1 5 SIP Eth 1 6 DISABLED show ip source guard binding This command shows the source guard binding table Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 222 DHCP Snooping Commands 4 Example Console show ip source guard binding MacAddress IpAddress Lease sec Type VLAN Interface 11 22 33 44 55 66 192 168 0 99 0 Static 1 Eth 1 5 Console DHCP Snooping Commands DHCP snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCP servers or other devices which send port related information to a DHCP server This information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port This section describes commands used to configure DHCP snooping Table 4 76 DHCP Snooping Commands Command Function Mode Page ip dhcp snooping Enables DHCP snooping globally GC 4 22 3 ip dhcp snooping vlan Enables DHCP snooping on the specified VLAN GC 4 22 5 ip dhcp snooping trust Configures the specified interface as trusted IC 4 22 6 ip dhcp snooping
62. 2c Community strings SNMP version 3 MD5 or SHA password Port IEEE 802 1X MAC address filtering Access Control Lists Supports IP and MAC ACLs 100 rules per system DHCP Client Supported DHCP Snooping Supported with Option 82 relay information Port Configuration Speed duplex mode and flow control Rate Limiting Input rate limiting per port Port Mirroring One port mirrored to a single analysis port Port Trunking Supports up to 8 trunks using either static or dynamic trunking LACP Broadcast Storm Control Supported Static Address Up to 8K MAC addresses in the forwarding table IEEE 802 1D Bridge Supports dynamic data switching and addresses learning Store and Forward Switching Supported to ensure wire speed switching while eliminating bad frames Spanning Tree Algorithm Supports standard STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Virtual LANs Up to 255 using IEEE 802 1Q port based or private VLANs Traffic Prioritization Default port priority traffic class map queue scheduling or Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP and TCP UDP Port Qualify of Service Supports Differentiated Services DiffServ Multicast Filtering Supports IGMP snooping and query as well as Multicast VLAN Registration Switch Clustering Supports up to 36 Member switches in a cluster 1 1 4 Introduction Description of Software Features T
63. 3 Use the no form set the CoS map to the default values Syntax queue cos map queue_id cos1 cosn no queue cos map queue_id The ID of the priority queue Ranges are 0 to 3 where 3 is the highest priority queue cos1 cosn The CoS values that are mapped to the queue ID It is a space separated list of numbers The CoS value is a number from 0 to 7 where 7 is the highest priority 4 186 Priority Commands 4 Default Setting This switch supports Class of Service by using four priority queues with Weighted Round Robin queuing for each port Eight separate traffic classes are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown below Table 4 62 Default CoS Values to Egress Queues Queue 0 1 2 3 Priority 1 2 03 45 6 7 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage CoS values assigned at the ingress port are also used at the egress port This command sets the CoS priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 0 0 Console config if queue cos map 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 2 2 Console config if exit Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 Traffic Class 01 2 3 Priority Queue 0121 Console 45
64. 3 50 User Authentication 3 Configuring the Secure Shell The Berkley standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments These tools including commands such as rlogin remote login rsh remote shell and rcp remote copy are not secure from hostile attacks The Secure Shell SSH includes server client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol the switch generates a public key that the client uses along with a local user name and password for access authentication SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH enabled management station clients and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered Note You need to install an SSH client on the management station to access the switch for management via the SSH protocol Note The switch supports both SSH Version 1 5 and 2 0 clients Command Usage The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key authentication If password authentication is specified by the SSH client then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS remote authentication server as specified on the Authentication
65. 4 139 802 1X Port Authentication The switch supports IEEE 802 1X dot1x port based access control that prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server using EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol Table 4 32 802 1X Port Authentication Command Function Mode Page dot1x system auth control Enables dot1x globally on the switch GC 4 80 dot1x default Resets all dot1x parameters to their default values GC 4 80 dot1x max req Sets the maximum number of times that the switch IC 4 81 retransmits an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session dot1x port control Sets dot1x mode for a port interface IC 4 81 4 79 4 Command Line Interface Table 4 32 802 1X Port Authentication Continued dot1x system auth control This command enables 802 1X port authentication globally on the switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no dotx system auth control Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Command Function Mode Page dot1x operation mode Allows single or multiple hosts on an dot1x port IC 4 82 dot1x re authenticate Forces re authentication on specific ports PE 4 82 dot1x re authentication Enables re authentication for all ports IC 4 83 dot1x timeout q
66. 4094 Default Setting e MVR is disabled e No MVR group address is defined The default number of contiguous addresses is 0 e MVR VLAN ID is 1 Command Mode Global Configuration 4 210 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 Command Usage Use the mvr group command to statically configure all multicast group addresses that will join the MVR VLAN Any multicast data associated an MVR group is sent from all source ports and to all receiver ports that have registered to receive data from that multicast group The IP address range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 is used for multicast streams MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224 0 0 x IGMP snooping must be enabled to a allow a subscriber to dynamically join or leave an MVR group see ip igmp snooping on page 4 201 Note that only IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join or leave messages Example The following example enables MVR globally and configures a range of MVR group addresses Console config mvr Console config mvr group 228 1 23 1 10 Console config mvr Interface Configuration This command configures an interface as an MVR receiver or source port using the type keyword enables immediate leave capability using the immediate keyword or configures an interface as a static member of the MVR VLAN using the group keyword Use the no form to restore the default settings Syntax no mvr
67. 802 1X Port Authentication standard Glossary 1 Glossary GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined in each switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to register and propagate multicast group membership information in a switched environment so that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a switched LAN containing registered endstations Formerly called Group Address Registration Protocol Generic Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups GMRP requires that any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE 802 1p standard Group Attribute Registration Protocol GARP See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol IEEE 802 1D Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges including the Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 10 VLAN Tagging Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information It allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs and defines a standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks IEEE 802 1p An IEEE standard for providing quality of service QoS in Ethernet netwo
68. 8K addresses Store and Forward Switching The switch copies each frame into its memory before forwarding them to another port This ensures that all frames are a standard Ethernet size and have been verified for accuracy with the cyclic redundancy check CRC This prevents bad frames from entering the network and wasting bandwidth To avoid dropping frames on congested ports the switch provides 4 Mbits for frame buffering This buffer can queue packets awaiting transmission on congested networks Spanning Tree Algorithm The switch supports these spanning tree protocols Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D This protocol provides loop detection and recovery by allowing two or more redundant connections to be created between a pair of LAN segments When there are multiple physical paths between segments this protocol will choose a single path and disable all others to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network This prevents the creation of network loops However if the chosen path should fail for any reason an alternate path will be activated to maintain the connection Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w This protocol reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to 3 to 5 seconds compared to 30 seconds or more for the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard It is intended as a complete replacement for STP but can still interoperate with switches running the older stan
69. A source port is able to both receive and send data for multicast groups which it has joined through IGMP snooping or which have been statically assigned using the group keyword The IP address range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 is used for multicast streams MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224 0 0 x Immediate leave applies only to receiver ports When enabled the receiver port is immediately removed from the multicast group identified in the leave message When immediate leave is disabled the switch follows the standard rules by sending a group specific query to the receiver port and waiting for a response to determine if there are any remaining subscribers for that multicast group before removing the port from the group list Using immediate leave can speed up leave latency but should only be enabled on a port attached to one multicast subscriber to avoid disrupting services to other group members attached to the same interface Immediate leave does not apply to multicast groups which have been statically assigned to a port IGMP snooping must be enabled to a allow a subscriber to dynamically join or leave an MVR group see ip igmp snooping on page 4 201 Note that only IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join or leave messages Example The following configures one source port and several receiver ports on the switch enables immediate leave on one of the receiver ports an
70. Command Prompt Page Line line console vty Console config line 4 10 Access access list ip standard Console config std acl 4 88 Control List access list ip extended Console config ext acl 4 90 access list mac Console config mac acl 4 94 Class Map class map Console config cmap 4 198 Interface interface ethernet port port channel id vlan id Console config if 4 120 MSTP spanning tree mst configuration Console config mstp 4 1541 Policy Map policy map Console config pmap 4 200 VLAN vlan database Console config vlan 4 167 For example you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration mode and then return to Privileged Exec mode Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if exit Console config 4 Command Line Interface Command Line Processing Commands are not case sensitive You can abbreviate commands and parameters as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently available commands or parameters You can use the Tab key to complete partial commands or enter a partial command followed by the character to display a list of possible matches You can also use the following editing keystrokes for command line processing Table 4 3 Command Line Processing Keystroke Function Ctrl A Shifts cursor to start of command line Ctrl B Shifts cursor to the left o
71. Console config DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration Enables DHCP snooping on the specified VLAN Command Attributes VLAN ID ID of a configured VLAN Range 1 4094 DHCP Snooping Status Enables or disables DHCP snooping for the selected VLAN When DHCP snooping is enabled globally on the switch and enabled on the specified VLAN DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN 3 169 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration VLANID 1 DHCP Snooping Status Y Enabled Figure 3 106 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration CLI This example first enables DHCP Snooping for VLAN 1 Console config ip dhcp snooping vlan 1 4 225 Console config DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration DHCP provides a relay mechanism for sending information about the switch and its DHCP clients to the DHCP server Known as DHCP Option 82 it allows compatible DHCP servers to use the information when assigning IP addresses or to set other services or policies for clients When the DHCP Snooping Information Option is enabled clients can be identified by the switch port to which they are connected rather than just their MAC address DHCP client server exchange messages are then forwarded directly between the server and client without having to flood them to the entire VLAN In some cases the switch may rece
72. Console config Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions e STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D e RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w e MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s Note MSTP is not supported in the current software STA uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device STA compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on each bridging device except for the root device which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports After determining 3 101 3 Configuring the Switch the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all
73. DSCP DSCP priority level Range 0 63 Protocol Specifies the protocol type to match as TCP UDP or Others where others indicates a specific protocol number 0 255 Options TCP UDP Others Default TCP e Source Destination Port Source destination port number for the specified protocol type Range 0 65535 3 67 3 Configuring the Switch e Source Destination Port Bitmask Decimal number representing the port bits to match Range 0 65535 e Control Code Decimal number representing a bit string that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header Range 0 63 Control Code Bit Mask Decimal number representing the code bits to match The control bitmask is a decimal number for an equivalent binary bit mask that is applied to the control code Enter a decimal number where the equivalent binary bit 1 means to match a bit and 0 means to ignore a bit The following bits may be specified 1 fin Finish 2 syn Synchronize 4 rst Reset 8 psh Push 16 ack Acknowledgement 32 urg Urgent pointer For example use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set SYN flag valid use control code 2 control bitmask 2 Both SYN and ACK valid use control code 18 control bitmask 18 SYN valid and ACK invalid use control code 2 control bitmask 18 Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and
74. Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration 4 37 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config ip ssh authentication retires 2 Console config Related Commands show ip ssh 4 40 ip ssh server key size This command sets the SSH server key size Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh server key size key size no ip ssh server key size key size The size of server key Range 512 896 bits Default Setting 768 bits Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch The host key is shared with the SSH client and is fixed at 1024 bits Example Console config ip ssh server key size 512 Console config delete public key This command deletes the specified user s public key Syntax delete public key username dsa rsa username Name of an SSH user Range 1 8 characters dsa DSA public key type rsa RSA public key type Default Setting Deletes both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 38 System Management Commands 4 Example Console delete public key admin dsa Console ip ssh crypto host key generate This command generates the host key pair i e public and private Syntax ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa rsa e dsa DSA Version 2 key type rsa RSA Version 1 key type Default Se
75. Eth 1 5 Basic information Port type Mac address Configuration Name Port admin Speed duplex Capabilities Broadcast storm Flow control Lacp Port security Max MAC count Port security action Current status Link status Flow control type Information of VLAN 1 MAC address Console Broadcast storm limit Port operation status Operation speed duplex Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 100TX 00 12 CF 12 34 61 Up Auto 10half Enabled 64 Kbits second Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 None 10full 100half Up Up 100full None Console show interfaces status vlan 1 00 12 CF 12 34 56 100full show interfaces counters This command displays interface statistics Syntax show interfaces counters interface interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 52 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Default Setting Shows the counters for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Showing Port Statistics on page 3 94 4 122 Example Interface Commands 4 Console show interfaces counters Ethernet 1 7 Iftable stats Extended iftable stats Console Octets input 30658 Octets output 196550 Unicast input
76. Figure 3 88 Configuring Queue Scheduling 11 CLI shows Queue ID 3 143 3 Configuring the Switch CLI The following example shows how to display the WRR weights assigned to each of the priority queues Console show queue bandwidth 4 188 Queue ID Weight 0 1 1 2 2 4 3 8 Console Layer 3 4 Priority Settings Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values This switch supports one method of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic priorities can be specified in the IP header of a frame using the number of the TCP port When these service is enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic this switch maps priority values to the output queues in the following manner The precedence for priority mapping is IP DSCP Priority and then Default Port Priority Enabling IP DSCP Priority The switch allows you to enable or disable the IP DSCP priority Command Attributes e IP DSCP Priority Status The following options are Disabled Disables the priority service Default Setting Disabled IP DSCP Maps layer 3 4 priorities using Differentiated Services Code Point Mapping Web Click Priority IP DSCP Priority Status Select IP DSCP from the drop down menu then click Apply IP DSCP Priority Status P
77. Function Mode Page ip source guard Configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based on source IP IC 4 21 address or source IP address and corresponding MAC address 9 ip source guard Adds a static address to the source guard binding table GC 4 22 binding show ip Shows whether source guard is enabled or disabled on each PE 4 22 source guard interface 2 show ip Shows the source guard binding table PE 4 22 source guard 2 binding ip source guard This command configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based source IP address or source IP address and corresponding MAC address Use the no form to disable this function Syntax ip source guard sip sip mac no ip source guard e sip Filters traffic based on IP addresses stored in the binding table 4 219 4 Command Line Interface sip mac Filters traffic based on IP addresses and corresponding MAC addresses stored in the binding table Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage 4 220 Source guard is used to filter traffic on an unsecure port which receives messages from outside the network or firewall and therefore may be subject to traffic attacks caused by a host trying to use the IP address of a neighbor Setting source guard mode to sip or sip mac enables this function on the selected port Use the sip option to check the VLAN ID source IP address and port number
78. Groups on page 3 79 Note Auto negotiation must be disabled before you can configure or force the interface to use the Speed Duplex Mode or Flow Control options Web Click Port Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required interface settings and click Apply Port Configuration Port Name Admin Speed Duplex Flow Control Autonegotiation Media Type Trunk 1 P enabled Tamu enabled 7 Enabled Foo T 100 T 1000n toc frone E 2 Perene maT merasa PEM Fm Om pr s O Pcre aT meraca PEM EINE OM OM EC Re _ a ee ee ae el ae meen meen m s Peno mT rented FE Fo EE oe mee s Perea amr meranen POM 1 Fm moen S ee 7 rere mT merasa PEM Em Om S ae o lena Ge canny Enabled M 10h M 100h m 1000h M 10Gh isl Figure 3 49 Port Trunk Configuration 3 77 3 Configuring the Switch CLI Select the interface and then enter the required settings Console config interface ethernet 1 13 4 114 Console config if description RD SW 13 4 115 Console config if shutdown 4 119 Conso if no shutdown Conso if no negotiation 4 116 Conso if speed duplex 100half 4 115 Conso if lowcontrol 4 118 Conso if negotiation Conso if capabilities 100half 4 117 Conso if capabilities 100full Conso if capabilities flowcontrol 3 78 Port Configuration 3 Creating Trunk Groups Y
79. Hello Time 1 10 2 seconds Maximum Age 6 40 20 seconds Forward Delay 4 30 15 seconds lle RSTP Configuration Path Cost Method Long Transmission Limit 1 10 3 MSTP Configuration Max Instance Numbers 9 Configuration Digest 0xAC36177F50283CD4B83821D8AB26DE62 Region Revision 0 65535 0 Region Name 0 5 28 Max Hop Count 1 40 20 Figure 3 64 Configuring Spanning Tree 3 107 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example enables Spanning Tree Protocol sets the mode to RSTP and then configures the STA and RSTP parameters Console config spanning tree 4 143 Console config spanning tree mode rstp 4 143 Console config spanning tree priority 45056 4 146 Console config spanning tree hello time 5 4 145 Console config spanning tree max age 38 4 145 Console config spanning tree forward time 20 4 144 Console config spanning tree pathcost method long 4 147 Console config spanning tree transmission limit 4 4 148 Console config Displaying Interface Settings The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree Field Attributes Spanning Tree Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface STA Status Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree e Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forwa
80. However you must enter a separate command to specify each server To send email alerts the switch first opens a connection sends all the email alerts waiting in the queue one by one and finally closes the connection To open a connection the switch first selects the server that successfully sent mail during the last connection or the first server configured by this command If it fails to send mail the switch selects the next server in the list and tries to send mail again If it still fails the system will repeat the process at a periodic interval A trap will be triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a connection Example Console config logging sendmail host 192 168 1 200 Console config logging sendmail level This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages Syntax logging sendmail level eve level One of the system message levels page 4 44 Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Range 0 7 Default 7 Default Setting Level 7 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The specified level indicates an event threshold All events at this level or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients For example using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0 Example This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 4 through 0 Console config logging sendmail level 4 Console config 4 50
81. LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority 32768 Admin Key 4 Oper Key 4 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity 4 135 4 Command Line Interface Table 4 48 show lacp internal display description LACPDUs Internal Field Description Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information LACP System Priority LACP system priority assigned to this port channel LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group Admin State Administrative or operational values of the actor s state parameters Oper State Expired The actor s receive machine is in the expired state Defaulted The actor s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information administratively configured for the partner Distributing If false distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Collecting Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled i e collection is currently enab
82. MIB 2 interfaces table and the mask selects all index entries Console config snmp server view ifEntry a 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 included Console config 4 107 4 Command Line Interface show snmp view This command shows information on the SNMP views Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show snmp view View Name mib 2 Subtree OID 1 2 2 3 6 2 1 View Type included Storage Type permanent Row Status active View Name defaultview Subtree OID 1 View Type included Storage Type volatile Row Status active Console Table 4 39 show snmp view display description Field Description View Name Name of an SNMP view Subtree OID A branch in the MIB tree View Type Indicates if the view is included or excluded Storage Type The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry snmp server group This command adds an SNMP group mapping SNMP users to SNMP views Use the no form to remove an SNMP group Syntax snmp server group groupname v1 v2c v3 auth noauth priv read readview write writeview notify notifyview no snmp server group groupname 4 108 groupname Name of an SNMP group Range 1 32 characters v1 v2c v3 Use SNMP version 1 2c or 3 auth noauth priv This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication no authentication or with authentication and privacy See Simple Network Management Protocol on page 5 1 f
83. O Tx EAPOL Total 0 Rx EAP Resp ld OlTx EAP Reqild 0 Rx EAP Resp Oth O Tx EAP Req Oth 0 Refresh Figure 3 41 Displaying 802 1X Port Statistics CLI This example displays the 802 1X statistics for port 4 Console show dot1x statistics interface ethernet 1 4 4 85 Eth 1 4 Rx EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAP EAP EAP Start Logoff Invalid Total Resp Id Resp Oth LenError 2 0 0 1007 672 0 0 Last Last EAPOLVer EAPOLSrc 1 00 12 CF 94 34 DE Tx EAPOL EAP EAP Total Req Id Req Oth 2017 1005 0 Console Access Control Lists Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter incoming packets first create an access list add the required rules and then bind the list to a specific port Configuring Access Control Lists An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as 3 64 Access Control Lists 3 soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match for a list of all permit rules the packet is dropped and if no rules match for a list of all deny rules the packet is accepted Command Usage The following restrictions app
84. Policy Rule Settings Policy Name Policy 2 Class A Meter Name Action Rate ops Burst byte Exceed Action Remove Class Class Name none 7 Action Set z CoS 0 7 z Rate 1 100000 kbps D Meter Burst 64 1522 byte Exceed Set z IP DSCP 0 63 Add Figure 3 92 Configuring Policy Maps 3 152 Quality of Service 3 CLI This example creates a policy map called rd policy sets the average bandwidth the 1 Mbps the burst rate to 1522 bps and the response to reduce the DSCP value for violating packets to 0 Console config policy map rd_policy 3 4 200 Console config pmap class rd_class 3 4 200 Console config pmap c set ip dscp 4 4 201 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522 exceed action set ip dscp 0 4 202 Console config pmap c Attaching a Policy Map to Ingress Queues This function binds a policy map to the ingress queue of a particular interface Command Usage e You must first define a class map then define a policy map and finally bind the service policy to the required interface e You can only bind one policy map to an interface The current firmware does not allow you to bind a policy map to an egress queue Command Attributes e Ports Specifies a port e Ingress Applies the rule to ingress traffic e Enabled Check this to enable a policy map on the specified port e Policy Map Selec
85. Range 1 32 characters Group Name The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters Engine ID The engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the remote user resides Note that the remote engine identifier must be specified before you configure a remote user See Specifying a Remote Engine ID on page 44 Model The user security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 Level The security level used for the user noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications This is the default for SNMPv3 AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model e Authentication The method used for user authentication Options MD5 SHA Default MD5 Privacy The encryption algorithm use for data privacy only 56 bit DES is currently available Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Remote Users Click New to configure a user name In the New User page define a name and assign it to a group then click Add to save the configuration and return to the User Name list To delete a user check the box next to the user name then click Delete SNMPv3 Remote Users New Delete User Name Group Name Engine ID Model Level Authentication Priv
86. Registration A Software Specifications Quality of Service DiffServ supports class maps policy maps and service policies Additional Features BOOTP client SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol RMON Remote Monitoring groups 1 2 3 9 SMTP Email Alerts DHCP Snooping IP Source Guard Switch Clustering Management Features In Band Management Telnet Web based HTTP or HTTPS SNMP manager or Secure Shell Out of Band Management RS 232 DB 9 console port Software Loading TFTP in band or XModem out of band SNMP Management access via MIB database Trap management to specified hosts RMON Groups 1 2 3 9 Statistics History Alarm Event Standards IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and traffic priorities IEEE 802 1p Priority tags IEEE 802 1Q VLAN IEEE 802 1v Protocol based VLANs IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication IEEE 802 3 2005 Ethernet Fast Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex flow control Link Aggregation Control Protocol IEEE 802 3ac VLAN tagging DHCP Client RFC 1541 HTTPS IGMP RFC 1112 IGMPv2 RFC 2236 RADIUS RFC 2618 A 2 Management Information Bases A RMON RFC 1757 groups 1 2 3 9 SNMP RFC 1157 SNMPv2 RFC 2571 SNMPv3 RFC DRAFT 3414 3410 2273 3411 3415 SNTP RFC 2030 SSH Version 2 0 TFTP RFC 1350 Management Information Bases Bridge MIB RFC 1493 Differentiated Services MIB RFC 3289 E
87. SNMP group GC 4 111 show snmp user Shows the SNMP users PE 4 113 snmp server This command enables the SNMPv3 engine and services for all management clients i e versions 1 2c 3 Use the no form to disable the server Syntax no snmp server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server Console config show snmp This command can be used to check the status of SNMP communications Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 99 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage This command provides information on the community access strings counter information for SNMP input and output protocol data units and whether or not SNMP logging has been enabled with the snmp server enable traps command Example Console show snmp SNMP Agent enabled SNMP traps Authentication enable Link up down enable SNMP communities 1 private and the privilege is read write 2 public and the privilege is read only 0 SNMP packets input Bad SNMP version errors Unknown community name Illegal operation for community name supplied Encoding errors Number of requested variables Number of altered variables Get request PDUs Get next PDUs Set request PDUs 0 SNMP packets output Too big errors No such name errors Bad values errors General errors Response PDUs Trap PDUs ooo onomonono mo GaGa SNMP logging disabled
88. SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key authentication If password authentication is specified by the SSH client then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS remote authentication server as specified by the authentication login command on page 4 70 If public key authentication is specified by the client then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch and enable the SSH server To use the SSH server complete these steps 1 Generate a Host Key Pair Use the ip ssh crypto host key generate command to create a host public private key pair 2 Provide Host Public Key to Clients Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch Otherwise you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example 10 1 0 54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254 15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233 76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206 519417467729848654686157177393901647793559423035774
89. Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 52 port channel channel id Range 1 8 e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 4 139 4 Command Line Interface sort Sort by address vlan or interface Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each interface Note that the Type field may include the following types Learned Dynamic address entries Permanent Static entry Delete on reset Static entry to be deleted when system is reset The mask should be hexadecimal numbers representing an equivalent bit mask in the form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is applied to the specified MAC address Enter hexadecimal numbers where an equivalent binary bit O means to match a bit and 1 means to ignore a bit For example a mask of 00 00 00 00 00 00 means an exact match and a mask of FF FF FF FF FF FF means any The maximum number of address entries is 8191 Example Console show mac address table Interface Mac Address Vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 12 cf 94 34 de 1 Delete on reset Trunk 2 00 12 cf 8f aa 1b 1 Learned Console mac address table aging time This command sets the aging time for entries in the address table Use the no form to restore the default aging time Syntax mac address table aging time seconds no mac address table aging time seconds Aging time Range 10 30000 seconds 0 to disabl
90. TE G c C 53 c C C G 4 C O S 5 c c c Dy le Figure 3 74 Configuring a VLAN Static Table CLI The following example adds tagged and untagged ports to VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 114 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged 4 171 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 untagged Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 13 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged 3 128 VLAN Configuration 3 Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index Use the VLAN Static Membership by Port menu to assign VLAN groups to the selected interface as a tagged member Command Attributes e Interface Port or trunk identifier e Member VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged member Non Member VLANs for which the selected interface is not a tagged member Web Open VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Membership by Port Select an interface from the scroll down box Port or Trunk Click Query to display membership information for the interface Select a VLAN ID and then click Add to add the interface as a tagged member or click Remove to remove the interface After configuring VLAN membership for each interface click Apply VLAN Static Membership by Port Interface Pon 3 C Trunk Query Member Non Member vlan 1 Vian 2 as gt gl Figu
91. Tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Command Usage Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination mac known packets not for multicast broadcast or destination mac unknown packets Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination addresses Select the address type Any Host or MAC If you select Host enter a specific address e g 11 22 33 44 55 66 If you select MAC enter a base address and a hexadecimal bitmask for an address range Set any other required criteria such as VID Ethernet type or packet format Then click Add 3 70 Access Control Lists 3 MAC ACL Name Mac Source RA VID Ethernet i Source Destination a Ethernet Packet Action MAC f Bit Type Bit Remove Address Bit Mask MAC Address Mask Type Mask Format Action Permit Source Address Type Source MAC Address Any 7 Source Bit Mask g Destination Address Type Any Destination Bit Mask Destination MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 VID VID Bit Mask m Ethernet Type Ethernet Type Bit Mask Packet Format Any x Add Figure 3 45 Configuring MAC ACLs Binding a Port to an Access Control List After configuring the Access Control Lists ACL you can bind the ports that need to filter traffic to the appropriate ACLs You c
92. Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree cost cost no spanning tree cost cost The path cost for the port Range 0 for auto configuration or 1 200 000 000 The recommended range is Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 e Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 e 10 Gigabit Ethernet 200 20 000 Default Setting By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode e Ethernet half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 4 152 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Fast Ethernet half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 10 Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 1000 trunk 500 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority When the spanning tree pathcost method page 4 147 is set to short the maximum value for path cost is 65 535 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spannin
93. VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets However you should use IEEE 802 3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible to fully automate VLAN registration Automatic VLAN Registration GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a system whereby the switch can automatically learn the VLANs to which each end station should be assigned If an end station or its network adapter supports the IEEE 802 1Q VLAN protocol it can be configured to broadcast a message to your network indicating the VLAN groups it wants to join When this switch receives these messages it will automatically place the receiving port in the specified VLANs and then forward the message to all other ports When the message arrives at another switch that supports GVRP it will also place the receiving port in the specified VLANs and pass the message on to all other ports VLAN requirements are propagated in this way throughout the network This allows GVRP compliant devices to be automatically configured for VLAN groups based solely on endstation requests To implement GVRP in a network first add the host devices to the required VLANs using the operating system or other application software so that these VLANs can be propagated onto the network For both the edge switches attac
94. analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Trunking Ports can be combined into an aggregate connection Trunks can be manually set up or dynamically configured using IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The additional ports dramatically increase the throughput across any connection and provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk should fail The switch supports up to 8 trunks Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast suppression prevents broadcast traffic from overwhelming the network When enabled on a port the level of broadcast traffic passing through the port is restricted If broadcast traffic rises above a pre defined threshold it will be throttled until the level falls back beneath the threshold Static Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Static addresses can be used to provide network security by restricting access for a known host to a specific port IEEE 802 1D Bridge The switch supports IEEE 802 1D transparent bridging The address table facilitates data switching by learning addresses and then filtering or forwarding traffic based on this information The address table supports up to
95. and read write access Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show snmp group Group Name r amp d Security Model v3 Read View defaultview Write View daily Notify View none Storage Type permanent Row Status active Group Name public Security Model v1 Read View defaultview Write View none Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Group Name public Security Model v2c Read View defaultview Write View none Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Group Name private Security Model v1 Read View defaultview Write View defaultview Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Group Name private Security Model v2c Read View defaultview Write View defaultview Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Console 4 110 SNMP Commands 4 Table 4 40 show snmp group display description Field Description groupname Name of an SNMP group security model The SNMP version readview The associated read view writeview The associated write view notifyview The associated notify view storage type The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry snmp server user This command adds a user to an SNMP group restricting the user to a specific SNMP Read Write or Notify View Use the no form to remove a user from an SNMP group Syntax snmp server
96. assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over the network You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the configuration program 4 215 4 Command Line Interface e If you select the bootp or dhcp option IP is enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received Requests will be broadcast periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address default gateway and subnet mask e You can start broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests by entering an ip dhcp restart command or by rebooting the switch Note Only one VLAN interface can be assigned an IP address the default is VLAN 1 This defines the management VLAN the only VLAN through which you can gain management access to the switch If you assign an IP address to any other VLAN the new IP address overrides the original IP address and this becomes the new management VLAN Example In the following example the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1 Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config if Related Commands ip dhcp restart 4 217 ip default gateway This command establishes a static route between
97. based on the required level of service and then placing them in the appropriate output queue Data is transmitted from the queues using weighted round robin service to enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower level queues Priority may be set according to the port default the packet s priority bit in the VLAN tag TCP UDP port number or DSCP priority bit Differentiated Services Code Point Service DSCP DSCP uses a six bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories and then into the output queues Domain Name Service DNS A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP IP network DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network access rights for any device that is plugged into the switch A user name and password is requested by the switch and then passed to an authentication server e g RADIUS for verification EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE
98. box to enable or disable the SNMP Agent Web Click SNMP Agent Status SNMP Agent Status Snmp Agent Status M Enabled Figure 3 25 Enabling SNMP Agent Status 3 35 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access To configure SNMPv3 management access to the switch follow these steps 1 If you want to change the default engine ID it must be changed first before configuring other parameters 2 Specify read and write access views for the switch MIB tree 3 Configure SNMP user groups with the required security model i e SNMP v1 v2c or v3 and security level i e authentication and privacy 4 Assign SNMP users to groups along with their specific authentication and privacy passwords Setting the Local Engine ID An SNMPV3 engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides on the switch This engine protects against message replay delay and redirection The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch This is referred to as the default engine ID If the local engine ID is deleted or changed all SNMP users will be cleared You will need to reconfigure all existing users A new engine ID can be specified by entering 1 to 26 hexadecimal characters If less than 26 characters are specified trailing zeroes are added to the
99. bridge soon after its election as the new root e g upon expiration of the Topology Change Timer immediately subsequent to its election topologyChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 A topologyChange trap is sent by a bridge when any of its configured ports transitions from the Learning state to the Forwarding state or from the Forwarding state to the Discarding state The trap is not sent if a newRoot trap is sent for the same transition SNMPv2 Traps coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 A coldStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity acting in an agent role is reinitializing itself and that its configuration may have been altered warmStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 A warmStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity acting in an agent role is reinitializing itself such that its configuration is unaltered linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 A linkDown trap signifies that the SNMP entity acting in an agent role has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links is about to enter the down state from some other state but not from the notPresent state This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus 3 40 Simple Network Management Protocol 3 Table 3 4 Supported Notification Messages Continued Object Label Object ID Description linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 A linkUp trap signifies that the SNMP entity acting in an agent role has dete
100. but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error Received Bytes Total number of bytes of data received on the network This statistic can be used as a reasonable indication of Ethernet utilization Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment 3 95 3 Configuring the Switch Table 3 10 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description Received Frames The total number of frames bad broadcast and multicast received Broadcast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets Multicast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address CRC Alignment Errors The number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors Undersize Frames The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Oversize Frames The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Fragments The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error 64 Bytes Frames The total n
101. c Ifa match is found the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random sequence of bytes and sends this string to the client d The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes and sends the decrypted bytes back to the switch e The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent If the two sets match this means that the client s private key corresponds to an authorized public key and the client is authenticated Notes 1 To use SSH with only password authentication the host public key must still 3 52 be given to the client either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file However you do not need to configure the client s keys 2 The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions User Authentication 3 Configuring the SSH Server The SSH server includes basic settings for authentication Field Attributes e SSH Server Status Allows you to enable disable the SSH server on the switch Default Disabled e Version The Secure Shell version number Version 2 0 is displayed but the switch supports management access via either SSH Version 1 5 or 2 0 clients e SSH Authentication Timeout Specifies the time interval in seconds that the SSH server waits for a response from a client during an authentication attempt Range 1 120 seconds Default 120 seconds e SSH Aut
102. can achieve quicker convergence for end node workstations and servers and also overcome other STA related timeout problems Remember that fast forwarding should only be enabled for ports connected to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for an end node device This command is the same as spanning tree edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Note that this command may be removed for future software versions Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if bridge group 1 portfast Console config if Related Commands spanning tree edge port 4 154 spanning tree link type This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree link type auto point to point shared no spanning tree link type auto Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting point to point Point to point link e shared Shared medium Default Setting auto Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Specify a point to point link if the interface can only be connected to exactly one other bridge or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges e When automatic detection is selected the switch derives the link type from the duplex mode A full duplex interface is considered a point to point link while a half duplex int
103. client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no management all client http client snmp client telnet client start address end address all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP web and Telnet groups e http client Adds IP address es to the web group snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group e telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group e start address A single IP address or the starting address of a range end address The end address of a range Default Setting All addresses Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage 4 28 If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager IP address can be configured for SNMP web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP web or Telnet the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the switch will accept overlapping address ranges You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses
104. command displays the configuration file stored in non volatile memory that is used to start up the system Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 57 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage Use this command in conjunction with the show running config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory e This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by symbols and includes the configuration mode command and corresponding commands This command displays the following information SNMP community strings Users names and access levels VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface IP address configured for the switch Spanning tree settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet Example Console show startup config building startup config please wait 1 username admin access level 15 username admin password 0 admin 1 username guest access level 0 username guest password 0 guest 1 enable password level 15 0 super 1 snmp server community public ro snmp server community private rw 1 logging history ram 6 logging history flash 3 1 vlan database vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active 1 interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 interface vlan 1 ip address dhcp 1
105. command enables this device to send Simple Network Management Protocol traps or informs i e SNMP notifications Use the no form to disable SNMP notifications Syntax no snmp server enable traps authentication link up down authentication Keyword to issue authentication failure notifications link up down Keyword to issue link up or link down notifications Default Setting Issue authentication and link up down traps Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e If you do not enter an snmp server enable traps command no notifications controlled by this command are sent In order to configure this device to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server enable traps command If you enter the command with no keywords both authentication and link up down notifications are enabled If you enter the command with a keyword only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled The snmp server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the snmp server host command Use the snmp server host command to specify which host or hosts receive SNMP notifications In order to send notifications you must configure at least one snmp server host command 4 104 SNMP Commands 4 The authentication link up and link down traps are legacy notifications and therefore when used for SNMP Version 3 hosts they must be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding entries in the Notify View assig
106. command with a specified level enables remote logging and sets the minimum severity level to be saved Using this command without a specified level also enables remote logging but restores the minimum severity level to the default Example Console config logging trap 4 Console config clear logging This command clears messages from the log buffer Syntax clear logging flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset Default Setting Flash and RAM Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear logging Console 4 46 System Management Commands 4 Related Commands show logging 4 47 show logging This command displays the configuration settings for logging messages to local switch memory to an SMTP event handler or to a remote syslog server Syntax show logging flash ram sendmail trap flash Displays settings for storing event messages in flash memory i e permanent memory ram Displays settings for storing event messages in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset sendmail Displays settings for the SMTP event handler page 4 52 trap Displays settings for the trap function Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example The following example shows that system logging is enabled the message level
107. control value with regard to this link 0 Passive 1 Active 3 87 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Port LACP Port Internal Information Select a port channel to display the corresponding information LACP Port Internal Information Interface Port 3 Trunk ID 1 LACP System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority 32768 Admin Key 3 Oper Key 3 LACPDUS Interval secs 30 seconds Admin State Expired Oper State Expired Admin State Defaulted Oper State Defaulted Admin State Distributing Oper State Distributing 2 Admin State Collecting Oper State Collecting 4 S i Oper State Synchronization eg Admin State Aggregation Oper State Aggregation A Admin State Timeout Long Oper State Timeout Long Admin State LACP Activity Oper State LACP Activity 4 Figure 3 54 LACP Port Internal Information CLI The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the local side of port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 internal 4 134 Port channel 1 Oper Key 120 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 1 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 3 LACP Port Priority 128 Admin Key 120 Oper Key 120 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity 3 88 Port Configuration 3 Display
108. default setting Force Unauthorized Forces the port to deny access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise Re authen Sets the client to be re authenticated after the interval specified by the Re authentication Period Re authentication can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port Default Disabled Max Req Sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Range 1 10 Default 2 Quiet Period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Range 1 65535 seconds Default 60 seconds Re authen Period Sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Range 1 65535 seconds Default 3600 seconds Tx Period Sets the time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds Authorized Yes Connected client is authorized No Connected client is not authorized Blank Displays nothing when dot1x is disabled on a port Supplicant Indicates the MAC address of a connected client Trunk Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port Web Click Security 802 1X Port Configuration Modify the parameters required and click Apply 3 60 User Authentica
109. devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo frames 4 63 4 Command Line Interface Enabling jumbo frames will limit the maximum threshold for broadcast storm control to 64 packets per second See the switchport broadcast command on page 4 120 The current setting for jumbo frames can be displayed with the show system command page 4 61 Example Console config jumbo frame Console config Flash File Commands These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files Table 4 25 Flash File Commands Command Function Mode Page copy Copies a code image or a switch configuration to or from flash PE 4 64 memory or a TFTP server delete Deletes a file or code image PE 4 67 dir Displays a list of files in flash memory PE 4 68 whichboot Displays the files booted PE 4 69 boot system Specifies the file or image used to start up the system GC 4 69 copy This command moves upload download a code image or configuration file between the switch s flash memory and a TFTP server When you save the system code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore system operation The success of the file transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server and the quality of the network connection Syntax copy file file running config startup config tftp unit copy running c
110. dynamic or static address table for this port will be authorized to access the network The port will drop any incoming frames with a source MAC address that is unknown or has been previously learned from another port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message Table 4 31 Port Security Commands Command Function Mode Page port security Configures a secure port IC 4 78 mac address table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC 4 138 show mac address table Displays entries in the bridge forwarding database PE 4 139 port security This command enables or configures port security Use the no form without any keywords to disable port security Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to restore the default settings for a response to security violation or for the maximum number of allowed addresses Syntax port security action shutdown trap trap and shutdown max mac count address count no port security action max mac count action Response to take when port security is violated shutdown Disable port only trap Issue SNMP trap message only trap and shutdown Issue SNMP trap message and disable port e max mac count address count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 1024
111. for all the SSH client s granted management access to the switch Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts page as described on page 3 44 The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA Version 1 key 1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880 05553616163105177594083868631109291232226828519254374603 100937 187721199 69631781366277414168985132049117204830339254324 10163799759237 1449011938 0060902539484084827 178194372288402533 11595213486 10229029789827213532671 31629432532818915045306393916643 steve 192 168 1 19 Set the Optional Parameters On the SSH Settings page configure the optional parameters including the authentication timeout the number of retries and the server key size Enable SSH Service On the SSH Settings page enable the SSH server on the switch Challenge Response Authentication When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can access The following exchanges take place during this process a The client sends its public key to the switch b The switch compares the client s public key to those stored in memory
112. frames include all types or tagged frames only page 4 169 Native VLAN Indicates the default Port VLAN ID page 4 170 Priority for untagged traffic Indicates the default priority for untagged frames page 4 183 Gvrp status Shows if GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is enabled or disabled page 4 163 host association Private VLAN mapping Allowed Vlan Shows the VLANs this interface has joined where u indicates untagged and t indicates tagged page 4 171 Forbidden Vian Shows the VLANs this interface can not dynamically join via GVRP page 4 172 Private VLAN mode Shows the private VLAN mode as host promiscuous or none 4 277 Private VLAN Shows the secondary or community VLAN with which this port is associated 4 177 Shows the primary VLAN mapping for a promiscuous port 4 179 4 124 Mirror Port Commands 4 Mirror Port Commands This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target port Table 4 44 Mirror Port Commands Command Function Mode Page port monitor Configures a mirror session IC 4 125 show port monitor Shows the configuration for a mirror port PE 4 126 port monitor This command configures a mirror session Use the no form to clear a mirror session Syntax port monitor interface rx tx no port monitor interface interface ethernet unit port source port unit Stack unit Always unit
113. if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 4 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 Console config if lacp actor port priority 512 Console config if end Console show lacp sysid 4 134 Port Channel System Priority System MAC Address 1 3 00 12 CF 31 31 31 2 32768 00 12 CF 31 31 31 3 32768 00 12 CF 31 31 31 4 32768 00 12 CF 31 31 31 Console show lacp 1 internal 4 134 Port channel 1 Oper Key 120 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 1 LACPDUs Internal LACP System Priority 3 LACP Port Priority 128 Admin Key 120 Oper Key 120 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity distributing collecting aggregation long timeout Oper State synchronization LACP activity Displaying LACP Port Counters You can display statistics for LACP protocol messages Table 3 7 LACP Port Counters Field Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group 3 85 3 Configuring the Switch Table 3 7 LACP Port Counters Continued Field Description Marker Unknown Pkts Number of frames received that either 1 Carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contai
114. in the Policy Name field and click Add When the Policy Rule Settings page opens select a class name from the scroll down list Class Name field Configure a policy for traffic that matches criteria defined in this class by setting the quality of service that an IP packet will receive in the Action field defining the maximum throughput and burst rate in the Meter field and the action that results from a policy violation in the Exceed field Then finally click Add to register the new policy A policy map can contain multiple class statements that can be applied to the same interface with the Service Policy Settings page 3 153 You can configure up to 64 policers i e meters or class maps for each of the following access list types MAC ACL IP ACL including Standard ACL and Extended ACL IPv6 Standard ACL and IPv6 Extended ACL This limitation applies to each switch chip ES4524D ports 1 26 ES4548D ports 1 25 ports 26 50 Also note that the maximum number of classes that can be applied to a policy map is 16 Policing is based on a token bucket where bucket depth i e the maximum burst before the bucket overflows is by specified the Burst field and the average rate tokens are removed from the bucket is by specified by the Rate option After using the policy map to define packet classification service tagging and bandwidth policing it must be assigned to a specific interface by a service policy pag
115. in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Designated Root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Root Port The number of the port on this switch that is closest to the root This switch communicates with the root device through this port If there is no root port then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the Spanning Tree network Root Path Cost The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root device Configuration Changes The number of times the Spanning Tree has been reconfigured e Last Topology Change Time since the Spanning Tree was last reconfigured These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI e Spanning tree mode Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D RS
116. level The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec nopassword No password is required for this user to log in 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password password The authentication password for the user Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting e The default access level is Normal Exec e The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are Table 4 10 Default Login Settings username access level password guest 0 guest admin 15 admin Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example This example shows how to set the access level and password for a user Console config username bob access level 15 Console config username bob password 0 smith Console config 4 26 System Management Commands 4 enable password After initially logging onto the system you should set the Privileged Exec password Remember to record it in a safe place This command controls access to the Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level Use the no form to reset the default password Sy
117. limit e rate The traffic rate limit level Range 64 100000 kilobits per second for 100 Mbps ports 64 1000000 kilobits per second for 1 Gbps ports Default Setting Input Output Rate Limit Status Disabled Rate level 100000 kilobits per second for 100 Mbps ports 1000000 kilobits per second for 1 Gbps ports Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if rate limit input 2000 Console config if 4 127 4 Command Line Interface Link Aggregation Commands Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link i e trunk to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Or you can use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP to automatically negotiate a trunk link between this switch and another network device For static trunks the switches have to comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard For dynamic trunks the switches have to comply with LACP This switch supports up to four trunks For example a trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can support an aggregate bandwidth of 4 Gbps when operating at full duplex Table 4 46 Link Aggregation Commands Command Function Mode Page Manual Configuration Commands interface port channel Configures a trunk and enters interface GC 4 114 configuration mode for the trunk channel group Adds a port to a trunk
118. many diagnostic code files and configuration files as available flash memory space allows In the system flash memory one file of each type must be set as the start up file During a system boot the diagnostic and operation code files set as the start up file are run and then the start up configuration file is loaded Note that configuration files should be downloaded using a file name that reflects the contents or usage of the file settings If you download directly to the running config the system will reboot and the settings will have to be copied from the running config to a permanent file 2 Initial Configuration 2 10 Chapter 3 Configuring the Switch Using the Web Interface This switch provides an embedded HTTP web agent Using a web browser you can configure the switch and view statistics to monitor network activity The web agent can be accessed by any computer on the network using a standard web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape 6 2 or above Note You can also use the Command Line Interface CLI to manage the switch over a serial connection to the console port or via Telnet For more information on using the CLI refer to Chapter 4 Command Line Interface Prior to accessing the switch from a web browser be sure you have first performed the following tasks 1 Configure the switch with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using an out of band serial connection BOOTP or D
119. mark the Interface MAC Address or VLAN checkbox select the method of sorting the displayed addresses and then click Query Dynamic Addresses Query by F Interface e Poti z Trunk z T MAC Address T VLAN fi Address Table Sort Key Address gt Query Dynamic Address Table Dynamic Address Counts 1 00 01 80 4B 82 93 VLAN 1 Unit 1 Port 1 Dynamic Current Dynamic Address Table Figure 3 61 Configuring a Dynamic Address Table CLI This example also displays the address table entries for port 1 Console show mac address table interface ethernet 1 1 4 139 Interface Mac Address Vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 12 CF 48 82 93 1 Delete on reset Eth 1 1 00 12 CF 94 34 DE 2 Learned Console 3 100 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 Changing the Aging Time You can set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table Command Attributes e Aging Status Enables disables the function Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded Range 10 630 seconds Default 300 seconds Web Click Address Table Address Aging Specify the new aging time click Apply Address Aging Aging Status M Enabled Aging Time 10 630 300 seconds Figure 3 62 Setting the Address Aging Time CLI This example sets the aging time to 300 seconds Console config mac address table aging time 300 4 140
120. must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTI settings 3 113 3 Configuring the Switch Command Attributes e MST Instance Instance identifier of this spanning tree Default 0 e Priority The priority of a spanning tree instance Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default 32768 e VLANs in MST Instance VLANs assigned this instance e MST ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 57 Default 0 e VLAN ID VLAN to assign to this selected MST instance Range 1 4094 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP VLAN Configuration Select an instance identifier from the list set the instance priority and click Apply To add the VLAN members to an MSTI instance enter the instance identifier the VLAN identifier and click Add MSTP VLAN Configuration MST Instance ID 0 7 Spanning Tree State Enabled Designated Root 32768 000035281 003 Bridge ID 3276800003528 1003 Root Port lo Max Age 20 Root Path Cost 0 Hello Time 2 ConfigurationChanges O Forward Delay 15 Last Topology Change 0 d 4h 21 min 45 s Priority 0 61440 32768 MSTP VLAN Configuration VLAN in MST Instance VLAN 1 a VLAN 2 VLAN 3 Remove VLAN 4 VLANS5 MST ID 0 4094 VLAN ID Add Figure 3 67 Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees CLI This example sets the priority f
121. must have the same LACP system priority Ports must have the same port admin key Ethernet Interface If the port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group However if the port channel admin key is set then the port admin key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group If a link goes down LACP port priority is used to select the backup link channel group This command adds a port to a trunk Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk Syntax channel group channel id no channel group channel id Trunk index Range 1 8 Default Setting The current port will be added to this trunk Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage When configuring static trunks the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard Use no channel group to remove a port group from a trunk Use no interfaces port channel to remove a trunk from the switch 4 129 4 Command Line Interface Example The following example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 11 Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if lacp This com
122. of configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vlan name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters media ethernet Ethernet media type state Keyword to be followed by the VLAN state active VLAN is operational suspend VLAN is suspended Suspended VLANs do not pass packets Default Setting By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active Command Mode VLAN Database Configuration Command Usage no vlan vian id deletes the VLAN no vlan vian id name removes the VLAN name no vlan vian id state returns the VLAN to the default state i e active e You can configure up to 255 VLANs on the switch 4 166 VLAN Commands 4 Example The following example adds a VLAN using VLAN ID 105 and name RD5 The VLAN is activated by default Console config vlan database Console config vlan vlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 4 173 Configuring VLAN Interfaces Table 4 56 Configuring VLAN Interfaces Command Function Mode Page interface vlan Enters interface configuration mode for a specified VLAN GC 4 167 switchport mode Configures VLAN membership mode for an interface IC 4 168 switchport Configures frame types to be accepted by an interface IC 4 169 acceptable frame types switchport ingress filtering Enables ingress filtering on an interface IC 4 169 switchpor
123. on the items displayed by this command 4 62 Example System Management Commands 4 Console show version Unit1 Serial number Service tag Hardware version Module A type Module B type Number of ports Main power status Redundant power status Agent master Unit ID Loader version Boot ROM version Operation code version Console S416000937 ROL 1000BaseT 1000BaseT 52 up not present W N Wu He abk Hom Frame Size Commands Table 4 24 Frame Size Commands Command Function Mode Page jumbo frame Enables support for jumbo frames GC 4 63 jumbo frame This command enables support for jumbo frames Use the no form to disable it Syntax no jumbo frame Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e This switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data transfers by supporting jumbo frames up to 9216 bytes Compared to standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1 5 KB using jumbo frames significantly reduces the per packet overhead required to process protocol encapsulation fields To use jumbo frames both the source and destination end nodes such as a computer or server must support this feature Also when the connection is operating at full duplex all switches in the network between the two end nodes must be able to accept the extended frame size And for half duplex connections all
124. or destination addresses Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range Set any other required criteria such as service type protocol type or TCP control code Then click Add 3 68 Access Control Lists 3 Extended ACL Name Extended ACL Action rts Samat Paseo Tuna TOS Precedence DSCP Protocol Pon Pole Destine ion PoE ers as ron Address Mask Mask Mask Mask Mask Action Permit Source Address Type Any Source IP Address pooo Source Subnet Mask pooo Destination Address Type Any Destination IP Address pooo Destination Subnet Mask pooo OO Service Type ross Precedence 0 7 oser osa Protocol TteP e Cupan C others Source Port 0 65535 o Source Port Bit Mask 0 65535 Destination Port 0 65535 Destination Port Bit Mask 0 65535 Control Code 0 63 L Control Code Bit Mask 0 63 o Add E Figure 3 44 Configuring Extended IP ACLs CLI This example adds two rules 1 Accept any incoming packets if the source address is in subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through 2 Allow TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168
125. port Specifies the port to be used by the web browser interface GC 4 30 ip http server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from a browser GC 4 30 ip http secure server Enables HTTPS for encrypted communications GC 4 31 ip http secure port Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS GC 4 32 ip http port This command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface Use the no form to use the default port Syntax ip http port port number no ip http port port number The TCP port to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 Default Setting 80 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip http port 769 Console config Related Commands ip http server 4 30 ip http server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 30 System Management Commands 4 Example Console config ip http server Console config Related Commands ip http port 4 30 ip http secure server This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access i e an encrypted connection to the switch s web interface Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http secure server Default Setting Enabled Com
126. ports to a primary VLAN and any host ports a community VLAN To configure an isolated VLAN follow these steps 1 Use the Private VLAN Configuration menu page 3 133 to designate an isolated VLAN that will channel all traffic through a single promiscuous port 2 Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration menu page 3 136 to set the port type to promiscuous i e the single channel to the external network or isolated i e having access only to the promiscuous port in its own VLAN Then assign the promiscuous port and all host ports to an isolated VLAN Displaying Current Private VLANs The Private VLAN Information page displays information on the private VLANs configured on the switch including primary community and isolated VLANs and their assigned interfaces Command Attributes e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 and VLAN type Primary VLAN The VLAN with which the selected VLAN ID is associated A primary VLAN displays its own ID a community VLAN displays the associated primary VLAN and an isolated VLAN displays the stand alone VLAN e Ports List The list of ports and assigned port type in the selected private VLAN 3 132 VLAN Configuration 3 Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Information Select the desired port from the VLAN ID drop down menu Private VLAN Information VLAN ID 5 PrnmaryVLAN Primary VLAN VLAN 5 Ports List Unit 1 Port 3 Promiscuous Unit 1 Port 4 Host U
127. reauthenticate Example Authentication Commands Console show dot1x Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status 1 1 disabled 1 2 enabled 1 52 disabled 802 1X Port Details enable Operation Mode Single Host Single Host Single Host 802 1X is disabled on port 1 1 802 1X is enabled on port 1 2 reauth enabled Enable reauth period quiet period 30 tx period 40 supplicant timeout server timeout 10 reauth max 2 max req 5 Status Operation mode Max count Port control Supplicant Current Identifier Authenticator State State Reauth Count 1800 30 Authorized Single Host 5 Auto 00 12 cf 49 5e de 3 Machine Authenticated 0 Backend State Machine State Request Count Identifier Server Idle 0 2 Reauthentication State Machine State Initialize 802 1X is disabled on port 1 52 Console Mode ForceAuthorized auto ForceAuthorized Authorized n a yes n a 4 87 4 Command Line Interface Access Control List Commands Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol or Layer 4 protocol port number or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter packets first create an access list add the required rules and then bind the list to a specific port Access Control Lists An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that app
128. region in which this switch is located Use the no form to clear the name Syntax name name name Name of the spanning tree Default Setting Switch s MAC address Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage The MST region name and revision number page 4 151 are used to designate a unique MST region A bridge i e spanning tree compliant device such as this switch can only belong to one MST region And all bridges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances Example Console config mstp name R amp D Console config mstp Related Commands revision 4 151 4 150 Spanning Tree Commands 4 revision This command configures the revision number for this multiple spanning tree configuration of this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax revision number number Revision number of the spanning tree Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage The MST region name page 4 150 and revision number are used to designate a unique MST region A bridge i e spanning tree compliant device such as this switch can only belong to one MST region And all bridges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances Example Console config mstp revision 1 Console config mstp Related Commands name 4 150 max hops This command configures the maximum number of hops in the region before a BPDU
129. result consecutive RSTP MSTP BPDUs Transmission limit The minimum interval between the transmission of Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface Web Click Spanning Tree STA Information STA Information Spanning Tree Spanning Tree State Enabled Designated Root 32768 0012CF0B0D00 Bridge ID 32768 0012CF0B0D00 Root Port lo Max Age 20 Root Path Cost 0 Hello Time 2 Configuration Changes 1 Forward Delay 15 Last Topology Change 0 d 0 h 16 min 23 s Figure 3 63 Displaying Spanning Tree Information CLI This command displays global STA settings followed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode Spanning tree enabled disabled Priority Bridge Hello Time sec Bridge Max Age sec Bridge Forward Delay sec Root Hello Time sec Root Max Age sec Root Forward Delay sec Designated Root Current root port Current root cost Number of topology changes Last topology changes time Transmission limit Path Cost Method sec 4 158 15 32768 0012CFOBODO00 0 0 1 2262 3 long Note The current root port and current root cost display as zero when this device is not connected to the network 3 104 Spanning Tree Algorithm
130. root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating any possible network loops Designated _ Root Ea a F jaz Pa yem is A x X J Designated X Boot z S an _ CN Designated Port pan oo E all ae rr Nec _ Bridge l 4 Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the Root Bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower legacy STP RSTP is also incorporated into MSTP RSTP achieves must faster reconfiguration i e around 1 to 3 seconds compared to 30 seconds or more for STP by reducing the number of state changes before active ports start learning predefining an alternate route that can be used when a node or port fails and retaining the forwarding database for ports insensitive to changes in the tree structure when reconfiguration occurs When using STP or RSTP it may be difficult to maintain a stable path between all VLAN members Frequent changes in the tree
131. safe place The default guest name is guest with the password guest The default administrator name is admin with the password admin Command Attributes e Account List Displays the current list of user accounts and associated access levels Defaults admin and guest e New Account Displays configuration settings for a new account User Name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters maximum number of users 16 Access Level Specifies the user level Options Normal and Privileged Password Specifies the user password Range 0 8 characters plain text case sensitive Change Password Sets a new password for the specified user name Add Remove Adds or removes an account from the list 3 44 User Authentication 3 Web Click Security User Accounts To configure a new user account specify a user name select the user s access level then enter a password and confirm it Click Add to save the new user account and add it to the Account List To change the password for a specific user enter the user name and new password confirm the password by entering it again then click Apply User Accounts Account List New Account py S User Name bob guest Normal lt lt Add Access Level Normal z Remove Password ra Confirm Password Change Password User Name New Password ooo Confirm Pasw Change Figu
132. section describes the commands used to configure the SSH server However note that you also need to install a SSH client on the management station when using this protocol to configure the switch Note The switch supports both SSH Version 1 5 and 2 0 Table 4 15 SSH Commands Command Function Mode Page ip ssh server Enables the SSH server on the switch GC 4 36 ip ssh timeout Specifies the authentication timeout for the SSH server GC 4 37 ip ssh Specifies the number of retries allowed by a client GC 4 37 authentication retries ip ssh server key size Sets the SSH server key size GC 4 38 copy tftp public key Copies the user s public key from a TFTP server to the switch PE 4 64 delete public key Deletes the public key for the specified user PE 4 38 ip ssh crypto host key Generates the host key PE 4 39 generate ip ssh crypto zeroize Clear the host key from RAM PE 4 39 ip ssh save host key Saves the host key from RAM to flash memory PE 4 40 disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4 18 show ip ssh Displays the status of the SSH server and the configured values PE 4 40 for authentication timeout and retries show ssh Displays the status of current SSH sessions PE 4 41 show public key Shows the public key for the specified user or for the host PE 4 42 show users Shows SSH users including privilege level and public key type PE 4 61 4 34 System Management Commands 4 The
133. security violation is detected shutdown trap trap and shutdown or none Current Status e Link Status Indicates if the link is up or down Port Operation Status Provides detailed information on port state Displayed only when the link is up Operation speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Flow control type Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or none CLI This example shows the connection status for Port 5 Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 4 121 Information of Eth 1 5 Basic information Port type 100TX Mac address 00 12 CF 12 34 61 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Broadcast storm Enabled Broadcast storm limit 500 packets second Flow control Disabled Lacp Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Port security action None Current status Link status Down Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None Console Configuring Interface Connections You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to enable disable an interface set auto negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise or manually fix the speed duplex mode and flow control Command Attributes e Name Allows you to label an interface Range 1 64 characters Admin Allows you to manually disable an interface You can dis
134. setting NE PE 4 57 sntp client This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP or SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers command Use the no form to disable SNTP client requests Syntax no sntp client Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times for log events Without SNTP the switch only records the time starting from the factory default set at the last bootup i e 00 00 00 Jan 1 2001 This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the sntp servers command It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command 4 53 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Console config sntp poll 60 Console config sntp client Console config end Console show sntp Current time Dec 23 02 52 44 2002 Poll interval 60 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 10 1 0 19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Current server 10 1 0 19 Console Related Commands sntp server 4 54 sntp poll 4 55 show sntp 4 55 snip server This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are issued Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the current list Syntax sntp server p7 ip2 ip3 ip IP address of a time ser
135. settings 3 76 Trunk Membership Specifies ports to group into static trunks 3 80 LACP 3 81 Configuration Allows ports to dynamically join trunks 3 81 Aggregation Port Configures parameters for link aggregation group members 3 83 3 Configuring the Switch Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Port Counters Information Displays statistics for LACP protocol messages 3 85 Port Internal Information Displays settings and operational state for the local side 3 87 Port Neighbors Information Displays settings and operational state for the remote side 3 89 Port Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each port 3 90 Trunk Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each trunk 3 90 Mirror Port Configuration Sets the source and target ports for mirroring 3 92 Rate Limit 3 93 Input Port Configuration Sets the input rate limit for each port 3 93 Input Trunk Configuration Sets the input rate limit for each trunk 3 93 Output Port Configuration Sets the output rate limit for ports 3 93 Output Trunk Configuration Sets the output rate limit for trunks 3 93 Port Statistics Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics 3 94 Address Table 3 98 Static Addresses Displays entries for interface address or VLAN 3 98 Dynamic Addresses Displays or edits static entries in the Address Table 3 99 Address Aging
136. spanning tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode temporarily disrupting user traffic Example The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree Console config spanning tree mode rstp Console config spanning tree forward time This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree forward time seconds no spanning tree forward time seconds Time in seconds Range 4 30 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 4 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 15 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration 4 144 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Example Console config spanning tree forward time 20 Console config spanning tree hello time This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree hello time time
137. subnet mask and default gateway Be sure the management station has an IP address in the same subnet as the switch s IP interface to which it is connected e If you are trying to connect to the switch via the IP address for a tagged VLAN group your management station and the ports connecting intermediate switches in the network must be configured with the appropriate tag e Ifyou cannot connect using Telnet you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet SSH sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time Cannot connect using Secure Shell e If you cannot connect using SSH you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet SSH sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time e Be sure the control parameters for the SSH server are properly configured on the switch and that the SSH client software is properly configured on the management station e Be sure you have generated a public key on the switch and exported this key to the SSH client Be sure you have set up an account on the switch for each SSH user including user name authentication level and password Be sure you have imported the client s public key to the switch if public key authentication is used Cannot access the on board configuration program via a serial port connection Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and 9600 bps e Ch
138. the CLI Admin status Shows if this interface is enabled e Path cost This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch is the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree 3 109 3 Configuring the Switch Algorithm is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with the lowest numeric identifier will be enabled e Designated root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device e Fast forwarding This field provides the same information as Admin Edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Admin Edge Port You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides qu
139. the multiple spanning tree configuration PE 4 160 configuration 4 142 Spanning Tree Commands 4 spanning tree This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no spanning tree Default Setting Spanning tree is enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down Example This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch Console config spanning tree Console config spanning tree mode This command selects the spanning tree mode for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Note MSTP is not supported in the current software Syntax spanning tree mode stp rstp mstp no spanning tree mode stp Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D e rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w e mstp Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s Default Setting rstp Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Spanning Tree Protocol Uses R
140. the starting address of a range End IP Address The end address of a range Add Remove Filtering Entry Adds removes an IP address from the list Web Click Security IP Filter Enter the IP addresses or range of addresses that are allowed management access to an interface and click Add Web IP Filtering Entry to update the filter list IP Filter Web IP Filter Web IP Filter List Start IP a Address End IP Address Add Web IP Filtering Entry Remove Web IP Filtering Entry Figure 3 47 Creating an IP Filter List 3 73 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example allows SNMP access for a specific client Console config management snmp client 10 1 2 3 4 28 Console config end Console show management all client Management IP Filter HTTP Client Start IP address End IP address SNMP Client Start IP address End IP address TELNET Client Start IP address End IP address Console Port Configuration Displaying Connection Status You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display the current connection status including link state speed duplex mode flow control and auto negotiation Field Attributes Web e Name Interface label Type Indicates the port type 1OOBASE TX 1000BASE T or SFP e Admin Status Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled e Oper Status Indicates if the link is Up or Down Speed Duplex Status Sh
141. the switch MVR status for receiver ports is ACTIVE only if there are subscribers receiving multicast traffic from one of the MVR groups or a multicast group has been statically assigned to an interface Immediate Leave Shows if immediate leave is enabled or disabled The following shows information about the interfaces associated with multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Console show mvr members MVR Group IP Status Members 225 0 0 1 ACTIVE eth1 1 d eth1l 2 s 225 0 0 2 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 3 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 4 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 5 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 6 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 7 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 8 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 9 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 10 INACTIVE None Console Table 4 73 show mvr members display description Field Description MVR Group IP Multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Status Shows whether or not the there are active subscribers for this multicast group Note that this field will also display INACTIVE if MVR is globally disabled Members Shows the interfaces with subscribers for multicast services provided through the MVR VLAN Also shows if an interface has dynamically joined a multicast group d or if a multicast group has been statically bound to the interface s 4 214 IP Interface Commands 4 IP Interface Commands An IP addresses may be used for management access to the switch over your network The IP address f
142. the user isolation and data security provided by VLAN segregation by passing only multicast traffic into other VLANs to which the subscribers belong Table 4 70 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands Command Function Mode Page myr Globally enables MVR statically configures MVR group GC 4 21 address es or specifies the MVR VLAN identifier 0 myr Configures an interface as an MVR receiver or source port IC 4 21 enables immediate leave capability or configures an 1 interface as a static member of the MVR VLAN show mvr Shows information about the global MVR configuration PE 4 21 settings the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN or the 3 multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN mvr Global Configuration This command enables Multicast VLAN Registration MVR globally on the switch statically configures MVR multicast group IP address es using the group keyword or specifies the MVR VLAN identifier using the vlan keyword Use the no form of this command without any keywords to globally disable MVR Use the no form with the group keyword to remove a specific address or range of addresses Or use the no form with the vlan keyword restore the default MVR VLAN Syntax no mvr group jp address count vlan vian id jp address IP address for an MVR multicast group Range 224 0 1 0 239 255 255 255 count The number of contiguous MVR group addresses Range 1 255 e vian id MVR VLAN ID Range 1
143. this switch and devices that exist on another network segment Use the no form to remove the static route Syntax ip default gateway gateway no ip default gateway gateway IP address of the default gateway Default Setting No static route is established Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A gateway must be defined if the management station is located in a different IP segment Example The following example defines a default gateway for this device Console config ip default gateway 10 1 1 254 Console config Related Commands show ip redirects 4 218 4 216 IP Interface Commands 4 ip dhcp restart This command submits a BOOTP or DHOP client request Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface that has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode via the ip address command DHCP requires the server to reassign the client s last address if available Ifthe BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain the network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new domain Example In the following example the device is reassigned the same address Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and addr
144. time 20 sec Router port expire time 300 sec Immediate Leave Processing Disabled on all VLAN IGMP snooping version Version 2 Console Enabling IGMP Immediate Leave The IGMP snooping immediate leave feature enables a Layer 2 LAN interface to be removed from the multicast forwarding table without first sending an IGMP group specific query to the interface Upon receiving a group specific IGMPv2 leave message the switch immediately removes the interface from the Layer 2 forwarding table entry for that multicast group unless a multicast router was learned on the port IGMP immediate leave improves bandwidth management for all hosts in a switched network 3 156 Multicast Filtering 3 Command Attributes e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Immediate Leave Enable or disable IGMP immediate leave for the selected VLAN Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Immediate Leave IGMP Immediate Leave VLANID 1 v Immediate Leave V Enabled Figure 3 95 IGMP Immediate Leave CLI This example enables IGMP immediate leave for VLAN 1 and then displays the current IGMP snooping status Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip igmp snooping immediate leave 4 203 Console config if end Console show ip igmp snooping 4 202 Service Status Enabled Querier Status Disabled Leave proxy status Enabled Query Count 2 Query Interval 125 sec Query Max Response Time
145. type of traffic GC 4 192 match Defines the criteria used to classify traffic CM 4 193 policy map Creates a policy map for multiple interfaces GC 4 194 class Defines a traffic classification for the policy to act on PM 4 195 set Classifies IP traffic by setting a CoS DSCP or IP precedence PM C 4 196 value in a packet police Defines an enforcer for classified traffic PM C 4 197 service policy Applies a policy map defined by the policy map command to IC 4 198 the input of a particular interface show class map Displays the QoS class maps which define matching criteria PE 4 198 used for classifying traffic 4 191 4 Command Line Interface Table 4 65 Quality of Service Commands Command Function Mode Page show policy map Displays the QoS policy maps which define classification PE 4 199 criteria for incoming traffic and may include policers for bandwidth limitations show policy map interface Displays the configuration of all classes configured for all PE 4 199 service policies on the specified interface To create a service policy for a specific category of ingress traffic follow these steps 1 2 ti Use the class map command to designate a class name for a specific category of traffic and enter the Class Map configuration mode Use the match command to select a specify type of traffic based on an access list a DSCP or IP Precedence value or a VLAN Set an ACL mask
146. up to the specified level For example if level 3 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be logged to flash Range 0 7 Default 3 Table 3 3 Logging Levels Level Severity Name Description 7 Debug Debugging messages 6 Informational Informational messages only 5 Notice Normal but significant condition such as cold start 4 Warning Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return 3 Error Error conditions e g invalid input default used 2 Critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted 1 Alert Immediate action needed 0 Emergency System unusable There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release e RAM Level Limits log messages saved to the switch s temporary RAM memory for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 7 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 7 will be logged to RAM Range 0 7 Default 6 Note The Flash Level must be equal to or less than the RAM Level 3 26 Basic Configuration 3 Web Click System Log System Logs Specify System Log Status set the level of event messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory then click Apply System Logs System Log Status F Enabled Flash Level 0 7 0 Ram Level 0 7 0 Figure 3 17 System Logs CLI Enable system logging and then specify the level of messages to be logge
147. using the default user name and password perform these steps 1 To initiate your console connection press lt Enter gt The User Access Verification procedure starts At the Username prompt enter admin 3 At the Password prompt also enter admin The password characters are not displayed on the console screen 4 The session is opened and the CLI displays the Console prompt indicating you have access at the Privileged Exec level 2 Initial Configuration Setting Passwords Note If this is your first time to log into the CLI program you should define new passwords for both default user names using the username command record them and put them in a safe place Passwords can consist of up to 8 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive To prevent unauthorized access to the switch set the passwords as follows 1 Open the console interface with the default user name and password admin to access the Privileged Exec level 2 Type configure and press lt Enter gt 3 Type username guest password 0 password for the Normal Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt 4 Type username admin password 0 password for the Privileged Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt Note 0 specifies the password in plain text 7 specifies the password in encrypted form Username admin Password CLI sess
148. value For example the value 1234 is equivalent to 1234 followed by 22 zeroes Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Engine ID _ SNMPv3 Engine ID Engine ID 8301000003000035281 0030000 Default Save Figure 3 26 Setting an Engine ID 3 36 Simple Network Management Protocol 3 Specifying a Remote Engine ID To send inform messages to an SNMPv3 user on a remote device you must first specify the engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the user resides The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent For informs the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent You therefore need to configure the remote agent s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it The engine ID can be specified by entering 1 to 26 hexadecimal characters If less than 26 characters are specified trailing zeroes are added to the value For example the value 1234 is equivalent to 1234 followed by 22 zeroes Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Remote Engine ID Remote IP Host Action E Figure 3 27 Setting a Remote Engine ID Configuring SNMPv3 Users Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name Users must be configured with a specific security le
149. 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octets 25568 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 1616 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 1249 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 1449 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 802 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 871 Console Address Table Settings Switches store the addresses for all known devices This information is used to pass traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports All the addresses learned by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table You can also manually configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port Setting Static Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Command Attributes e Static Address Counts The number of manually configured addresses e Current Static Address Table Lists all the static addresses Interface Port or trunk associated with the device assigned a static address MAC Address Physical address of a device mapped to this interface e VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 6 Web only 3 98 Address Table Settings 3 Web Click Address Table Static Addresses Specify the interface the MAC address and VLAN then click Add Static Address Static Addresses S
150. 0 500 4 207 A Command Line Interface Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The switch must use IGMPv2 for this command to take effect Example The following shows how to configure the default timeout to 300 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping router port expire time 300 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 202 Static Multicast Routing Commands Table 4 69 Static Multicast Routing Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping vlan Adds a multicast router port GC 4 208 mrouter show ip igmp snooping Shows multicast router ports PE 4 209 mrouter ip igmp snooping vian mrouter This command statically configures a multicast router port Use the no form to remove the configuration Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan vian id mrouter interface vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 52 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Default Setting No static multicast router ports are configured Command Mode Global Configuration 4 208 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 Command Usage Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on y
151. 0Base TX MEnabled 64 kbits sec 5 100Base TX M Enabled 64 kbits sec 6 100Base Tx Enabled 64 kbits sec 7 100Base TX Enabled 64 kbits sec x Figure 3 56 Port Broadcast Control CLI Specify any interface and then enter the threshold The following disables broadcast storm control for port 1 and then sets broadcast suppression at 500 kilobits per second for port 2 Information of Eth 1 2 Console Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 114 Console config if no switchport broadcast 4 120 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate 500 4 120 Console config if end Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 2 4 123 Broadcast threshold Enabled 500 Kbits second LACP status Disabled Ingress Rate Limit Disabled 100000 Kbits per second Egress Rate Limit Disabled 100000 Kbits per second VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule Enabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 0 GVRP status Disabled Allowed VLAN 1 u Forbidden VLAN Private VLAN mode NONE Private VLAN host association NONE Private VLAN mapping NONE 3 91 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring Port Mirroring You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMO
152. 1 port Port number Range 1 52 e rx Mirror received packets e tx Mirror transmitted packets Default Setting No mirror session is defined Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet destination port Command Usage e You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the destination port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner The destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port All mirror sessions must share the same destination port When mirroring port traffic the target port must be included in the same VLAN as the source port 4 125 4 Command Line Interface Example The following example configures the switch to mirror received packets from port 6 to 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 rx Console config if show port monitor This command displays mirror information Syntax show port monitor interface interface ethernet unit port source port e unit Stack unit Always unit 1 e port Port number Range 1 52 Default Setting Shows all sessions Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the currently configured source port des
153. 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e HTTP Console config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any 4 90 Console config ext acl permit tcp 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 Console config std ac1l 3 69 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring a MAC ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules e Source Destination Address Type Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to indicate a specific MAC address or MAC to specify an address range with the Address and Bitmask fields Options Any Host MAC Default Any e Source Destination MAC Address Source or destination MAC address e Source Destination Bitmask Hexadecimal mask for source or destination MAC address e VID VLAN ID Range 1 4094 VID Mask VLAN bitmask Range 1 4094 Ethernet Type This option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets Range 600 fff hex A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 IPX Ethernet Type Bitmask Protocol bitmask Range 600 fff hex e Packet Format This attribute includes the following packet types Any Any Ethernet packet type Untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet II packets Untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets
154. 13098022737087794545 2408397 17526463580581 767 16709574804776117 3 Import Client s Public Key to the Switch Use the copy tftp public key command to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client s granted management access to the switch Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts page as described on page 3 44 The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA Version 1 key 1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880 05553616163105177594083868631109291232226828519254374603100937187721199 696317813662774 14168985 13204911720483033925432410163799759237 1449011938 00609025394840848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671 3162943253281 8915045306393916643 steve 192 168 1 19 4 Set the Optional Parameters Set other optional parameters including the authentication timeout the number of retries and the server key size 5 Enable SSH Service Use the ip ssh server command to enable the SSH server on the switch 6 Configure Challenge Response Authentication When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method Only clients that have a private key 4 35 4 Command Line Interface corresponding to the public k
155. 2 Allow the switch to send SNMP traps i e notifications page 4 104 3 Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the snmp server host command as described in this section Create a view with the required notification messages page 4 107 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 4 108 Specify a remote engine ID where the user resides page 4 105 Then configure a remote user page 4 111 NO 4 103 4 Command Line Interface e The switch can send SNMP Version 1 2c or 3 notifications to a host IP address depending on the SNMP version that the management station supports If the snmp server host command does not specify the SNMP version the default is to send SNMP version 1 notifications e If you specify an SNMP Version 3 host then the community string is interpreted as an SNMP user name If you use the V3 auth or priv options the user name must first be defined with the snmp server user command Otherwise the authentication password and or privacy password will not exist and the switch will not authorize SNMP access for the host However if you specify a V3 host with the noauth option an SNMP user account will be generated and the switch will authorize SNMP access for the host Example Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 batman Console config Related Commands snmp server enable traps 4 104 snmp server enable traps This
156. 22 Wo 7 3 Related Commands show queue cos map 4 188 show queue mode This command shows the current queue mode Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue mode Queue mode wrr Console 4 187 4 Command Line Interface show queue bandwidth This command displays the weighted round robin WRR bandwidth allocation for the four priority queues Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue bandwidth Queue ID Weight Console show queue cos map This command shows the class of service priority map Syntax show queue cos map interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 52 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 Traffic Class 01 2 Priority Queue 1 0 0 Console 3 4 12 Wa 5 2 2 3 4 188 Priority Commands 4 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Table 4 63 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Command Function Mode Page map ip dscp Enables IP DSCP class of service mapping GC 4 189 map ip dscp Maps IP DSCP value to a class of service IC 4 189 show map ip dscp Shows the IP DSCP map PE 4 190 map ip dscp Global Configuration This command enables IP DSCP mapping
157. 28 10 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 11 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 128 11 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 12 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 128 12 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 13 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 128 13 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled a Figure 3 68 Displaying MSTP Interface Settings 3 116 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 CLI This displays STA settings for instance 0 followed by settings for each port The settings for instance 0 are global settings that apply to the IST the settings for other instances only apply to the local spanning tree Console show spanning tree mst 0 4 231 Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enable disable enable Instance 0 Vlans configuration 1 4094 Priority 32768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 15 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 15 Max hops 20 Remaining hops 20 Designated Root 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 Current root port 1 Current root cost 200000 Number of topology changes 1 Last topology changes time sec 645 Transmission limit 3 Path Cost Method long Admin status enable Role root State forwarding External path cost 100000 Internal path cost 100000 Priority 128 Designated cost 200000 Designated port 128 24 Designated r
158. 3 Port Information only 3 166 Multicast VLAN Registration 3 CLI This example configures an MVR source port and receiver port and then enables immediate leave on the receiver port Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if mvr type source 4 211 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if mvr type receiver 4 211 Console config if mvr immediate 4 211 Console config if Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces For multicast streams that will run for a long term and be associated with a stable set of hosts you can statically bind the multicast group to the participating interfaces Command Usage e Any multicast groups that use the MVR VLAN must be statically assigned to it under the MVR Configuration menu see Configuring Global MVR Settings on page 3 162 e The IP address range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 is used for multicast streams MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224 0 0 x Command Attributes e Interface Indicates a port or trunk Member Shows the IP addresses for MVR multicast groups which have been statically assigned to the selected interface Non Member Shows the IP addresses for all MVR multicast groups which have not been statically assigned to the selected interface Web Click MVR Group Member Configuration Select a port or trunk from the Interfa
159. 3 145 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 19 4 24 4 24 4 25 4 26 4 28 4 30 4 31 4 33 4 34 4 41 4 43 4 44 4 47 4 48 4 49 4 53 4 57 4 63 4 64 4 68 4 70 XV Tables Table 4 28 Table 4 29 Table 4 30 Table 4 31 Table 4 32 Table 4 33 Table 4 34 Table 4 35 Table 4 36 Table 4 37 Table 4 38 Table 4 39 Table 4 40 Table 4 41 Table 4 42 Table 4 43 Table 4 44 Table 4 45 Table 4 46 Table 4 47 Table 4 48 Table 4 49 Table 4 50 Table 4 51 Table 4 52 Table 4 53 Table 4 54 Table 4 55 Table 4 56 Table 4 57 Table 4 58 Table 4 59 Table 4 60 Table 4 61 Table 4 62 Table 4 63 Table 4 64 Table 4 65 Table 4 66 Table 4 67 Table 4 68 Table 4 69 Table 4 70 Table 4 71 Table 4 72 xvi Authentication Sequence RADIUS Client Commands TACACS Commands Port Security Commands 802 1X Port Authentication Access Control Lists IP ACLs MAC ACL Commands ACL Information SNMP Commands show snmp engine id display description show snmp view display description show snmp group display description show snmp user display description Interface Commands Interfaces Switchport Statistics Mirror Port Commands Rate Limit Commands Link Aggregation Commands show lacp counters display description show lacp internal display description show lacp neighbors display description show lacp sysid display description Address Table Commands Spanning Tree Commands VLANs GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands Editing V
160. 3 18 Contents Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server Console Port Settings Telnet Settings Configuring Event Logging Displaying Log Messages System Log Configuration Remote Log Configuration Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Resetting the System Setting the System Clock Configuring SNTP Setting the Time Zone Simple Network Management Protocol Setting Community Access Strings Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types Enabling SNMP Agent Status Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access Setting the Local Engine ID Specifying a Remote Engine ID Configuring SNMPv3 Users Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users Configuring SNMPv3 Groups Setting SNMPv3 Views User Authentication Configuring User Accounts Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication Configuring HTTPS Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate Configuring the Secure Shell Configuring the SSH Server Generating the Host Key Pair Configuring Port Security Configuring 802 1X Port Authentication Displaying 802 1X Global Settings Configuring 802 1X Global Settings Configuring Port Settings for 802 1X Displaying 802 1X Statistics Access Control Lists Configuring Access Control Lists Setting the ACL Name and Type Configuring a Standard IP ACL Configuring an Extended IP ACL Configuring a MAC ACL Binding a Port to an Access Control List 3 19 3 20 3 21 3 23 3 25 3 25 3 26 3 27 3 28 3 30 3 31 3 31 3 32 3 33 3 33 3 34 3 35 3 3
161. 4 Introduction Table 1 2 System Defaults Continued Function Parameter Default Port Configuration Admin Status Enabled Auto negotiation Enabled Flow Control Disabled Rate Limiting Input limits Disabled Port Trunking Static Trunks None LACP all ports Disabled Broadcast Storm Status Enabled all ports Protection Broadcast Limit Rate 64 kbits per second Spanning Tree Status Enabled RSTP Algorithm Defaults All values based on IEEE 802 1w Fast Forwarding Edge Port Disabled Address Table Aging Time 300 seconds Virtual LANs Default VLAN 1 PVID 1 Acceptable Frame Type All Ingress Filtering Enabled Switchport Mode Egress Mode Hybrid tagged untagged frames GVRP global Disabled GVRP port interface Disabled Traffic Prioritization Ingress Port Priority 0 Weighted Round Robin Queue 0123 Weight 124 8 IP DSCP Priority Disabled IP Settings P Address DHCP assigned otherwise 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DHCP Client Enabled BOOTP Disabled Multicast Filtering GMP Snooping Snooping Enabled Querier Enabled Multicast VLAN Registration Disabled System Defaults 1 Table 1 2 System Defaults Continued Function Parameter Default System Log Status Enabled Messages Logged Levels 0 6 all Messages Logged to Flash Levels 0 3 SMTP Email A
162. 500 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Each spanning tree instance is associated with a unique set of VLAN IDs e This command is used by the multiple spanning tree algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to interfaces attached to faster media and higher values assigned to interfaces with slower media Use the no spanning tree mst cost command to specify auto configuration mode e Path cost takes precedence over interface priority 4 156 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 cost 50 Console config if Related Commands spanning tree mst port priority 4 157 spanning tree mst port priority This command configures the interface priority on a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mst instance_id port priority priority no spanning tree mst instance_id port priority instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes e priority Priority for an interface Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Default Setting 128 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command defines the priority for the use of an interface in the multiple spanning tree If the path cost for all interfaces on a swi
163. 6 3 36 3 37 3 37 3 38 3 39 3 42 3 44 3 44 3 46 3 49 3 50 3 51 3 53 3 54 3 56 3 57 3 58 3 59 3 60 3 63 3 64 3 64 3 65 3 66 3 67 3 70 3 71 Contents Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access 3 72 Port Configuration 3 74 Displaying Connection Status 3 74 Configuring Interface Connections 3 76 Creating Trunk Groups 3 79 Statically Configuring a Trunk 3 80 Enabling LACP on Selected Ports 3 81 Configuring LACP Parameters 3 83 Displaying LACP Port Counters 3 85 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side 3 87 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side 3 89 Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds 3 90 Configuring Port Mirroring 3 92 Configuring Rate Limits 3 93 Rate Limit Configuration 3 93 Showing Port Statistics 3 94 Address Table Settings 3 98 Setting Static Addresses 3 98 Displaying the Address Table 3 99 Changing the Aging Time 3 101 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 101 Displaying Global Settings 3 102 Configuring Global Settings 3 105 Displaying Interface Settings 3 108 Configuring Interface Settings 3 111 Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees 3 113 Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP 3 115 Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP 3 117 VLAN Configuration 3 119 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs 3 119 Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting 3 122 Displaying Basic VLAN Information 3 123 Displaying Current VLANs 3 123 Creating VLANs 3 125 Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index 3 126 Adding S
164. 7 Table 3 8 Table 3 9 Table 3 10 Table 3 11 Table 3 12 Table 3 13 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 4 6 Table 4 7 Table 4 8 Table 4 9 Table 4 10 Table 4 11 Table 4 12 Table 4 13 Table 4 14 Table 4 15 Table 4 16 Table 4 17 Table 4 18 Table 4 19 Table 4 20 Table 4 21 Table 4 22 Table 4 23 Table 4 24 Table 4 25 Table 4 26 Table 4 27 Key Features System Defaults Configuration Options Main Menu Logging Levels Supported Notification Messages HTTPS System Support 802 1X Statistics LACP Port Counters LACP Internal Configuration Information LACP Neighbor Configuration Information Port Statistics Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues CoS Priority Levels Mapping DSCP Priority Values Command Modes Configuration Modes Command Line Processing Command Groups Line Commands General Commands System Management Commands Device Designation Commands User Access Commands Default Login Settings IP Filter Commands Web Server Commands HTTPS System Support Telnet Server Commands SSH Commands show ssh display description Event Logging Commands Logging Levels show logging flash ram display description show logging trap display description SMTP Alert Commands Time Commands System Status Commands Frame Size Commands Flash File Commands File Directory Information Authentication Commands 1 1 1 5 3 3 3 4 3 26 3 40 3 49 3 63 3 85 3 87 3 89 3 94 3 140 3 141
165. 83697053439336438445223335188287173896894511729290510813919642025 190932104328579045764891 DSA ssh dss AAAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAN6 zwIqCqDb3 869j YVX1ME1SHLOEcE Re6hlasfEthIwmj hLY400j qUZpcEQUgC Ylum0Y2uoLka Py9ieGWO8 2gobUZKIICuKkg6vjO9XTs7XKcO5xfzkBi KviDa 20r1z6UK 6vFOgvUDFed1nixYTVo h5v8r0ea2rpn06DkZAAAAFOCNZn x17dwpW8RrVv DOnSWw4Q0k 6QAAATEAptkGeB6 B5hwagH4guocy6ilTmrmSidgfwO9OgRPUMbCAkCC uzxat0o7 drniIZypMx Sx5RUGMGgKS 9ywsalcWqHeFY5ilc31DCNBueeLykZzVS RS azTKIk zrdh8GLG Nq375R55yRxFvmcGin Q7IphPgqyJ309MK8LFDf mJEAAACAL8A6tESiswP20FqX7VGOEbzVDSOL RTMFy3 iUXtvGyQAOVSy67Mf c3 1MtgqPRUOYXDiwIBp5NxXgilCg5z7VqbmRm2 8mWc5a f 8TUAg PNWKV6WOhqmshQdot VzDR1e XKNTZj O0uTwwfjO5Kkytdn4MdoTHgrb1 DMdAfjnte8MZZs Console 3 55 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring Port Security Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the network through that port When port security is enabled on a port the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted as authorized to access the network through that port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the por
166. AN Interfaces switchport mode Sets an interface to host mode or promiscuous mode IC 4 177 private vlan switchport private vlan Associates an interface with a secondary VLAN IC 4 177 host association switchport private vian Associates an interface with an isolated VLAN IC 4 178 isolated switchport private vlan Maps an interface to a primary VLAN IC 4 179 mapping Display Private VLAN Information show vlan private vlan Shows private VLAN information NE 4 179 PE To configure primary secondary associated groups follow these steps 1 Use the private vlan command to designate one or more community VLANs and the primary VLAN that will channel traffic outside of the community groups 2 Use the private vlan association command to map the community VLAN s to the primary VLAN 4 174 VLAN Commands 4 3 Use the switchport mode private vlan command to configure ports as promiscuous i e having access to all ports in the primary VLAN or host i e community port 4 Use the switchport private vlan host association command to assign a port to a secondary VLAN 5 Use the switchport private vlan mapping command to assign a port to a primary VLAN 6 Use the show vlan private vlan command to verify your configuration settings To configure isolated VLANs follow these steps 1 Use the private vlan command to designate an isolated VLAN that will contain a single promiscuous port and one or more isolated ports
167. Admin Key is set page 4 142 then the port Admin Key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group Note If the port channel admin key lacp admin key page 4 133 is not set through the CLI when a channel group is formed i e it has a null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key used by the interfaces that joined the group lacp admin key as described in this section and on page 4 132 Command Attributes Set Port Actor This menu sets the local side of an aggregate link i e the ports on this switch e Port Port number Range 1 52 System Priority LACP system priority is used to determine link aggregation group LAG membership and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations Range 0 65535 Default 32768 Ports must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG 3 83 3 Configuring the Switch System priority is combined with the switch s MAC address to form the LAG identifier This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems e Admin Key The LACP administration key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same LAG Range 0 65535 Default 1 e Port Priority If a link goes down LACP port priority is used to select a backup link Range 0 65535 Default 32768 Set Port Partner This menu sets the remote side of an agg
168. C 4 13 response CLI exec timeout Sets the interval that the command interpreter waits until user LC 4 13 input is detected password thresh Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number LC 4 14 of failed logon attempts silent time Sets the amount of time the management console is LC 4 15 inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command databits Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted LC 4 15 and generated by hardware parity Defines the generation of a parity bit LC 4 16 speed Sets the terminal baud rate LC 4 17 stopbits Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte LC 4 17 disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4 18 show line Displays a terminal line s parameters NE PE 4 18 These commands only apply to the serial port line This command identifies a specific line for configuration and to process subsequent line configuration commands Syntax line console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet 4 10 Line Commands 4 Default Setting There is no default line Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as Vty in screen displays such as show users However the serial communication parameters
169. CF DF 9E CO Partner Admin Port Number 58 Partner Oper Port Number 2 Port Admin Priority 32768 Port Oper Priority 32768 Admin Key O Oper Key 4 Admin State Expired Oper State Expired Admin State Defaulted 2 Oper State Defaulted Admin State Distributing 2 Oper State Distributing lt a Admin State Collecting 2 Oper State Collecting A Admin State Oper State Synchronization v Syncheontzation v Admin State Aggregation Oper State Aggregation 4 Admin State Timeout Long Oper State Timeout Long Admin State LACP Activity Oper State LACP Activity 4 Figure 3 55 LACP Port Neighbors Information 3 89 3 Configuring the Switch CLI The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the remote side of port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 neighbors 4 134 Port channel 1 neighbors Eth 1 1 Partner Admin System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper System ID 3 00 12 CF CE 2A 20 Partner Admin Port Number 5 Partner Oper Port Number 3 Port Admin Priority 32768 Port Oper Priority 128 Admin Key 0 Oper Key 120 Admin State defaulted distributing collecting synchronization long timeout Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning or if application programs are not well desi
170. Cluster Member Configuration Cluster Member Configuration Current Cluster Member List New Cluster Member Member ID 1 36 2 ID 1 00 12 CF 23 49 C0 of Candidate Table 00 1 2 CF 23 49 C0 MAC Address Figure 3 114 Cluster Member Configuration CLI This example creates a new cluster Member by specifying the Candidate switch MAC address and setting a Member ID Console config cluster member mac address 00 12 34 56 78 9a id 5 4 232 Console config Cluster Member Information Displays current cluster Member switch information Command Attributes Member ID The ID number of the Member switch Range 1 36 Role Indicates the current status of the switch in the cluster 3 178 Switch Clustering 3 IP Address The internal cluster IP address assigned to the Member switch MAC Address The MAC address of the Member switch Description The system description string of the Member switch Web Click Cluster Member Information Cluster Member Information Member ID Role IP Address MAC Address Description 1 Active Member 10 254 254 2 00 12 CF 23 49 CO 24 48 L2 L4 IPV4 IPV6 GE Switch Figure 3 115 Cluster Member Information CLI This example shows information about cluster Member switches Vty O sh cluster members 4 234 Cluster Members ID I Role Active member IP Address 10 254 254 2 MAC Address 00 12 cf 23 49 c0 Description
171. Command Attributes e Current Time Displays the current time e Name Assigns a name to the time zone Range 1 29 characters e Hours 0 12 The number of hours before after UTC e Minutes 0 59 The number of minutes before after UTC e Direction Configures the time zone to be before east or after west UTC Web Select SNTP Clock Time Zone Set the offset for your time zone relative to the UTC and click Apply Clock Time Zone Current Time Jan 1 01 45 52 2001 Name Atlantic Hours 0 12 4 Minutes 0 59 0 Direction Before UTC C After UTC Figure 3 22 Setting the System Clock CLI This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock Console config clock timezone Atlantic hours 4 minute 0 before UTC 4 56 Console config 3 32 Simple Network Management Protocol 3 Simple Network Management Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a network Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches routers and host computers SNMP is typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network environment as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential problems The switch includes an onboard SNMP agent that continuously monitors the status of its hardware as well as the traffic passing through its ports A network management statio
172. Configuration 3 Configuring Global Settings Global settings apply to the entire switch Command Usage Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops thus isolating group members When operating multiple VLANs we recommend selecting the MSTP option Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU i e STP BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Toallow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have c
173. Console snmp server community This command defines the SNMP v1 and v2c community access string Use the no form to remove the specified community string Syntax snmp server community string ro rw no snmp server community string string Community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Maximum length 32 characters case sensitive Maximum number of strings 5 ro Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects rw Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able 4 100 SNMP Commands 4 to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Default Setting public Read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects private Read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server community alpha rw Console config snmp server contact This command sets the system contact string Use the no form to remove the system contact information Syntax snmp server contact string no snmp server contact string String that describes the system contact information Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server contact Paul Console config Rela
174. Console config if dot1ix timeout tx period 40 4 84 Console config if exit Console config exit Console show dot1x 4 85 Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control enable 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized 1 1 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 2 enabled Single Host auto yes 1 52 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 1 802 1X is enabled on port 1 2 reauth enabled Enable reauth period 1800 quiet period 30 tx period 40 supplicant timeout 30 server timeout 10 reauth max 2 max req 5 Status Authorized Operation mode Single Host Max count 5 Port control Auto Supplicant 00 12 CF 49 5e dc Current Identifier 3 Authenticator State Machine State Authenticated Reauth Count 0 Backend State Machine State Idle Request Count 0 Identifier Server 2 Reauthentication State Machine State Initialize 802 1X is disabled on port 1 52 Console 3 62 User Authentication 3 Displaying 802 1X Statistics This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any port Table 3 6 802 1X Statistics Parameter Description Rx EAPOL Start The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Logoff The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Invalid The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this A
175. DSCP Priority Status Disabled Figure 3 89 IP DSCP Priority Status 3 144 Class of Service Configuration 3 Mapping DSCP Priority The DSCP is six bits wide allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors The DSCP retains backward compatibility with the three precedence bits so that non DSCP compliant will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 Table 3 13 Mapping DSCP Priority Values IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 0 8 1 10 12 14 16 2 18 20 22 24 3 26 28 30 32 34 36 4 5 6 7 38 40 42 48 46 56 Command Attributes e DSCP Priority Table Shows the DSCP Priority to CoS map e Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected DSCP Priority value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Note IP DSCP settings apply to all interfaces Web Click Priority IP DSCP Priority Select an entry from the DSCP table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field then click Apply IP DSCP Priority DSCP0 CoS0 4 DSCP1 CoS0 DSCP 2 CoS0 DSCP 3 CoS 0 DSCP 4 CoS 0 DSCP5 CoSO DSCP6 CoS0 i Class of Service Value 0 7 Restore Default DSCP Prior
176. Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server key green Console config radius server retransmit This command sets the number of retries Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server retransmit number_of_retries no radius server retransmit number_of_retries Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server Range 1 30 Default Setting 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server retransmit 5 Console config 4 74 Authentication Commands 4 radius server timeout This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the RADIUS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server timeout number_of_seconds no radius server timeout number_of_seconds Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 65535 Default Setting 5 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server timeout 10 Console config show radius server This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show radius server Remote RADIUS server configuration Global settings Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 1812 Retransmit times 2 Requ
177. EE 802 1d bridge MIB It assigns these respective read and read write views to a group call r amp d and specifies group authentication via MD5 or SHA In the last step it assigns a v3 user to this group indicating that MD5 will be used for authentication provides the password greenpeace for authentication and the password einstien for encryption Console config snmp server view mib 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 included 4 107 Console config snmp server view 802 1d 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 included Console config snmp server group r amp d v3 auth mib 2 802 1d 4 108 Console config snmp server user steve group r amp d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien 4 111 Console config For a more detailed explanation on how to configure the switch for access from SNMP v3 clients refer to Simple Network Management Protocol on page 3 33 or refer to the specific CLI commands for SNMP starting on page 4 98 Saving Configuration Settings Configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To save all your configuration changes in nonvolatile storage you must copy the running configuration file to the start up configuration file using the copy command To save the current configuration settings enter the following command 1 From the Privileged Exec mode prompt type copy running config startup config and press lt Enter gt 2 Enter the name of the start u
178. HCP protocol See Setting an IP Address on page 2 4 2 Set user names and passwords using an out of band serial connection Access to the web agent is controlled by the same user names and passwords as the onboard configuration program See Setting Passwords on page 2 4 3 After you enter a user name and password you will have access to the system configuration program Notes 1 You are allowed three attempts to enter the correct password on the third failed attempt the current connection is terminated 2 If you log into the web interface as guest Normal Exec level you can view the configuration settings or change the guest password If you log in as admin Privileged Exec level you can change the settings on any page 3 If the path between your management station and this switch does not pass through any device that uses the Spanning Tree Algorithm then you can set the switch port attached to your management station to fast forwarding i e enable Admin Edge Port to improve the switch s response time to management commands issued through the web interface See Configuring Interface Settings on page 3 111 3 Configuring the Switch Navigating the Web Browser Interface To access the web browser interface you must first enter a user name and password The administrator has Read Write access to all configuration parameters and statistics The default user name and password for the administrator is
179. Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 15 Max hops 20 Remaining hops 20 Designated Root Current root port 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 1 Current root cost 10000 Number of topology changes 1 Last topology changes time sec 22 Transmission limit 3 Path Cost Method long 4 159 A Command Line Interface Admin status Designated cost Designated port Designated root Designated bridge Fast forwarding Forward transitions Admin edge port Oper edge port Admin Link type Oper Link type Spanning Tree Status Role State External admin path cost Internal admin cost External oper path cost Internal oper path cost Priority enable root forwarding 0000 0000 0000 0000 28 200000 28 24 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 32768 0 0030F1552000 disable enable disable auto point to point enable show spanning tree mst configuration This command shows the configuration of the multiple spanning tree Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Configuration name R amp D Revision level 0 Instance Vlans Console Console show spanning tree mst configuration Mstp Configuration Information 4 160 VLAN Commands 4 VLAN Commands A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment This section describes commands used to create VLAN groups
180. IC Ethernet 4 129 Dynamic Configuration Command lacp Configures LACP for the current interface IC Ethernet 4 130 lacp system priority Configures a port s LACP system priority IC Ethernet 4 131 lacp admin key Configures a port s administration key IC Ethernet 4 132 lacp admin key Configures an port channel s administration key IC Port Channel 4 133 lacp port priority Configures a port s LACP port priority IC Ethernet 4 134 Trunk Status Display Command show interfaces status Shows trunk information NE PE 4 121 port channel show lacp Shows LACP information PE 4 134 4 128 Link Aggregation Commands 4 Guidelines for Creating Trunks General Guidelines Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop A trunk can have up to eight ports The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN via the specified port channel STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the specified port channel Dynamically Creating a Port Channel Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria Ports
181. IGMP Snooping Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping or static assignment 4 200 sets the IGMP version displays current snooping and query settings and displays the multicast service and group members IGMP Query Configures IGMP query parameters for multicast filtering at Layer 2 4 205 Static Multicast Routing Configures static multicast router ports 4 208 Multicast VLAN Registration Configures a single network wide multicast VLAN shared by hosts 4 210 residing in other standard or private VLAN groups preserving security and data isolation for normal traffic IGMP Snooping Commands Table 4 67 IGMP Snooping Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP snooping GC 4 201 ip igmp snooping vlan static Adds an interface as a member of a multicast group GC 4 20 1 ip igmp snooping version Configures the IGMP version for snooping GC 4 202 ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP leave proxy on the switch GC 4 202 eave proxy ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP immediate leave for a VLAN interface IC 4 203 immediate leave show ip igmp snooping Shows the IGMP snooping and query configuration PE 4 202 show mac address table Shows the IGMP snooping MAC multicast list PE 4 204 multicast 4 200 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 ip igmp snooping This command enables IGMP snooping on this switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Ex
182. IP Address 192 168 1 23 Source File Name config startup oO Fectory_Default_Config cfg gt Startup File Name ce startup Figure 3 12 Downloading Configuration Settings for Startup If you download to a new file name using tftp to startup config or tftp to file the file is automatically set as the start up configuration file To use the new settings reboot the system via the System Reset menu 3 20 Basic Configuration 3 Note You can also select any configuration file as the start up configuration by using the System File Set Start Up page Set Start Up Name Type Startup Size bytes C Factory_Default_Config cfg Config_File N 5197 startup Config_File Y 5571 M2271 F Operation_Code 1761944 Figure 3 13 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings CLI Enter the IP address of the TFTP server specify the source file on the server set the startup file name on the switch and then restart the switch Console tcopy tftp startup config 4 64 TFTP server ip address 192 168 1 19 Source configuration file name config 1 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console reload To select another configuration file as the start up configuration use the boot system command and then restart the switch Console config Console config boot system config startup new 4 69 Console config exit Cons
183. LACP protocol messages e internal Configuration settings and operational state for local side e neighbors Configuration settings and operational state for remote side e sysid Summary of system priority and MAC address for all channel groups 4 134 Link Aggregation Commands 4 Default Setting Port Channel all Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show lacp 1 counters Port channel 1 Eth 1 1 LACPDUs Sent 21 LACPDUs Received 21 Marker Sent 0 Marker Received 0 LACPDUs Unknown Pkts 0 LACPDUs Illegal Pkts 0 Table 4 47 show lacp counters display description Field Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group arker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group arker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group LACPDUs Unknown Pkts Number of frames received that either 1 Carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain an unknown PDU or 2 are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type LACPDUs Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype Console show lacp internal Port channel 1 Oper Key 4 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 1
184. LAN Range 1 4094 Add Adds specified criteria to the class Up to 16 items are permitted per class Remove Deletes the selected criteria from the class 3 148 Quality of Service 3 Web Click QoS DiffServ then click Add Class to create a new class or Edit Rules to change the rules of an existing class Class Map Modify Name amp Description Class Name Type Class Name match any Edit Rules Remove Class Description Class Configuration Class Name Type match any x Description E Add Back Match Class Settings 4 Class Name Class Name 2 match any Remove ACL List none z Add IPDScP 0 63 C ai IP Precedence 0 7 au VLAN 1 4094 C Adal Figure 3 91 Configuring Class Maps CLI This example creates a class map call rd class and sets it to match packets marked for DSCP service value 3 Console config class map rd_class match any 4 198 Console config cmap match ip dscp 3 4 199 Console config cmap 3 149 3 Configuring the Switch Creating QoS Policies This function creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple interfaces Command Usage To configure a Policy Map follow these steps Create a Class Map as described on page 3 147 Open the Policy Map page and click Add Policy When the Policy Configuration page opens fill
185. LAN Groups Configuring VLAN Interfaces Show VLAN Commands Private VLAN Commands Protocol based VLAN Commands Priority Commands Priority Commands Layer 2 Default CoS Values to Egress Queues Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 IP DSCP to CoS Vales Quality of Service Commands Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping Commands IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 Static Multicast Routing Commands Multicast VLAN Registration Commands show mvr display description show mvr interface display description 4 70 4 72 4 76 4 78 4 79 4 88 4 89 4 93 4 97 4 98 4 106 4 108 4 111 4 113 4 114 4 124 4 125 4 127 4 128 4 135 4 136 4 137 4 137 4 138 4 142 4 161 4 161 4 165 4 167 4 173 4 174 4 180 4 183 4 183 4 187 4 189 4 190 4 191 4 200 4 200 4 205 4 208 4 210 4 213 4 214 Table 4 73 Table 4 74 Table 4 75 Table 4 76 Table 4 77 Table B 1 show mvr members display description IP Interface Commands IP Source Guard Commands DHCP Snooping Commands Switch Cluster Commands Troubleshooting Chart Tables 4 214 4 215 4 219 4 223 4 230 B 1 xvii Tables xviii Figures Figure 3 1 Home Page Figure 3 2 Panel Display Figure 3 3 System Information Figure 3 4 Switch Information Figure 3 5 Bridge Extension Configuration Figure 3 6 Manual IP Configuration Figure 3 7 DHCP IP Configuration Figure 3 8 Bridge Extension Configuration Figure 3 9 Copy Firmware Figure 3 10 Setting
186. LAN learning SVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Enabled GMRP Disabled Console 4 162 VLAN Commands 4 switchport gvrp This command enables GVRP for a port Use the no form to disable it Syntax no switchport gvrp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example Console config interface ethernet 1 6 Console config if switchport gvrp Console config if show gvrp configuration This command shows if GVRP is enabled Syntax show gvrp configuration interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 52 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Default Setting Shows both global and interface specific configuration Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show gvrp configuration ethernet 1 6 Eth 1 6 GVRP configuration Enabled Console 4 163 4 Command Line Interface garp timer This command sets the values for the join leave and leaveall timers Use the no form to restore the timers default values Syntax garp timer join leave leaveall timer_value no garp timer join leave leaveall e join leave leaveall Which timer to set e timer_value Value of timer Ranges join 20 1000 centiseconds leave 60 3000 centiseconds leaveall 500 18000 centisecon
187. LAN that contains promiscuous ports When using an isolated VLAN it must be configured to contain a single promiscuous port e Port membership for private VLANs is static Once a port has been assigned to a private VLAN it cannot be dynamically moved to another VLAN via GVRP e Private VLAN ports cannot be set to trunked mode See switchport mode on page 4 168 Example Console config vlan database Console config vlan private vlan 2 primary Console config vlan private vlan 3 community Console config private vlan association Use this command to associate a primary VLAN with a secondary i e community VLAN Use the no form to remove all associations for the specified primary VLAN Syntax private vlan primary vian id association secondary vian id add secondary vian id remove secondary vian id no private vlan primary vian id association primary vlan id D of primary VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes secondary vian id ID of secondary i e community VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode VLAN Configuration Command Usage Secondary VLANs provide security for group members The associated primary VLAN provides a common interface for access to other network resources within the primary VLAN e g servers configured with promiscuous ports and to resources outside of the primary VLAN via promiscuous ports Example Console config
188. LANs for port 1 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 2 5 6 tagged Console config if switchport forbidden vlan This command configures forbidden VLANs Use the no form to remove the list of forbidden VLANs Syntax switchport forbidden vlan add vian list remove vian list no switchport forbidden vian add vlan list List of VLAN identifiers to add remove vian list List of VLAN identifiers to remove e vian list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4094 Default Setting No VLANs are included in the forbidden list Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command prevents a VLAN from being automatically added to the specified interface via GVRP Ifa VLAN has been added to the set of allowed VLANs for an interface then you cannot add it to the set of forbidden VLANs for that same interface Example The following example shows how to prevent port 1 from being added to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport forbidden vlan add 3 Console config if 4 172 Displaying VLAN Information Table 4 57 Show VLAN Commands VLAN Commands 4 Command Function Mode Page show vlan Shows VLAN information NE PE 4 173 show interfaces s
189. LEASE message the packet is forwarded if MAC address verification is disabled as specified by the ip dhcp snooping verify mac address command page 4 227 However if MAC address verification is enabled then the packet will only be forwarded if the client s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet is the same as the source MAC address in the Ethernet header If the DHCP packet is not a recognizable type it is dropped Ifa DHCP packet from a client passes the filtering criteria above it will only be forwarded to trusted ports in the same VLAN Ifa DHCP packet is from server is received on a trusted port it will be forwarded to both trusted and untrusted ports in the same VLAN If the DHCP snooping is globally disabled all dynamic bindings are removed from the binding table DHCP Snooping Commands 4 Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client The port s through which the switch submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted ip dhcp snooping trust page 4 226 Note that the switch will not add a dynamic entry for itself to the binding table when it receives an ACK message from a DHCP server Also when the switch sends out DHCP client packets for itself no filtering takes place However when the switch receives any messages from a DHCP server any packets received from untrusted ports are dropped Example This example enables DHCP snooping globally for the switch
190. Member List Current Shows configured trunks Trunk ID Unit Port e New Includes entry fields for creating new trunks Trunk Trunk identifier Range 1 8 Port Port identifier Web Click Port Trunk Membership Enter a trunk ID of 1 8 in the Trunk field select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply Trunk Membership Member List Current New none Add Trunk 1 8 Remove Port fi Figure 3 50 Configuring Static Trunks 3 80 Port Configuration 3 CLI This example creates trunk 2 with ports 1 and 2 Just connect these ports to two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config interface port channel 2 4 114 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 114 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if channel group 2 Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 2 4 121 Information of Trunk 2 Basic information Console config if channel group 2 4 129 Port type 100TX Mac address 00 12 CF 12 34 84 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Flow control Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Current status Created by User Link status Up Port ope
191. N Configuration Current New 6 Community VLAN lt lt Add VLAN ID 1 4094 7 Community VLAN 7 Remove Type Primary z Figure 3 78 Private VLAN Configuration CLI This example configures VLAN 5 as a primary VLAN and VLAN 6 as a community VLAN Console config vlan database 4 165 Console config vlan private vlan 5 primary 4 175 Console config vlan private vlan 6 community Console config vlan Associating VLANs Each community VLAN must be associated with a primary VLAN Command Attributes e Primary VLAN ID ID of primary VLAN 1 4094 e Association Community VLANs associated with the selected primary VLAN Non Association Community VLANs not associated with the selected VLAN Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Association Select the required primary VLAN from the scroll down box highlight one or more community VLANs in the Non Association list box and click Add to associate these entries with the selected primary VLAN A community VLAN can only be associated with one primary VLAN Private VLAN Association Primary VLAN ID 5 7 Association Non Association none 6 Community Vian lt lt Add 7 Community Vian Remove Figure 3 79 Private VLAN Association 3 134 VLAN Configuration 3 CLI This example associates community VLANs 6 and 7 with primary VLAN 5 Console config vlan database 4 165 Console config vlan private vlan 5 asso
192. N probe to the Geta ete target port and study the traffic crossing the Source i yy Single source port in a completely unobtrusive manner port s target port Command Usage Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port All mirror sessions must share the same destination port When mirroring port traffic the target port must be included in the same VLAN as the source port Command Attributes e Mirror Sessions Displays a list of current mirror sessions Source Port The port whose traffic will be monitored Range 1 52 Type Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port Rx receive or Tx transmit Default Rx Target Port The port that will mirror the traffic on the source port Range 1 52 Web Click Port Mirror Port Configuration Specify the source port the traffic type to be mirrored and the monitor port then click Add Mirror Port Configuration Mirror Sessions New Source 1 10 Both Destination 1 13 cadd Source Port 1 7 Rx z Type emove Target Port fi Figure 3 57 Mirror Port Configuration CLI Use the interface command to select the monitor port then use the port monitor command to specify the source port and traffic type Console config interface ethernet 1 10 4 114 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 13 tx 4 125 Console config if
193. Out of Band Management Management of the network from a station not attached to the network Port Authentication See IEEE 802 1X Port Mirroring A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe This allows data on the target port to be studied unobstructively Port Trunk Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to create a single high speed logical link that combines several lower speed physical links Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from uplink ports Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS compliant devices on the network Remote Monitoring RMON RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities It eliminates the polling required in standard SNMP and can set alarms on a variety of traffic conditions including specific error types Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10 of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard Glossary 4 Glossary Secure Shell SSH A secure replacement for remote access functions including Telnet SSH can authenticate use
194. P UDP port number and 4 89 protocol type MAC ACLs Configures ACLs based on hardware addresses packet format and 4 93 Ethernet type ACL Information Displays ACLs and associated rules shows ACLs assigned to each port 4 97 4 88 Access Control List Commands 4 IP ACLs Table 4 34 IP ACLs Command Function Mode Page access list ip Creates an IP ACL and enters configuration mode GC 4 89 permit deny Filters packets matching a specified source IP address STD ACL 4 90 permit deny Filters packets meeting the specified criteria including EXT ACL 4 90 source and destination IP address TCP UDP port number and protocol type show ip access list Displays the rules for configured IP ACLs PE 4 92 ip access group Adds a port to an IP ACL IC 4 92 show ip access group Shows port assignments for IP ACLs PE 4 92 access list ip This command adds an IP access list and enters configuration mode for standard or extended IP ACLs Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax no access list ip standard extended ac _name standard Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source IP address extended Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source or destination IP address and other more specific criteria acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When you crea
195. P service level will be reduced Remove Class Deletes a class Policy Options e Class Name Name of class map e Action Configures the service provided to ingress traffic by setting a CoS DSCP or IP Precedence value in a matching packet as specified in Match Class Settings on page 3 147 Range CoS 0 7 DSCP 0 63 IP Precedence 0 7 IPv6 DSCP 0 63 e Meter Check this to define the maximum throughput burst rate and the action that results from a policy violation Rate kbps Rate in kilobits per second Range 1 100000 kbps or maximum port speed whichever is lower Burst byte Burst in bytes Range 64 1522 Exceed Specifies whether the traffic that exceeds the specified rate or burst will be dropped or the DSCP service level will be reduced Set Decreases DSCP priority for out of conformance traffic Range 0 63 Drop Drops out of conformance traffic Add Adds the specified criteria to the policy map 3 151 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click QoS DiffServ Policy Map to display the list of existing policy maps To add a new policy map click Add Policy To configure the policy rule settings click Edit Classes Policy Map Modify Name amp Description Edit Classes Add Policy Remove Policy Policy Name Description Policy Policy Configuration Policy Name Description
196. STP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs 4 143 4 Command Line Interface This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops thus isolating group members When operating multiple VLANs we recommend selecting the MSTP option e Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port e Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments Becareful when switching between spanning tree modes Changing modes stops all
197. Sets timeout for dynamically learned entries 3 101 Spanning Tree 3 101 STA 3 101 Information Displays STA values used for the bridge 3 102 Configuration Configures global bridge settings for STA and RSTP 3 105 Port Information Displays individual port settings for STA 3 108 Trunk Information Displays individual trunk settings for STA 3 108 Port Configuration Configures individual port settings for STA 3 111 Trunk Configuration Configures individual trunk settings for STA 3 111 MSTP 3 113 VLAN Configuration Configures priority and VLANs for a spanning tree instance 3 113 Port Information Displays port settings for a specified MST instance 3 115 Trunk Information Displays trunk settings for a specified MST instance 3 115 Port Configuration Configures port settings for a specified MST instance 3 117 Trunk Configuration Configures trunk settings for a specified MST instance 3 117 VLAN 3 119 802 1Q VLAN 3 119 3 6 Main Menu 3 Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Basic Information Displays information on the VLAN type supported by this switch 3 123 Current Table Shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or 3 123 not the port is tagged or untagged Static List Used to create or remove VLAN groups 3 125 Static Table Modifies the settings for an existing VLAN 3 126 Static Membership by Port Configures membership type fo
198. Settings page page 3 46 If public key authentication is specified by the client then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch SSH Host Key Settings and enable the SSH server Authentication Settings To use the SSH server complete these steps 1 Generate a Host Key Pair On the SSH Host Key Settings page create a host public private key pair 2 Provide Host Public Key to Clients Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch Otherwise you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example 10 1 0 54 1024 35 1568499540186766925933394677505461 7325313674890836547254 15020245593 199868544358361651999923329781 766065830956 10825913212890233 76546801 72627257 141342876294 1301196195566782 595664 10486957427888146206 5194174677298486546861571773939016477935594230357 74 13098022737087794545 2408397 17526463580581 767 16709574804776117 3 51 3 Configuring the Switch 3 Import Client s Public Key to the Switch Use the copy tftp public key command page 4 64 to copy a file containing the public key
199. Speed Tost oc e ciawie Gene wana PASS Done All Pass Console Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions Use the Switch Information page to display hardware firmware version numbers for the main board and management software as well as the power status of the system Field Attributes Main Board Serial Number The serial number of the switch Number of Ports Number of built in RJ 45 ports e Hardware Version Hardware version of the main board Internal Power Status Displays the status of the internal power supply Management Software EPLD Version Version number of the Electronically Programmable Logic Device code e Loader Version Version number of loader code Boot ROM Version Version of Power On Self Test POST and boot code Operation Code Version Version number of runtime code Role Shows that this switch is operating as Master or Slave 3 11 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click System Switch Information Switch Information Main Board Serial Number Number of Ports 28 Hardware Version Internal Power Status Active Management Software EPLD Version 4 04 Loader Version 0 0 0 5 Boot ROM Version 0 0 0 8 Operation Code Version 0 0 1 2 Role Master Figure 3 4 Switch Information CLI Use the following command to display version information Console show version 4 62 Unit 1 Serial numbe
200. Syntax calendar set hour min sec day month year month day year hour Hour in 24 hour format Range 0 23 min Minute Range 0 59 sec Second Range 0 59 day Day of month Range 1 31 month january february march april may june july august september october november december year Year 4 digit Range 2001 2100 4 56 System Management Commands 4 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows how to set the system clock to 15 12 34 April 1st 2004 Console calendar set 15 12 34 1 April 2004 Console show calendar This command displays the system clock Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show calendar 15 12 43 April 1 2004 Console System Status Commands Table 4 23 System Status Commands Command Function Mode Page show startup config Displays the contents of the configuration file stored in flash PE 4 57 memory that is used to start up the system show running config Displays the configuration data currently in use PE 4 59 show system Displays system information NE PE 4 61 show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions including user NE PE 4 61 name idle time and IP address of Telnet clients show version Displays version information for the system NE PE 4 62 show startup config This
201. TP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s e Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Root Hello Time Interval in seconds at which this device transmits a configuration message Root Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds this device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals If the root port ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section means interfaces which includes both ports and trunks 3 103 3 Configuring the Switch Root Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might
202. Table MVR Global Configuration MVR Port Information MVR Group IP Information MVR Port Configuration MVR Group Member Configuration DHCP Snooping Configuration DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration DHCP Snooping Port Configuration DHCP Snooping Binding Information IP Source Guard Port Configuration Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Information Cluster Configuration Cluster Member Configuration Cluster Member Information Cluster Candidate Information Figures 3 143 3 144 3 145 3 149 3 152 3 153 3 156 3 157 3 158 3 159 3 160 3 161 3 163 3 164 3 165 3 166 3 167 3 169 3 170 3 171 3 171 3 172 3 173 3 175 3 176 3 177 3 178 3 179 3 180 xxi Figures xxii Chapter 1 Introduction This switch provides a broad range of features for Layer 2 switching It includes a management agent that allows you to configure the features listed in this manual The default configuration can be used for most of the features provided by this switch However there are many options that you should configure to maximize the switch s performance for your particular network environment Key Features Table 1 1 Key Features Feature Description Configuration Backup and Restore Backup to TFTP server Authentication Console Telnet web User name password RADIUS TACACS Web HTTPS Telnet SSH SNMP v1
203. This notification is sent on every status change except in search mode pethPsePortPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 94 2 1 0 44 This notification indicates a Port Change Status MaintenanceStatus and is sent on every status change Notification pethMainPower UsageOnNotification 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 94 2 1 0 45 This notification indicates PSE Threshold usage indication is on the power usage is above the threshold pethMainPower UsageOffNotification 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 94 2 1 0 46 This notification indicates that the PSE Threshold usage indication is off the usage power is below the threshold a These are legacy notifications and therefore must be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding traps on the SNMP Configuration menu 3 41 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Groups Click New to configure a new group In the New Group page define a name assign a security model and level and then select read and write views Click Add to save the new group and return to the Groups list To delete a group check the box next to the group name then click Delete SNMPv3 Groups Group Name Model Level Read View Write View Notify View F public v1 noAuthNoPriv defaultview none none I public V2C_ noAuthNoPriv defaultview none none F private v4 noAuthNoPriv defaultview defaultview none F private V2C noAuthNoPriv defaultview defaultview none
204. a bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port If parity is being generated specify 7 data bits per character If no parity is required specify 8 data bits per character Default 8 bits e Parity Defines the generation of a parity bit Communication protocols provided by some terminals can require a specific parity bit setting Specify Even Odd or None Default None e Speed Sets the terminal line s baud rate for transmit to terminal and receive from terminal Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port Range 9600 19200 38400 baud or Auto Default Auto Stop Bits Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte Range 1 2 Default 1 stop bit e Password Specifies a password for the line connection When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt Default No password e Login Enables password checking at login You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the Password parameter or by passwords set up for specific user name accounts Default Local Web Click System Line Console Specify the console port connection parameters as required then click Apply Console Login Timeout 0 300 0 secs 0 Disabled Exec Timeout 0 65535 600 sec
205. a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a command For example the command configure can be entered as con If an entry is ambiguous the system will prompt for further input Command Completion If you terminate input with a Tab key the CLI will print the remaining characters of a partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity In the logging history example typing log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to logging Getting Help on Commands You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help command You can also display command syntax by using the character to list keywords or parameters A Command Line Interface Showing Commands If you enter a at the command prompt the system will display the first level of keywords for the current command class Normal Exec or Privileged Exec or configuration class Global ACL Interface Line or VLAN Database You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command For example the command show displays a list of possible show commands Console show access group access list bridge ext calendar dotix garp gvrp history interfaces ip lacp line log logging mac address table management map port public key queue radius server running config snmp sntp spanning tree ssh startup config system tacacs server users version vlan Console show Ac
206. able an interface due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also disable an interface for security reasons 3 76 Port Configuration 3 e Speed Duplex Allows you to manually set the port speed and duplex mode i e with auto negotiation disabled Flow Control Allows automatic or manual selection of flow control Autonegotiation Port Capabilities Allows auto negotiation to be enabled disabled When auto negotiation is enabled you need to specify the capabilities to be advertised When auto negotiation is disabled you can force the settings for speed mode and flow control The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 1000full Combo ports only Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Default Autonegotiation enabled Advertised capabilities for 100BASE TX 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full 1000BASE SX LX LH 1000full e Media Type Media type used for the combo ports Options Coppper Forced SFP Forced or SFP Preferred Auto Default SFP Preferred Auto Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To create trunks and select port members see Creating Trunk
207. add port members specify how VLAN tagging is used and enable automatic VLAN registration for the selected interface Table 4 53 VLANs Command Groups Function Page GVRP and Bridge Extension Configures GVRP settings that permit automatic VLAN learning 4 161 shows the configuration for bridge extension MIB Editing VLAN Groups Sets up VLAN groups including name VID and state 4 165 Configuring VLAN Configures VLAN interface parameters including ingress and egress 4 167 Interfaces tagging mode ingress filtering PVID and GVRP Displaying VLAN Displays VLAN groups status port members and MAC addresses 4 173 Information Configuring Private VLANs Configures private VLANs including uplink and downlink ports 4 174 Configuring Protocol VLANs Configures protocol based VLANs based on frame type and protocol 4 180 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network This section describes how to enable GVRP for individual interfaces and globally for the switch as well as how to display default configuration settings for the Bridge Extension MIB Note GVRP is not supported in the current software Table 4 54 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands Command Function Mode Page bridge ext gvrp Enables GVRP glob
208. against all entries in the binding table Use the sip mac option to check these same parameters plus the source MAC address Use the no source guard command to disable this function on the selected port When enabled traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping static entries configured in the DHCP snooping table or static addresses configured in the source guard binding table Table entries include a MAC address IP address lease time entry type Static IP SG Binding Dynamic DHCP Binding Static DHCP Binding VLAN identifier and port identifier Static addresses entered in the source guard binding table with the ip source guard binding command page 4 221 are automatically configured with an infinite lease time Dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping are configured by the DHCP server itself static entries include a manually configured lease time If the IP source guard is enabled an inbound packet s IP address sip option or both its IP address and corresponding MAC address sip mac option will be checked against the binding table If no matching entry is found the packet will be dropped Filtering rules are implemented as follows If the DHCP snooping is disabled see page 4 223 IP source guard will check the VLAN ID source IP address port number and source MAC address for the sip mac option If a matching entry is found in the binding table and the entry type is static IP
209. ally for the switch GC 4 162 switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4 163 switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface IC 4 172 show gvrp configuration Displays GVRP configuration for the selected interface NE PE 4 163 garp timer Sets the GARP timer for the selected function IC 4 164 show garp timer Shows the GARP timer for the selected function NE PE 4 164 4 161 4 Command Line Interface bridge ext gvrp This command enables GVRP globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no bridge ext gvrp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network This function should be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch Example Console config bridge ext gvrp Console config show bridge ext This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Basic VLAN Information on page 3 123 and Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities on page 3 13 for a description of the displayed items Example Console show bridge ext Max support vlan numbers 255 Max support vlan ID 4094 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes V
210. ame the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 MST Path Cost This parameter is used by the MSTP to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Note that when the Path Cost Method is set to short page 3 63 the maximum path cost is 65 535 Range Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 Default Ethernet Half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 3 118 VLAN Configuration 3 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Enter the priority and path cost for an interface and click Apply MSTP Port Configuration MST Instance ID fox Priority Admin MST Path Cost Port STA State 0 240 in steps of 16 1 200000000 0 Auto 1 Discarding 128 0 8
211. ame instance on each bridge with the same set of VLANs Also note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree Example Console config mstp mst 1 vlan 2 5 Console config mstp mst priority This command configures the priority of a spanning tree instance Use the no form to restore the default Syntax mst instance_id priority priority no mst instance_id priority instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 e priority Priority of the a spanning tree instance Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 4 149 A Command Line Interface Default Setting 32768 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage e MST priority is used in selecting the root bridge and alternate bridge of the specified instance The device with the highest priority i e lowest numerical value becomes the MSTI root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device e You can set this switch to act as the MSTI root device by specifying a priority of 0 or as the MSTI alternate device by specifying a priority of 16384 Example Console config mstp mst 1 priority 4096 Console config mstp name This command configures the name for the multiple spanning tree
212. amp Security amp Q Port a Address Table Spanning Tree amp VLAN amp Priority OQ QoS amp G IGMP Snooping a MVR amp DHCP Snooping a Cluster 3 10 ES3528M Manager SystemName Object ID Location Contact System Up Time 0 days 3 hours 40 minutes and 50 94 seconds Apply Revert Help Connect to textual user interface Em Send mail to technical support Connect to Edge Core Web Site Figure 3 3 System Information Basic Configuration 3 CLI Specify the hostname location and contact information Console config hostname R amp D 5 4 25 Console config snmp server location WC 9 4 101 Console config snmp server contact Ted 4 101 Console config exit Console show system 4 61 System description ES3528M System OID string 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 94 System information System Up time 0 days 0 hours 14 minutes and 32 93 seconds System Name NONE System Location NONE System Contact NONE MAC address 00 00 35 28 10 03 Web server enabled Web server port 80 Web secure server enabled Web secure server port 443 Telnet server enable Telnet port X 23 Jumbo Frame Disabled POST result UART Loopback Test PASS DRAM TESE 2 502 suge eset ae Gide Bee PASS Piper TEBE ioccg goo ecsceis ee Sreual s ee PASS PCI Device 1 Test PASS I2C Bus Initialization PASS Switch Int Loopback Test PASS Fan
213. ample The following example enables IGMP snooping Console config ip igmp snooping Console config ip igmp snooping vlan static This command adds a port to a multicast group Use the no form to remove the port Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan vian id static ip address interface e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 jp address IP address for multicast group e interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 52 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a port Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 0 0 12 ethernet 1 5 Console config 4 201 4 Command Line Interface ip igmp snooping version This command configures the IGMP snooping version Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping version 1 2 no ip igmp snooping version 1 IGMP Version 1 2 IGMP Version 2 Default Setting IGMP Version 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage All systems on the subnet must support the same version If there are legacy devices in your network that only support Version 1 you will also have to configure this switch to use Version 1 Some commands are only enabled for IGMPv2 including ip igmp query max response time and ip igmp query timeout Example The followi
214. an assign one IP access list to any port Command Usage e Each ACL can have up to 100 rules e This switch supports ACLs for ingress filtering only However you only bind one IP ACL to any port for ingress filtering In other words only one ACL can be bound to an interface Ingress IP ACL Command Attributes e Port Fixed port or SFP module Range 1 52 e IP Specifies the IP ACL to bind to a port e MAC Specifies the MAC ACL to bind to a port e IN ACL for ingress packets Web Click Security ACL Port Binding Click Edit to open the configuration page for the ACL type Mark the Enable field for the port you want to bind to an ACL for ingress or egress traffic select the required ACL from the drop down list then click Apply 3 71 3 Configuring the Switch ACL Port Binding Port IP MAC IN OUT OUT 1_ T Enabled none H E Enabled inone z Z C Enabled ons E 2 I Enabled none z C Enab ed none z C Enab I Enabled 3_ T Enabled none Z Enabled none Z Enabi T Enabled none z 4 T Enabled none Enabled none Enabled none Enabled none z 5 T Enabled none Z Enabled none m Enabled inone z m Enabled nons 6 C Enabl ed none Fy C Enab ed none z T Enab ed none z T Enab 7_ T Enabled none Z Enabled none Z Enabled inone z Enab 8 T Enabled ino
215. an vlan id no switchport native vlan vlan id Default VLAN ID for a port Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Setting the native VLAN for a port can only be performed when the port is a member of the VLAN and the VLAN is untagged The no switchport native vlan command will set the native VLAN of the port to untagged VLAN 1 e If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to hybrid the PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port Example The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport native vlan 3 Console config if 4 170 VLAN Commands 4 switchport allowed vlan This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface Use the no form to restore the default Note Each port can only have one untagged VLAN If a second VLAN is defined for a port as untagged the other VLAN that had untagged status will automatically be changed to tagged Setting a VLAN untagged will also change the native VLAN of the port to this VLAN Syntax switchport allowed vlan add vian list tagged untagged remove vian list no switchport allowed vlan add vian list List of VLAN identifiers to add remove vian list List of VLAN identifiers to remove vian list Separate nonconse
216. ancy Figure 3 29 Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users Configuring SNMPv3 Groups An SNMPv3 group sets the access policy for its assigned users restricting them to specific read write and notify views You can use the pre defined default groups or create new groups to map a set of SNMP users to SNMP views 3 39 3 Configuring the Switch Command Attributes e Group Name The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters e Model The user security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 e Level The security level used for the group noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications This is the default for SNMPv3 AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model e Read View The configured view for read access Range 1 64 characters e Write View The configured view for write access Range 1 64 characters Notify View The configured view for notifications Range 1 64 characters Table 3 4 Supported Notification Messages Object Label Object ID Description RFC 1493 Traps newRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 The newRoot trap indicates that the sending agent has become the new root of the Spanning Tree the trap is sent by a
217. and Usage The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within a specific VLAN Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC Address Table Static addresses have the following characteristics Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given interface link is down Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is removed with the no form of this command Example Console config mac address table static 00 12 cf 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset Console config clear mac address table dynamic This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database and clears the transmit and receive counts for any static or system configured entries Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear mac address table dynamic Console show mac address table This command shows classes of entries in the bridge forwarding database Syntax show mac address table address mac address mask interface interface vlan vian id sort address vlan interface mac address MAC address e mask Bits to match in the address interface ethernet unit port unit
218. and on page 4 27 The character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in privileged access mode Example Console gt enable Password privileged level password Console Related Commands disable 4 20 enable password 4 27 disable This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode In normal access mode you can only display basic information on the switch s configuration or Ethernet statistics To gain access to all commands you must use the privileged mode See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 5 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The gt character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in normal access mode Example Console disable Console gt Related Commands enable 4 19 4 20 General Commands 4 configure This command activates Global Configuration mode You must enter this mode to modify any settings on the switch You must also enter Global Configuration mode prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes including Interface Configuration Line Configuration and VLAN Database Configuration See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 5 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console configure Console config Related Commands end 4 22 show history This command shows the contents of the comma
219. ands 4 208 ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter 4 208 show ip igmp snooping mrouter 4 209 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands 4 210 mvr Global Configuration 4 210 mvr Interface Configuration 4 211 show mvr 4 213 xi Contents IP Interface Commands 4 215 ip address 4 215 ip default gateway 4 216 ip dhcp restart 4 217 show ip interface 4 217 show ip redirects 4 218 ping 4 218 IP Source Guard Commands 4 219 ip source guard 4 219 ip source guard binding 4 221 show ip source guard 4 222 show ip source guard binding 4 222 DHCP Snooping Commands 4 223 ip dhcp snooping 4 223 ip dhcp snooping vlan 4 225 ip dhcp snooping trust 4 226 ip dhcp snooping verify mac address 4 227 ip dhcp snooping information option 4 227 ip dhcp snooping information policy 4 228 ip dhcp snooping database flash 4 229 show ip dhcp snooping 4 229 show ip dhcp snooping binding 4 230 Switch Cluster Commands 4 230 cluster 4 231 cluster commander 4 231 cluster ip pool 4 232 cluster member 4 232 rcommand 4 233 show cluster 4 234 show cluster members 4 234 show cluster candidates 4 234 Appendix A Software Specifications A 1 Software Features A 1 Management Features A 2 Standards A 2 Management Information Bases A 3 Appendix B Troubleshooting B 1 Problems Accessing the Management Interface B 1 Using System Logs B 2 Glossary Index xii Tables Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3
220. anning disabled spanning tree cost Contents 4 116 4 117 4 118 4 119 4 120 4 120 4 121 4 122 4 123 4 125 4 125 4 126 4 127 4 127 4 128 4 129 4 130 4 131 4 132 4 133 4 134 4 134 4 138 4 138 4 139 4 139 4 140 4 141 4 142 4 143 4 143 4 144 4 145 4 146 4 146 4 147 4 148 4 148 4 149 4 149 4 150 4 151 4 151 4 152 4 152 ix Contents spanning tree port priority 4 153 spanning tree edge port 4 154 spanning tree portfast 4 154 spanning tree link type 4 155 spanning tree mst cost 4 156 spanning tree mst port priority 4 157 spanning tree protocol migration 4 158 show spanning tree 4 158 show spanning tree mst configuration 4 160 VLAN Commands 4 161 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 4 161 bridge ext gvrp 4 162 show bridge ext 4 162 switchport gvrp 4 163 show gvrp configuration 4 163 garp timer 4 164 show garp timer 4 164 Editing VLAN Groups 4 165 vlan database 4 165 vlan 4 166 Configuring VLAN Interfaces 4 167 interface vlan 4 167 switchport mode 4 168 switchport acceptable frame types 4 169 switchport ingress filtering 4 169 switchport native vlan 4 170 switchport allowed vlan 4 171 switchport forbidden vlan 4 172 Displaying VLAN Information 4 173 show vlan 4 173 Configuring Private VLANs 4 174 private vlan 4 175 private vlan association 4 176 switchport mode private vlan 4 177 switchport private vlan host association 4 177 switchport private vlan isolated 4 178 switchport private vlan mappin
221. ap name Name of the policy map Range 1 16 characters class map name Name of the class map Range 1 16 characters Default Setting Displays all policy maps and all classes Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show policy map Policy Map rd_policy class rd_class set ip dscp 3 Console show policy map rd_policy class rd_class Policy Map rd_policy class rd_class set ip dscp 3 Console show policy map interface This command displays the service policy assigned to the specified interface Syntax show policy map interface interface input interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 4 199 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show policy map interface ethernet 1 5 Service policy rd_policy input Console Multicast Filtering Commands This switch uses IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Table 4 66 Multicast Filtering Commands Command Groups Function Page
222. aps from the switch To configure a trap receiver use the snmp server host command From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server host host address community string version 1 2c 3 auth noauth priv where host address is the IP address for the trap receiver community string specifies access rights for a version 1 2c host or is the user name of a version 3 host version indicates the SNMP client version and auth noauth priv means that authentication no authentication or authentication and privacy is used for v3 clients Then press lt Enter gt For a more detailed description of these parameters see snmp server host on page 4 102 The following example creates a trap host for each type of SNMP client Console Console Console Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 batman 4 102 config snmp server host 10 1 19 98 robin version 2c config snmp server host 10 1 19 34 barbie version 3 auth config 2 Initial Configuration Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients To configure management access for SNMPv3 clients you need to first create a view that defines the portions of MIB that the client can read or write assign the view to a group and then assign the user to a group The following example creates one view called mib 2 that includes the entire MIB 2 tree branch and then another view that includes the IE
223. as trusted Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax Defa no ip dhcp snooping trust ult Setting All interfaces are untrusted Command Mode Com Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel mand Usage An untrusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the network e When DHCP snooping enabled globally using the ip dhcp snooping command page 4 223 and enabled on a VLAN with this command DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN according to the default status or as specifically configured for an interface with the no ip dhcp snooping trust command When an untrusted port is changed to a trusted port all the dynamic DHCP snooping bindings associated with this port are removed Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client The port s through which it submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted Example This example sets port 5 to untrusted Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if no ip dhcp snooping trust Console config if Related Commands 4 226 ip dhcp snooping 4 223 ip dhcp snooping vlan 4 225 DHCP Snooping Commands 4 ip dhcp snooping verify mac address This command verifies the client
224. associated rules PE 4 97 show access group Shows the ACLs assigned to each port PE 4 98 show access list This command shows all ACLs and associated rules as well as all the user defined masks Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Once the ACL is bound to an interface i e the ACL is active the order in which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask 4 97 4 Command Line Interface Example Console show access list IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 IP extended access list bob permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 80 IP access list jerry permit any host 00 30 29 94 34 de ethertype 800 800 IP extended access list A6 permit any any Console show access group This command shows the port assignments of ACLs Command Mode Privileged Executive Example Console show access group Interface ethernet 1 1 IP access list jerry in Interface ethernet 1 52 IP access list jerry in Console SNMP Commands Controls access to this switch from management stations using the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP as well as the error types sent to trap managers SNMP Version 3 also provides security features that cover message integrity authentication and encryption as well as controlling user access to specific areas of the MIB tree To use SNMPv3
225. association secondary vian id no switchport private vlan host association secondary vlan id ID of secondary i e community VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting None 4 177 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage All ports assigned to a secondary i e community VLAN can pass traffic between group members but must communicate with resources outside of the group via promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN Example Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport private vlan host association 3 Console config if switchport private vlan isolated Use this command to assign an interface to an isolated VLAN Use the no form to remove this assignment Syntax switchport private vlan isolated isolated vian id no switchport private vlan isolated isolated vlan id ID of isolated VLAN Range 1 4094 Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Host ports assigned to a isolated VLAN cannot pass traffic between group members and must communicate with resources outside of the group via a promiscuous port Example Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport private vlan isolated 3 Console config if 4 178 VLAN Commands 4 switchport private vlan mapping Use this command to map an interfac
226. ata packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with four priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface the relative weight of each queue and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Table 4 60 Priority Commands Command Groups Function Page Priority Layer 2 Configures default priority for untagged frames sets queue weights 4 183 and maps class of service tags to hardware queues Priority Layer 3 and 4 Maps IP DSCP tags to class of service values 4 189 Priority Commands Layer 2 Table 4 61 Priority Commands Layer 2 Command Function Mode Page queue mode Sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted GC 4 184 Round Robin WRR switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames IC 4 184 queue bandwidth Assigns round robin weights to the priority queues GC 4 185 queue cos map Assigns class of service values to the priority queues IC 4 186 show queue mode Shows the current queue mode PE 4 187 show queue bandwidth Shows round robin weights assigned to the priority queues PE 4 188 4 183 4 Command Line Interface Table 4 61 Priority Commands Layer 2 Command Functio
227. ation key with RADIUS server Server port number 181 Retransmit times 5 Request timeout 10 Server 1 Server IP address 192 168 1 25 Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 1812 Retransmit times 2 Request timeout 5 3 48 User Authentication 3 Console configure Console config authentication login tacacs 4 70 Console config tacacs server host 10 20 30 40 4 76 Console config tacacs server port 200 4 76 Console config tacacs server key green 4 77 Console show tacacs server 4 77 Server IP address 10 20 30 40 Communication key with tacacs server green Server port number 200 Console config Configuring HTTPS You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access i e an encrypted connection to the switch s web interface Command Usage Both the HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure both services to use the same UDP port If you enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server
228. ault Syntax dot1x timeout quiet period seconds no dot1x timeout quiet period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 60 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dotlx timeout quiet period 350 Console config if 4 83 A Command Line Interface dot1x timeout re authperiod This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Syntax dot1x timeout re authperiod seconds no dot1x timeout re authperiod seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 3600 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1x timeout re authperiod 300 Console config if dot1x timeout tx period This command sets the time that an interface on the switch waits during an authentication session before re transmitting an EAP packet Use the no form to reset to the default value Syntax dot1x timeout tx period seconds no dot1x timeout tx period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1x timeout tx period 300 Console config if 4 84 Authentication Commands 4 show dot1x This command shows general port authentication related settings on the switch or a specific inte
229. ax tacacs server port port_number no tacacs server port port_number TACACS server TCP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 49 4 76 Authentication Commands 4 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server port 181 Console config tacacs server key This command sets the TACACS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server key key_string no tacacs server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server key green Console config show tacacs server This command displays the current settings for the TACACS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show tacacs server Remote TACACS server configuration Server IP address 10 11 12 13 Communication key with TACACS server Server port number 49 Console 4 77 4 Command Line Interface Port Security Commands These commands can be used to enable port security on a port When using port security the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the
230. ay router between this device and management stations that exist on other network segments Default 0 0 0 0 MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch Restart DHCP Requests a new IP address from the DHCP server 3 14 Basic Configuration 3 Manual Configuration Web Click System IP Configuration Select the VLAN through which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to Static enter the IP address subnet mask and gateway then click Apply IP Configuration Management VLAN 1 zl IP Address Mode Static z IP Address fiszi6ai7 Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Gateway IP Address0000 MAC Address 00 00 35 28 10 03 Restart DHCP Figure 3 6 Manual IP Configuration CLI Specify the management interface IP address and default gateway Console config Console config interface vlan 1 4 114 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 4 215 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 0 0 0 0 4 216 Console config 3 15 3 Configuring the Switch Using DHCP BOOTP If your network provides DHCP BOOTP services you can configure the switch to be dynamically configured by these services Web Click System IP Configuration Specify the VLAN to which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or BOOTP Click Apply to save your changes Then click Restart DHCP to immed
231. bal Configuration Example Console config ip telnet port 123 Console config Related Commands ip telnet server 4 33 ip telnet server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from Telnet Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip telnet server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip telnet server Console config 4 33 4 Command Line Interface Related Commands ip telnet port 4 33 Secure Shell Commands The Berkley standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments These tools including commands such as rlogin remote login rsh remote shell and rcp remote copy are not secure from hostile attacks The Secure Shell SSH includes server client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet When a client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol the switch uses a public key that the client must match along with a local user name and password for access authentication SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH enabled management station clients and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered This
232. between promiscuous ports and community ports within the associated secondary VLANs If PVLAN type is Promiscuous then specify the associated primary VLAN Community VLAN A community VLAN conveys traffic between community ports and from community ports to their designated promiscuous ports Set PVLAN Port Type to Host and then specify the associated Community VLAN 3 136 VLAN Configuration 3 Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Set the PVLAN Port Type for each port that will join a private VLAN Assign promiscuous ports to a primary VLAN Assign host ports to a community VLAN After all the ports have been configured click Apply Private VLAN Port Configuration Port PVLAN Port Type Primary VLAN Community VLAN Trunk 8 none E Normal nane x none H X Figure 3 81 Private VLAN Port Configuration CLI This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5 and secondary VLAN 6 Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped to VLAN 5 while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as a host ports and associated with VLAN 6 This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport mode private vlan promiscuous 4 177 Console config if switchport private vlan mapping 5 4 179 Console config if
233. cbc hmac sha1 aes192 cbc hmac sha1 aes256 cbc hmac sha1 3des cbc hmac sha1 blowfish cbc hmac sha1 aes128 cbc hmac md5 aes192 cbc hmac md5 aes256 cbc hmac md5 3des cbc hmac md5 blowfish cbc hmac md5 Terminology DES Data Encryption Standard 56 bit key aes Advanced Encryption Standard 160 or 224 bit key blowfish Blowfish 32 448 bit key cbc cypher block chaining sha Secure Hash Algorithm 1 160 bit hashes md5 Message Digest algorithm number 5 128 bit hashes Options for SSHv2 0 can include different algorithms for the client to server ctos 3DES Triple DES Uses three iterations of DES 112 bit key 4 Command Line Interface show public key This command shows the public key for the specified user or for the host Syntax show public key user username host username Name of an SSH user Range 1 8 characters Default Setting Shows all public keys Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage f no parameters are entered all keys are displayed If the user keyword is entered but no user name is specified then the public keys for all users are displayed e When an RSA key is displayed the first field indicates the size of the host key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 35 and the last string is the encoded modulus When a DSA key is displayed the first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Dig
234. ccess group 4 97 ACL Information 4 97 show access list 4 97 show access group 4 98 SNMP Commands 4 98 snmp server 4 99 show snmp 4 99 snmp server community 4 100 snmp server contact 4 101 snmp server location 4 101 snmp server host 4 102 snmp server enable traps 4 104 snmp server engine id 4 105 show snmp engine id 4 106 snmp server view 4 107 show snmp view 4 108 snmp server group 4 108 show snmp group 4 110 snmp server user 4 111 show snmp user 4 113 Interface Commands 4 114 interface 4 114 description 4 115 speed duplex 4 115 viii negotiation capabilities flowcontrol shutdown switchport broadcast packet rate clear counters show interfaces status show interfaces counters show interfaces switchport Mirror Port Commands port monitor show port monitor Rate Limit Commands rate limit Link Aggregation Commands channel group lacp lacp system priority lacp admin key Ethernet Interface lacp admin key Port Channel lacp port priority show lacp Address Table Commands mac address table static clear mac address table dynamic show mac address table mac address table aging time show mac address table aging time Spanning Tree Commands spanning tree spanning tree mode spanning tree forward time spanning tree hello time spanning tree max age spanning tree priority spanning tree pathcost method spanning tree transmission limit spanning tree mst configuration mst vian mst priority name revision max hops spanning tree sp
235. ce field and click Query to display the assigned multicast groups Select a multicast address from the displayed lists and click the Add or Remove button to modify the Member list MVR Static Group Member linterface Port 1 gt Trunk z Query Member Non Member none none ed gt gt Figure 3 104 MVR Group Member Configuration 3 167 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example statically assigns a multicast group to a receiver port Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if mvr group 228 1 23 1 4 211 Console config if DHCP Snooping DHCP snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCP servers or other devices which send port related information to a DHCP server This information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCP messages are received from an outside source DHCP snooping is used to filter DHCP messages received on a non secure interface from outside the network or firewall When DHCP snooping is enabled globally and enabled on a VLAN interface DHCP messages received on an untrusted interface from a device not listed in the DHCP snooping table will be dropped When enabled DHCP messages entering an untrusted interface are filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping Filtering rules are implemented as follows Ifthe global DHCP snooping is di
236. ce transmits a configuration message Default 2 Minimum 1 Maximum The lower of 10 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 Configuration Settings for RSTP The following attributes apply to both RSTP and MSTP Path Cost Metho
237. ces are enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also want to disable a port for security reasons Example The following example disables port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if shutdown Console config if 4 119 4 Command Line Interface switchport broadcast packet rate This command configures broadcast storm control Use the no form to disable broadcast storm control Syntax switchport broadcast octet rate rate no switchport broadcast rate Threshold level as a rate i e kilobits per second Range 64 100000 for 100 Mbps ports 64 1000000 for 1 Gbps ports Default Setting Enabled for all ports Packet rate limit 64 kilobits per second Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e When broadcast traffic exceeds the specified threshold packets above that threshold are dropped This command can enable or disable broadcast storm control for the selected interface However the specified threshold value applies to all ports on the switch Example The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 500 kilobits per second Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate 500 Console c
238. ces is displayed 4 123 4 Command Line Interface Example This example shows the configuration setting for port 24 LACP status Ingress Rate Limit Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 24 Broadcast threshold Enabled 64 Kbits second Enabled Disabled 100000 Kbits per second Egress Rate Limit Disabled 100000 Kbits per second VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule Enabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 0 Gvrp status Disabled Allowed Vlan 1 u Forbidden Vlan Private VLAN mode NONE Private VLAN host association NONE Private VLAN mapping NONE Console Table 4 43 Interfaces Switchport Statistics Field Description Broadcast threshold Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled or disabled if enabled it also shows the threshold level page 4 120 Lacp status Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled or disabled page 4 130 Ingress rate limit Shows if ingress rate limiting is enabled and the current rate limit page 4 127 Egress rate limit Shows if egress rate limiting is enabled and the current rate limit page 4 127 VLAN membership mode Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid page 4 168 Ingress rule Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled page 4 169 Note Ingress filtering is always enabled Acceptable frame type Shows if acceptable VLAN
239. cess groups Access lists Bridge extension information Date and time information 802 1x content GARP properties GVRP interface information History information Interface information IP information LACP statistics TTY line information Login records Login setting Configuration of the address table Management IP filter Maps priority Port characteristics Public key information Priority queue information RADIUS server information Information on the running configuration Simple Network Management Protocol statistics Simple Network Time Protocol configuration Spanning tree configuration Secure shell server connections Startup system configuration System information TACACS server settings Information about terminal lines System hardware and software versions Virtual LAN settings The command show interfaces will display the following information counters status switchport Console show interfaces Interface counters information Interface status information Interface switchport information Console show interfaces Entering Commands 4 Partial Keyword Lookup If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark alternatives that match the initial letters are provided Remember not to leave a space between the command and question mark For example s shows all the keywords starting with s Console show s snmp sntp spanning tree ssh startup config sy
240. cfg cannot be deleted A colon is required after the specified unit number Example This example shows how to delete the test2 cfg configuration file from flash memory for unit 1 Console delete 1 test2 cfg Console Related Commands dir 4 68 delete public key 4 38 4 67 4 Command Line Interface dir This command displays a list of files in flash memory Syntax dir unit boot rom config opcode filename The type of file or image to display includes boot rom Boot ROM or diagnostic image file config Switch configuration file opcode Run time operation code image file filename Name of the configuration file or code image e unit Stack unit Always unit 1 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e If you enter the command dir without any parameters the system displays all files e A colon is required after the specified unit number e File information is shown below Table 4 26 File Directory Information Column Heading Description file name The name of the file file type File types Boot Rom Operation Code and Config file startup Shows if this file is used when the system is started size The length of the file in bytes Example The following example shows how to display all file information Console dir 1 file name file type startup size byte D2218 Boot Rom image Y 214124 V2271 Opera
241. ch SNMP notifications are sent globally For a host to receive notifications at least one snmp server enable traps command and the snmp server host command for that host must be enabled Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp server enable traps command For example some notification types are always enabled e Notifications are issued by the switch as trap messages by default The recipient of a trap message does not send a response to the switch Traps are therefore not as reliable as inform messages which include a request for acknowledgement of receipt Informs can be used to ensure that critical information is received by the host However note that informs consume more system resources because they must be kept in memory until a response is received Informs also add to network traffic You should consider these effects when deciding whether to issue notifications as traps or informs To send an inform to a SNMPv2c host complete these steps 1 Enable the SNMP agent page 4 99 2 Allow the switch to send SNMP traps i e notifications page 4 104 3 Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the snmp server host command as described in this section 4 Create a view with the required notification messages page 4 107 5 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 4 108 To send an inform to a SNMPv3 host complete these steps 1 Enable the SNMP agent page 4 99
242. ciation 6 4 176 Console config vlan private vlan 5 association 7 4 176 Console config Displaying Private VLAN Interface Information Use the Private VLAN Port Information and Private VLAN Trunk Information menus to display the interfaces associated with private VLANs Command Attributes e Port Trunk The switch interface PVLAN Port Type Displays private VLAN port types Normal The port is not configured in a private VLAN Host The port is a community port and can only communicate with other ports in its own community VLAN and with the designated promiscuous port s Or the port is an isolated port that can only communicate with the lone promiscuous port within its own isolated VLAN Promiscuous A promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces within a private VLAN Primary VLAN Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports and between promiscuous ports and community ports within the associated secondary VLANs Community VLAN A community VLAN conveys traffic between community ports and from community ports to their designated promiscuous ports Trunk The trunk identifier Port Information only Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Port Information or Trunk Information Private VLAN Port Information PVLAN Port Type Primary VLAN Community VLAN Trunk orma Ji orma orma orma orma orma orma orma orma Nlarmal z Figure 3 80 Private VLAN Port Information
243. ck Delete To change the assigned group of a user click Change Group in the Actions column of the users table and select the new group SNMPv3 Users New Delete ser Name Group Name Model Level Authentication Privancy Actions F Matt public V1 _ noAuthNoPriv None None Change Group SNMPv3 Users New SNMPV3 User User Name Ce Group Name public Security Model vi Security Level User Authentication Authentication Protocol MD5 Authentication Password Data Privacy Privacy Protocol Privacy Password Back Add SNMPv3 Users Edit User Name Mat G Group Name o pubic z Back Change Figure 3 28 Configuring SNMPv3 Users Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name Users must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read write and notify view 3 38 Simple Network Management Protocol 3 To send inform messages to an SNMPv3 user on a remote device you must first specify the engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the user resides The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host Command Attributes User Name The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent
244. command saves host key from RAM to flash memory Syntax ip ssh save host key dsa rsa dsa DSA key type rsa RSA key type Default Setting Saves both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console ip ssh save host key dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 39 show ip ssh This command displays the connection settings used when authenticating client access to the SSH server Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 40 System Management Commands 4 Example Console show ip ssh SSH Enabled version 1 99 Negotiation timeout 120 secs Authentication retries 3 Server key size 768 bits Console show ssh This command displays the current SSH server connections Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ssh Connection Version State Username Encryption 0 2 0 Session Started admin ctos aes128 cbc hmac md5 stoc aes128 cbc hmac md5 Console Table 4 16 show ssh display description Field Description Session The session number Range 0 3 Version The Secure Shell version number State The authentication negotiation state Values Negotiation Started Authentication Started Session Started Username The user name of the client Encryption The encryption method is automatically negotiated between the client and server Options for SSHv1 5 include DES 3DES and server to client stoc aes128
245. config 3 122 VLAN Configuration 3 Displaying Basic VLAN Information The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the switch Field Attributes VLAN Version Number The VLAN version used by this switch as specified in the IEEE 802 1Q standard e Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this switch Maximum Number of Supported VLANs Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this switch Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Basic Information VLAN Basic Information VLAN Version Number 1 Maximum VLAN ID 4094 Maximum Number of Supported VLANs 255 Figure 3 71 Displaying Basic VLAN Information CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 4 162 Max support vlan numbers 255 Max support vlan ID 4094 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning SVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Enabled GMRP Disabled Console Displaying Current VLANs The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging Ports assigned to a large VLAN group that crosses several switches should use VLAN tagging However if you just want to create a small port based VLAN for one or two switches you can disable tagging Command Attributes Web e VLAN ID ID of co
246. cted that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links left the down state and transitioned into some other state but not into the notPresent state This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 An authenticationFailure trap signifies that the SNMPvz2 entity acting in an agent role has received a protocol message that is not properly authenticated While all implementations of the SNMPv2 must be capable of generating this trap the snmpEnableAuthentTraps object indicates whether this trap will be generated RMON Events V2 risingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 1 The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm entry crosses its rising threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps fallingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 2 The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm entry crosses its falling threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps Private Traps swPowerStatus ChangeTrap 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 94 2 1 0 1 This trap is sent when the power state changes swipFilterRejectTrap 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 94 2 1 0 40 This trap is sent when an incorrect IP address is rejected by the IP Filter pethPsePortOnOff 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 94 2 1 0 43 This notification indicates if a PSE Power Notification Sourcing Equipment Portis delivering power to the PD Powered Device
247. cutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4094 Default Setting All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default The default frame type is untagged Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage A port or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid must be assigned to a VLAN as untagged If a trunk has switchport mode set to trunk i e 1Q Trunk then you can only assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member Frames are always tagged within the switch The tagged untagged parameter used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress The interface can be added to a VLAN as an untagged member regardless of connected devices to this interface The default setting is untagged VLAN 1 Note that each port can only have one untagged VLAN If a second VLAN is defined for a port as untagged the other VLAN that had untagged status will automatically be changed to tagged Setting a VLAN untagged will also change the native VLAN of the port to this VLAN If a VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to that interface the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that interface 4 171 4 Command Line Interface Example The following example shows how to add VLANs 1 2 5 and 6 to the allowed list as tagged V
248. d The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface Long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 This is the default Short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 Transmission Limit The maximum transmission rate for BPDUs is specified by setting the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive protocol messages Range 1 10 Default 3 3 106 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 Configuration Settings for MSTP Max Instance Numbers The maximum number of MSTP instances to which this switch can be assigned e Region Revision The revision for this MSTI Range 0 65535 Default 0 Region Name The name for this MSTI Maximum length 32 characters Maximum Hop Count The maximum number of hops allowed in the MST region before a BPDU is discarded Range 1 40 Default 20 Note The MST name and revision number are both required to uniquely identify an MST region Web Click Spanning Tree STA Configuration Modify the required attributes and click Apply STA Configuration Switch Spanning Tree State W Enabled Spanning Tree Type JRSTP gt Priority 0 61440 in steps of 4096 32768 When the Switch Becomes Root Input Format 2 hello time 1 lt max age lt 2 forward delay 1
249. d Usage First enter the class map command to designate a class map and enter the Class Map configuration mode Then use the match command to specify the fields within ingress packets that must match to qualify for this class map Only one match command can be entered per class map Example 4 193 4 Command Line Interface This example creates a class map called rd_class 1 and sets it to match packets marked for DSCP service value 3 Console config class map rd_class 1_ match any Console config cmap match ip dscp 3 Console config cmap This example creates a class map call rd_class 2 and sets it to match packets marked for IP Precedence service value 5 Console config class map rd_class 2 match any Console config cmap match ip precedence 5 Console config cmap This example creates a class map call rd_class 3 and sets it to match packets marked for VLAN 1 Console config class map rd_class 3 match any Console config cmap match vlan 1 Console config cmap policy map This command creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple interfaces and enters Policy Map configuration mode Use the no form to delete a policy map and return to Global configuration mode Syntax no policy map policy map name policy map name Name of the policy map Range 1 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage U
250. d specifies or modifies the host name for this device Use the no form to restore the default host name Syntax hostname name no hostname name The name of this host Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config hostname RD 1 Console config User Access Commands The basic commands required for management access are listed in this section This switch also includes other options for password checking via the console or a Telnet connection page 4 10 user authentication via a remote authentication server page 4 70 and host access authentication for specific ports page 4 79 Table 4 9 User Access Commands Command Function Mode Page username Establishes a user name based authentication system at login GC 4 26 enable password Sets a password to control access to the Privileged Exec level GC 4 27 4 25 4 Command Line Interface username This command adds named users requires authentication at login specifies or changes a user s password or specify that no password is required or specifies or changes a user s access level Use the no form to remove a user name Syntax username name access level eve nopassword password 0 7 password no username name name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters case sensitive Maximum users 16 access level evel Specifies the user
251. d statically assigns a multicast group to another receiver port Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso e config interface ethernet 1 5 e config if mvr type source e config if exit e config interface ethernet 1 6 e config if mvr type receiver e config if mvr immediate e config if exit e config interface ethernet 1 7 e config if mvr type receiver e config if mvr group 225 0 0 5 e config if 4 212 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 show mvr This command shows information about the global MVR configuration settings when entered without any keywords the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN using the interface keyword or the multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN using the members keyword Syntax show mvr interface interface members ip address e interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 12 jp address IP address for an MVR multicast group Range 224 0 1 0 239 255 255 255 Default Setting Displays global configuration settings for MVR when no keywords are used Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Enter this command without any keywords to display the global settings for MVR Use the interface keyword to display information about interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN Or use the members keyword to display information about multicast groups as
252. d to RAM and flash memory Use the show logging command to display the current settings Console config logging on 4 43 Console config logging history ram 0 4 44 Console config end Console show logging flash 4 47 Syslog logging Enabled History logging in FLASH level emergencies Console Remote Log Configuration The Remote Logs page allows you to configure the logging of messages that are sent to syslog servers or other management stations You can also limit the error messages sent to only those messages below a specified level Command Attributes e Remote Log Status Enables disables the logging of debug or error messages to the remote logging process Default Enabled e Logging Facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages There are eight facility types specified by values of 16 to 23 The facility type is used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service The attribute specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See RFC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to process messages such as sorting or storing messages in the corresponding database Range 16 23 Default 23 Logging Trap Limits log messages that are sent to the remote syslog server for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 3 is specified all messages from le
253. d to assign community strings to specified users and set the access level Basic Configuration 2 The default strings are e public with read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects e private with read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects To prevent unauthorized access to the switch from SNMP version 1 or 2c clients it is recommended that you change the default community strings To configure a community string complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server community string mode where string is the community access string and mode is rw read write or ro read only Press lt Enter gt Note that the default mode is read only 2 Toremove an existing string simply type no snmp server community string where string is the community access string to remove Press lt Enter gt Console config snmp server community admin rw 4 100 Console config snmp server community private Console config Note If you do not intend to support access to SNMP version 1 and 2c clients we recommend that you delete both of the default community strings If there are no community strings then SNMP management access from SNMP v1 and v2c clients is disabled Trap Receivers You can also specify SNMP stations that are to receive tr
254. dard by automatically reconfiguring ports to STP compliant mode if they detect STP protocol messages from attached devices 4 Introduction Virtual LANs The switch supports up to 255 VLANs A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network The switch supports tagged VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard Members of VLAN groups can be dynamically learned via GVRP or ports can be manually assigned to a specific set of VLANs This allows the switch to restrict traffic to the VLAN groups to which a user has been assigned By segmenting your network into VLANs you can e Eliminate broadcast storms which severely degrade performance in a flat network e Simplify network management for node changes moves by remotely configuring VLAN membership for any port rather than having to manually change the network connection e Provide data security by restricting all traffic to the originating VLAN Use private VLANs to restrict traffic to pass only between data ports and the uplink ports thereby isolating adjacent ports within the same VLAN and allowing you to limit the total number of VLANs that need to be configured Traffic Prioritization This switch prioritizes each packet based on the required level of service using four priority queues with strict or Weighted Round Robin Queuing It uses IEEE 802 1p and 802 1Q tags to prioritize
255. down to level 0 Range 0 7 Table 4 18 Logging Levels Level Severity Name Description 7 debugging Debugging messages 6 informational Informational messages only 5 notifications Normal but significant condition such as cold start 4 warnings Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return 3 errors Error conditions e g invalid input default used 2 critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted 1 alerts Immediate action needed 0 emergencies System unusable There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release Default Setting Flash errors level 3 0 RAM warnings level 6 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority i e numerically lower than that specified for RAM Example Console config logging history ram 0 Console config 4 44 System Management Commands 4 logging host This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging messages Use the no form to remove a syslog server host Syntax no logging host host_ip_address host_ip_address The IP address of a syslog server Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage By using this command more than once you can build up a list of host IP addresses The maximum number
256. dress Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config spanning tree mst configuration Console config mstp Related Commands mst vlan 4 149 mst priority 4 149 name 4 150 revision 4 151 max hops 4 151 4 148 Spanning Tree Commands 4 mst vlan This command adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance Use the no form to remove the specified VLANs Using the no form without any VLAN parameters to remove all VLANs Syntax no mst instance_id vlan vian range e instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 e vian range Range of VLANs Range 1 4094 Default Setting none Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage e Use this command to group VLANs into spanning tree instances MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance This provides multiple pathways across the network thereby balancing the traffic load preventing wide scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree MSTI 0 that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region This switch supports up to 58 instances You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network However remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region page 4 150 with the same set of instances and the s
257. dress DHCP client server exchange messages are then forwarded directly between the server and client without having to flood them to the entire VLAN DHCP snooping must be enabled on the switch for the DHCP Option 82 information to be inserted into packets Example This example enables the DHCP Snooping Information Option Console config ip dhcp snooping information option Console config ip dhcp snooping information policy This command sets the DHCP snooping information option policy for DHCP client packets that include Option 82 information Syntax ip dhcp snooping information policy lt drop keep replace gt drop Discards all DHCP client packets with Option 82 information keep Retains the client s DHCP information replace Overwrites the DHCP client packet information with the switch s relay information Default Setting replace Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When the switch receives DHCP packets from clients that already include DHCP Option 82 information the switch can be configured to set the action policy for these packets Either the switch can drop the DHCP packets keep the existing information or replace it with the switch s relay information Example Console config ip dhcp snooping information policy drop Console config 4 228 DHCP Snooping Commands 4 ip dhcp snooping database flash This command writes all dynamically learned snooping ent
258. dress or IP Address Dynamic Binding Table Counts Displays the number of IP addresses in the source guard binding table e Current Dynamic Binding Table Displays the IP addresses in the source guard binding table 3 175 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click IP Source Guard Dynamic Information Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Information Query by Z C Port U i DYLAN 1 Z C MAC Address C IP Address Query Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Table Dynamic Binding Table Counts 0 none Current Dynamic Binding Table Figure 3 112 Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Information CLI This example shows how to configure a static source guard binding on port 5 Console show ip source guard binding 4 222 MacAddress IpAddress Lease sec Type VLAN Interface 11 22 33 44 55 66 192 168 0 99 0 Static 1 Eth 1 5 Console Switch Clustering Switch Clustering is a method of grouping switches together to enable centralized management through a single unit Switches that support clustering can be grouped together regardless of physical location or switch type as long as they are connected to the same local network A switch cluster has a Commander unit that is used to manage all other Member switches in the cluster The management station uses Telnet to communicate directly with the Commander throught its IP address and the Commander manages Member switches usin
259. dress for this port To access this item on the web see Setting the Switch s IP Address on page 3 14 Configuration Name Interface label Port admin Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled i e up or down Speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice Capabilities Specifies the capabilities to be advertised for a port during auto negotiation To access this item on the web see Configuring Interface Connections on page 3 48 The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Sym Transmits and receives pause frames for flow control FC Supports flow control Broadcast storm Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or disabled Broadcast storm limit Shows the broadcast storm threshold 240 1488100 packets per second Flow control Shows if flow control is enabled or disabled LACP Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled 3 75 3 Configuring the Switch e Port Security Shows if port security is enabled or disabled Max MAC count Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be learned by a port 0 1024 addresses Port security action Shows the response to take when a
260. ds Default Setting e join 20 centiseconds e leave 60 centiseconds e leaveall 1000 centiseconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP and GMRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with GMRP or GVRP registration deregistration e Timer values are applied to GVRP for all the ports on all VLANs Timer values must meet the following restrictions leave gt 2 x join leaveall gt leave Note Set GVRP timers on all Layer 2 devices connected in the same network to the same values Otherwise GVRP may not operate successfully Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if garp timer join 100 Console config if Related Commands show garp timer 4 164 show garp timer This command shows the GARP timers for the selected interface 4 164 VLAN Commands 4 Syntax show garp timer interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 52 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Default Setting Shows all GARP timers Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show garp timer ethernet 1
261. e Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the appropriate radio button for a port or trunk Tagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be tagged that is carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or CoS information Untagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be untagged that is not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or CoS information Note that an interface can only have one untagged VLAN which must be the same as the Port VID See Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces on page 3 130 for configuring PVID Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via GVRP For more information see Automatic VLAN Registration on page 3 121 None Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page 3 127 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Table Select a VLAN ID from the scroll down list Modify the VLAN name and status if required Select the membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of ports or trunks Click Apply VLAN Static Table VLAN 2 z Name R amp D Status Enable Port Tagged Untagged Forbidden None Trunk Member 1 e C C C
262. e 2 10 4 205 A Command Line Interface Default Setting 2 times Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The query count defines how long the querier waits for a response from a multicast client before taking action If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by this command but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using the time defined by ip igmp snooping query max response time If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group Example The following shows how to configure the query count to 10 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 207 ip igmp snooping query interval This command configures the query interval Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query interval seconds no ip igmp snooping query interval seconds The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 Default Setting 125 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 Console config 4 206 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 ip igmp snooping query max response time This command configures the query report delay Use the no form to restore th
263. e DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port channel Eth1 S Eth1 2 S Eth1 3 S Etb1 4 S Eth1 5 S Eth1 6 S Eth1 7 S Eth1 8 S Eth1 9 S Eth1 10 S Eth1 11 S Eth1 12 S Eth1 13 S Eth1 14 S Eth1 15 S Eth1 16 S Eth1 17 S Eth1 18 S Eth1 19 S Eth1 20 S Eth1 21 S Eth1 22 S Eth1 23 S Eth1 24 S Eth1 25 S Eth1 26 S Eth1 27 S Eth1 28 S Eth1 29 S Eth1 30 S Eth1 31 S Eth1 32 S Eth1 33 S Eth1 34 S Eth1 35 S Eth1 36 S Eth1 37 S Eth1 38 S Eth1 39 S Eth1 40 S Eth1 41 S Eth1 42 S Eth1 43 S Eth1 44 S Eth1 45 S Eth1 46 S Eth1 47 S Eth1 48 S Eth1 49 S Eth1 50 S Eth1 51 S Eth1 52 S Console Creating VLANs Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups To propagate information about VLAN groups used on this switch to external network devices you must specify a VLAN ID for each of these groups Command Attributes e Current Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system Up to 255 VLAN groups can be defined VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN e New Allows you to specify the name and numeric identifier for a new VLAN group The VLAN name is only used for management on this system it is not added to the VLAN tag e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes VLAN Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Web Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enabled VLAN is operational Disabled VLAN is suspended i e does no
264. e Table entries include a MAC address IP address lease time entry type Static Dynamic VLAN identifier and port identifier All static entries are configured with an infinite lease time which is indicated with a value of zero in the table Command Attributes Static Binding Table Counts The total number of static entries in the table Port Switch port number Range 1 28 e VLAN ID ID of a configured VLAN Range 1 4094 MAC Address A valid unicast MAC address IP Address A valid unicast IP address including classful types A B or C 3 174 IP Source Guard 3 Web Click IP Source Guard Static Configuration Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration Static Binding Table r Counts VLAN 1 00 12 34 56 78 9A Unit 1 Port 9 192 168 1 35 IPv4 Lease Time 0 Seconds Current Static Binding Table Port 1 VLAN ID 1 v MAC Address IP Address Figure 3 111 Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration CLI This example shows how to configure a static source guard binding on port 5 Console config ip source guard binding 11 22 33 44 55 66 vlan 1 192 168 0 99 interface ethernet 1 5 4 221 Console config Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Information Displays the source guard binding table for a selected interface Command Attributes Query by Select an interface to display the source guard binding Options Port VLAN MAC Ad
265. e Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax stopbits 1 2 1 One stop bit e 2 Two stop bits Default Setting 1 stop bit Command Mode Line Configuration Example To specify 2 stop bits enter this command Console config line stopbits 2 Console config line 4 17 4 Command Line Interface disconnect This command terminates an SSH Telnet or console connection Syntax disconnect session id session id The session identifier for an SSH Telnet or console connection Range 0 4 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Specifying session identifier 0 will disconnect the console connection Specifying any other identifiers for an active session will disconnect an SSH or Telnet connection Example Console disconnect 1 Console Related Commands show ssh 4 41 show users 4 61 show line This command displays the terminal line s parameters Syntax show line console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet Default Setting Shows all lines Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 18 Example General Commands To show all lines enter this command 4 Interactive Interactive console Console show line Console configuration Password threshold 3 times timeout Disabled Login timeout Disabled Silent time Disabled Baudrate 9600 Databits 8
266. e default Syntax ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds no ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds The report delay advertised in IGMP queries Range 5 25 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The switch must be using IGMPv2 for this command to take effect This command defines the time after a query during which a response is expected from a multicast client If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by the ip igmp snooping query count but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using an initial value set by this command If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group Example The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 20 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 202 ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 207 ip igmp snooping router port expire time This command configures the query timeout Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds no ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port i e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 30
267. e 3 153 to take effect Command Attributes Policy Map Modify Name and Description Configures the name and a brief description of a policy map Range 1 16 characters for the name 1 64 characters for the description Edit Classes Opens the Policy Rule Settings page for the selected class entry Modify the criteria used to service ingress traffic on this page Add Policy Opens the Policy Configuration page Enter a policy name and description on this page and click Add to open the Policy Rule Settings page Enter the criteria used to service ingress traffic on this page Remove Policy Deletes a specified policy Policy Configuration Policy Name Name of policy map Range 1 16 characters Description A brief description of a policy map Range 1 64 characters 3 150 Quality of Service 3 Add Adds the specified policy e Back Returns to previous page with making any changes Policy Rule Settings Class Settings e Class Name Name of class map e Action Shows the service provided to ingress traffic by setting a CoS DSCP or IP Precedence value in a matching packet as specified in Match Class Settings on page 3 147 Meter The maximum throughput and burst rate Rate kbps Rate in kilobits per second Burst byte Burst in bytes Exceed Action Specifies whether the traffic that exceeds the specified rate will be dropped or the DSC
268. e aging Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information 4 140 Address Table Commands 4 Example Console config mac address table aging time 100 Console config show mac address table aging time This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac address table aging time Aging time 100 sec Console 4 141 4 Command Line Interface Spanning Tree Commands This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree Algorithm STA globally for the switch and commands that configure STA for the selected interface Table 4 52 Spanning Tree Commands Command Function Mode Page spanning tree Enables the spanning tree protocol GC 4 143 spanning tree mode Configures STP RSTP or MSTP mode GC 4 143 spanning tree forward time Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time GC 4 144 spanning tree hello time Configures the spanning tree bridge hello time GC 4 145 spanning tree max age Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age GC 4 145 spanning tree priority Configures the spanning tree bridge priority GC 4 146 spanning tree Configures the path cost method for RSTP MSTP GC 4 147 path cost method spanning tree Con
269. e authentication 4 70 also configures port security and IEEE 802 1X port access control Access Control List Provides filtering for IP frames based on address protocol or TCP 4 88 UDP port number or non IP frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type SNMP Activates authentication failure traps configures community access 4 98 strings and trap managers also configures IP address filtering Interface Configures the connection parameters for all Ethernet ports 4 114 aggregated links and VLANs Mirror Port Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the data 4 125 passing through or the performance of the monitored port Rate Limiting Controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on a port 4 127 Link Aggregation Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical trunk configures 4 128 Link Aggregation Control Protocol for port trunks Address Table Configures the address table for filtering specified addresses displays 4 138 current entries clears the table or sets the aging time Spanning Tree Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch 4 142 VLANs Configures VLAN settings and defines port membership for VLAN 4 161 groups also enables or configures private VLANs and protocol VLANs Class of Service Sets port priority for untagged frames selects strict priority or weighted 4 183 round robin relative weight for each priority queue also sets priority for TCP UDP traffic types and DSCP
270. e authentication servers you must use the RADIUS or TACACS software installed on those servers Example Console config line login local Console config line Related Commands username 4 26 password 4 12 password This command specifies the password for a line Use the no form to remove the password Syntax password 0 7 password no password 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password Character string that specifies the line password Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting No password is specified Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt You can use the password thresh command to set the number of times a user can enter an incorrect password before the system terminates the line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state e The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console config line password 0 secret Console config line 4 12 Line Commands 4 Related C
271. e copy tftp startup config TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Source configuration file name startup 01 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console This example shows how to copy a secure site certificate from an TFTP server It then reboots the switch to activate the certificate Console copy tftp https certificate TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Source certificate file name SS certificate Source private file name SS private Private password Success Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y 4 66 Flash File Commands 4 This example shows how to copy a public key used by SSH from a TFTP server Note that public key authentication via SSH is only supported for users configured locally on the switch Console copy tftp public key TFTP server IP address 192 168 1 19 Choose public key type 1 RSA 2 DSA lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name steve pub Username steve TFTP Download Success Write to FLASH Programming Success Console delete This command deletes a file or image Syntax delete unit filename filename Name of the configuration file or image name unit Stack unit Always unit 1 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e If the file type is used for system startup then this file cannot be deleted Factory_Default_Config
272. e g databits do not affect Telnet connections Example To enter console line mode enter the following command Console config line console Console config line Related Commands show line 4 18 show users 4 61 login This command enables password checking at login Use the no form to disable password checking and allow connections without a password Syntax login local no login local Selects local password checking Authentication is based on the user name specified with the username command Default Setting login local Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at login login selects authentication by a single global password as specified by the password line configuration command When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode login local selects authentication via the user name and password specified by the username command i e default setting When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE or Privileged Exec PE mode depending on the user s privilege level 0 or 15 respectively 4 11 4 Command Line Interface no login selects no authentication When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode e This command controls login authentication via the switch itself To configure user names and passwords for remot
273. e to a primary VLAN Use the no form to remove this mapping Syntax switchport private vlan mapping primary vlan id no switchport private vlan mapping primary vlan id ID of primary VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Promiscuous ports assigned to a primary VLAN can communicate with any other promiscuous ports in the same VLAN and with the group members within any associated secondary VLANs Example Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport private vlan mapping 2 Console config if show vlan private vian Use this command to show the private VLAN configuration settings on this switch Syntax show vlan private vian community isolated primary community Displays all community VLANs along with their associated primary VLAN and assigned host interfaces e isolated Displays an isolated VLAN along with the assigned promiscuous interface and host interfaces The Primary and Secondary fields both display the isolated VLAN ID primary Displays all primary VLANs along with any assigned promiscuous interfaces Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Executive 4 179 4 Command Line Interface Example Console show vlan private vlan Primary Secondary Type Interfaces 5 primary Eth1 3 5 6 community Eth1 4 Eth1 5 0 8 isolated Console Configur
274. ecifies a list of recipient Email Destination Address Email Destination Address This command specifies SMTP servers that may receive alert messages Web Click System Log SMTP To add an IP address to the Server IP List type the new IP address in the Server IP Address box and then click Add To delete an IP address click the entry in the Server IP List and then click Remove SMTP Admin Status M Enabled Email Source Address Severity 7 Debugging SMTP Server List New none lt lt Add Ea SMTP Server Remove Email Destination Address List New none lt lt Add Email Destination Address Remove Figure 3 19 Enabling and Configuring SMTP 3 29 3 Configuring the Switch CLI Enter the host ip address followed by the mail severity level source and destination email addresses and enter the sendmail command to complete the action Use the show logging command to display SMTP information Console config logging sendmail host 192 168 1 19 Console config logging sendmail level 3 Console config logging sendmail source email bill this company com Console config logging sendmail destination email ted this company com Console config logging sendmail Console Resetting the System Web Click System Reset Click the Reset button to reboot the switch When prompted confirm that you want reset the switch Reset the switch by s
275. eck that the null modem serial cable conforms to the pin out connections provided in the Installation Guide Forgot or lost the password Contact your local distributor B Troubleshooting Using System Logs If a fault does occur refer to the Installation Guide to ensure that the problem you encountered is actually caused by the switch If the problem appears to be caused by the switch follow these steps Enable logging Set the error messages reported to include all categories Designate the SNMP host that is to receive the error messages Repeat the sequence of commands or other actions that lead up to the error Make a list of the commands or circumstances that led to the fault Also make a list of any error messages displayed ak o N gt 6 Contact your distributor s service engineer For example Console config logging on Console config logging history flash 7 Console config snmp server host 192 168 1 23 Glossary Access Control List ACL ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by checking each packet for certain IP or MAC i e Layer 2 information Boot Protocol BOOTP BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices including IP address information the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files and the name of the boot file Class of Service CoS CoS is supported by prioritizing packets
276. ed When enabled DHCP messages entering an untrusted interface are filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping Table entries are only learned for untrusted interfaces Each entry includes a MAC address IP address lease time entry type Dynamic DHCP Binding Static DHCP Binding VLAN identifier and port identifier When DHCP snooping is enabled the rate limit for the number of DHCP messages that can be processed by the switch is 100 packets per second Any DHCP packets in excess of this limit are dropped Filtering rules are implemented as follows Ifthe global DHCP snooping is disabled all DHCP packets are forwarded If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received all DHCP packets are forwarded for a trusted port If the received packet is a DHCP ACK message a dynamic DHCP snooping entry is also added to the binding table If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received but the port is not trusted it is processed as follows If the DHCP packet is a reply packet from a DHCP server including OFFER ACK or NAK messages the packet is dropped If the DHCP packet is from a client such as a DECLINE or RELEASE message the switch forwards the packet only if the corresponding entry is found in the binding table If the DHCP packet is from client such as a DISCOVER REQUEST INFORM DECLINE or RE
277. electing Reset Reset i Figure 3 20 Resetting the System CLI Use the reload command to restart the switch When prompted confirm that you want to reset the switch Console treload 4 22 System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y Note When restarting the system it will always run the Power On Self Test 3 30 Basic Configuration 3 Setting the System Clock Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP allows the switch to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a time server SNTP or NTP Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries You can also manually set the clock using the CLI See calendar set on page 4 56 If the clock is not set the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup When the SNTP client is enabled the switch periodically sends a request for a time update to a configured time server You can configure up to three time server IP addresses The switch will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence Configuring SNTP You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to time servers Command Attributes SNTP Client Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client This requires at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP Server field Default Disabled SNTP Poll Interval Sets the interval between sendin
278. emote logging of syslog messages as specified in the logging facility type facility command REMOTELOG level type The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote server as specified in the logging trap command REMOTELOG server IP address The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging host command Related Commands show logging sendmail 4 52 show log This command displays the system and event messages stored in memory Syntax show log flash ram login tail flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset tail Shows event history starting from the most recent entry login Shows the login record only Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command shows the system and event messages stored in memory including the time stamp message level page 4 44 program module function and event number 4 48 Example The following example shows sample messages stored in RAM System Management Commands 4 Console show log 5 00 01 06 200 4 00 01 00 200 3 00 00 54 200 2 00 00 50 200 STA topology 1 00 00 48 200 STA root change notification evel 6 module 6 function 1 and event no STA root change notification evel 6 module 6 function 1 and event no STA r
279. engine ID for the remote device where the user resides Then use the snmp server user command to specify the user and the IP address for the remote device where the user resides The remote agent s SNMP engine ID is used to compute authentication privacy digests from the user s password If the remote engine ID is not first configured the snmp server user command specifying a remote user will fail e SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent For informs the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent You therefore need to configure the remote agent s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it Example Console config snmp server user steve group r amp d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien Console config snmp server user mark group r amp d remote 192 168 1 19 v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien Console config 4 112 SNMP Commands 4 show snmp user This command shows information on SNMP users Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show snmp user EngineId 800000ca030030f1d 9ca00000 User Name steve Authentication Protocol md5 Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active SNMP remote user EngineId 80000000030004e2b316c54321 User Name mark Authentication Protocol mdt Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console Table 4 41 show snmp user
280. ent access over a Telnet equivalent connection IP address filtering for SNMP web Telnet management access and MAC address filtering for port access Access Control Lists ACLs provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol or TCP UDP port number or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type ACLs can be used to improve performance by blocking unnecessary network traffic or to implement security controls by restricting access to specific network resources or protocols Port Configuration You can manually configure the speed duplex mode and flow control used on specific ports or use auto negotiation to detect the connection settings used by the attached device Use the full duplex mode on ports whenever possible to double the throughput of switch connections Flow control should also be enabled to control network traffic during periods of congestion and prevent the loss of packets when port buffer thresholds are exceeded The switch supports flow control based on the IEEE 802 3x standard Rate Limiting This feature controls the maximum rate for traffic received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into the network Packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Description of Software Features 4 Port Mirroring The switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol
281. ent time Dec 23 05 13 28 2002 Poll interval 16 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 137 92 140 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Current server 137 92 140 80 Console 4 55 4 Command Line Interface clock timezone This command sets the time zone for the switch s internal clock Syntax clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes before utc after utc name Name of timezone usually an acronym Range 1 29 characters hours Number of hours before after UTC Range 0 12 hours e minutes Number of minutes before after UTC Range 0 59 minutes before utc Sets the local time zone before east of UTC e after utc Sets the local time zone after west of UTC Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal Time UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Example Console config clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after UTC Console config Related Commands show sntp 4 55 calendar set This command sets the system clock It may be used if there is no time server on your network or if you have not configured the switch to receive signals from a time server
282. eout 120 secs Authentication retries 5 Server key size 512 bits Console show ssh 4 41 Connection Version State Username Encryption 0 2 0 Session Started admin ctos aes128 cbc hmac md5 stoc aes128 cbc hmac md5 Console disconnect 0 4 18 Console Generating the Host Key Pair A host public private key pair is used to provide secure communications between an SSH client and the switch After generating this key pair you must provide the host public key to SSH clients and import the client s public key to the switch as described in the proceeding section Command Usage Field Attributes e Public Key of Host Key The public key for the host RSA Version 1 The first field indicates the size of the host key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 65537 and the last string is the encoded modulus DSA Version 2 The first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard DSS The last string is the encoded modulus e Host Key Type The key type used to generate the host key pair i e public and private keys Range RSA Version 1 DSA Version 2 Both Default RSA The SSH server uses RSA or DSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption Save Host Key from Memory to Flash Saves the h
283. er Internal cluster IP addresses are in the form 10 x x member ID Only the base IP address of the pool needs to be set since Member IDs can only be between 1 and 36 Note that you cannot change the cluster IP pool when the switch is currently in Commander mode Commander mode must first be disabled Number of Members The current number of Member switches in the cluster Number of Candidates The current number of Candidate switches discovered in the network that are available to become Members Web Click Cluster Configuration Cluster Configuration Cluster Status v Enabled Cluster Commander v Enabled Role Commander Cluster IP Pool 10 254 254 1 Number of Members 1 Number of Candidates 2 Figure 3 113 Cluster Configuration 3 177 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example first enables clustering on the switch sets the switch as the cluster Commander and then configures the cluster IP pool Console config cluster 4 231 Console config cluster commander 4 231 Console config cluster ip pool 10 2 3 4 4 232 Console config Cluster Member Configuration Adds Candidate switches to the cluster as Members Command Attributes Member ID Specify a Member ID number for the selected Candidate switch Range 1 36 MAC Address Select a discoverd switch MAC address from the Candidate Table or enter a specific MAC address of a known switch Web Click
284. erface is assumed to be on a shared link 4 155 4 Command Line Interface e RSTP only works on point to point links between two bridges If you designate a port as a shared link RSTP is forbidden Since MSTP is an extension of RSTP this same restriction applies Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree link type point to point spanning tree mst cost This command configures the path cost on a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mst instance_id cost cost no spanning tree mst instance_id cost e instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes cost Path cost for an interface Range 1 200 000 000 The recommended range is Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 10 Gigabit Ethernet 200 20 000 Default Setting By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode e Ethernet half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 e Fast Ethernet half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 e Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 e 10 Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 1000 trunk
285. ery Layer 2 3 155 4 205 snooping 3 154 4 201 snooping configuring 3 155 4 200 ingress filtering 3 130 4 169 IP address BOOTP DHCP 3 16 4 215 4 217 setting 2 4 3 14 4 215 IP precedence enabling 3 144 IP source guard configuring static entries 4 221 setting filter criteria 4 219 isolated ports 3 131 4 174 logon authentication 3 44 4 70 RADIUS client 4 72 RADIUS server 4 72 TACACS client 3 46 4 76 TACACS server 3 46 4 76 logon authentication sequence 3 47 4 70 4 71 J jumbo frame 4 63 M main menu 3 4 Management Information Bases MIBs A 3 mirror port configuring 3 92 4 125 MSTP 4 143 global settings 4 142 interface settings 4 142 multicast filtering 3 154 3 161 3 176 4 200 multicast groups 3 159 4 204 displaying 4 204 static 3 159 4 201 4 202 4 204 multicast services configuring 3 160 3 162 3 163 3 165 4 201 4 202 displaying 3 159 4 204 multicast static router port 3 158 4 208 MVR setting interface type 4 211 setting multicast groups 4 210 specifying a VLAN 4 210 using immediate leave 4 211 L LACP local parameters 4 134 partner parameters 4 134 protocol message statistics 4 134 link type STA 3 110 3 112 3 114 3 116 3 119 4 155 logging syslog traps 4 46 to syslog servers 4 45 log in Web interface 3 2 Index 2 P password line 4 12 4 13 passwords 2 4 administrator setting 3 44 4 26 path cost 3 103 3 109 method 3 106 4 147 STA 3 103 3 109 4 147 po
286. ess mode DHCP Console Related Commands ip address 4 215 show ip interface This command displays the settings of an IP interface Default Setting All interfaces Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode User specified Console Related Commands show ip redirects 4 218 4 217 4 Command Line Interface show ip redirects This command shows the default gateway configured for this device Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip redirects IP default gateway 10 1 0 254 Console Related Commands ip default gateway 4 216 ping This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network Syntax ping host size size count count host IP address or IP alias of the host size Number of bytes in a packet Range 32 512 default 32 The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size specified because the switch adds header information count Number of packets to send Range 1 16 default 5 Default Setting This command has no default for the host Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached e Following are some results of the ping command Normal response The normal response occurs in one to ten
287. est timeout 5 Sever 1 Server IP address 192 168 1 1 Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 1812 Retransmit times 2 Request timeout 5 Console 4 75 4 Command Line Interface TACACS Client Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TACACS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch Table 4 30 TACACS Commands Command Function Mode Page tacacs server host Specifies the TACACS server GC 4 76 tacacs server port Specifies the TACACS server network port GC 4 76 tacacs server key Sets the TACACS encryption key GC 4 77 show tacacs server Shows the current TACACS settings GC 4 77 tacacs server host This command specifies the TACACS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server host host_ip_address no tacacs server host host_ip_address IP address of a TACACS server Default Setting 10 11 12 13 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server host 192 168 1 25 Console config tacacs server port This command specifies the TACACS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Synt
288. evel Enable Authentication Traps Issues a trap message whenever an invalid community string is submitted during the SNMP access authentication process Default Enabled Enable Link up and Link down Traps Issues a trap message whenever a port link is established or broken Default Enabled 3 34 Simple Network Management Protocol 3 Web Click SNMP Configuration Fill in the IP address and community string for each trap manager that will receive trap messages and then click Add Select the trap types required using the check boxes for Authentication and Link up down traps and then click Apply Trap Managers Trap Manager Capability 5 Current ew Trap Manager IP Address Trap Manager Community String none fice EF Trap UDP Port 162 a Trap Version 1 z Trap Security Level noAuthNoPris z Timeout 0 2147483647 1 100 secs F Trap Inform m Retry times 0 255 Enable Authentication Traps v Enable Link up and Link down Traps M Figure 3 24 Configuring IP Trap Managers CLI This example adds a trap manager and enables both authentication and link up link down traps Console config snmp server host 192 168 1 19 private version 2c 4 102 Console config snmp server enable traps 4 104 Enabling SNMP Agent Status Enables SNMPV3 service for all management clients i e versions 1 2c 3 Command Attributes e SNMP Agent Status Check the
289. exit Console config interface ethernet 1 4 Console config if switchport mode private vlan host 4 177 Console config if switchport private vlan host association 6 4 177 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if switchport mode private vlan host Console config if switchport private vlan host association 6 Console config if Protocol VLANs You can configure VLAN behavior to support multiple protocols to allow traffic to pass through different VLANS When a packet is received at a port its VLAN membership is determined by the protocol type of the packet Protocol VLAN Group Configuration Command Attributes Protocol Group ID Protocol Group ID assigned to the Protocol VLAN Group Range 1 2147483647 3 137 3 Configuring the Switch Frame Type Choose either Ethernet RFC 1042 or LLC Other as the frame type used by this protocol e Protocol Type The only option for the LLC Other frame type is IPX Raw The options for all other frames types include IP ARP or RARP Web Click VLAN Protocol VLAN Configuration Protocol VLAN Configuration Current New none gagga Protocol Gruop ID 1 2147483647 RRE Frame Type Ethernet Protocol Type IP x Figure 3 82 Protocol VLAN Configuration Configuring Protocol VLAN Interfaces Use the Protocol VLAN Port Configuration menu to set the protocol VLAN settings per por
290. eys stored on the switch can gain access The following exchanges take place during this process a The client sends its public key to the switch b The switch compares the client s public key to those stored in memory c Ifa match is found the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random sequence of bytes and sends this string to the client d The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes and sends the decrypted bytes back to the switch e The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent If the two sets match this means that the client s private key corresponds to an authorized public key and the client is authenticated Note To use SSH with only password authentication the host public key must still be given to the client either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file However you do not need to configure the client s keys ip ssh server This command enables the Secure Shell SSH server on this switch Use the no form to disable this service Syntax no ip ssh server Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions The SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client to select eithe
291. f events that are recorded in switch memory logging to a remote System Log syslog server and displays a list of recent event messages Displaying Log Messages The Logs page allows you to scroll through the logged system and event messages The switch can store up to 2048 log entries in temporary random access memory RAM i e memory flushed on power reset and up to 4096 entries in permanent flash memory Web Click System Log Logs Logs Log Messages Level 6 Module 5 functions 1 error number 1 Information Unit 1 Port 5 link up notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 5 functions 1 error number 1 Information VLAN 4093 link up notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 5 functions 1 error number 1 Information VLAN 1 link up notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 5 functions 1 error number 1 Information VLAN 4093 link down notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 5 functions 1 error number 1 Information VLAN 1 link down notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 5 functions 1 error number Information Unit 1 Port 5 link down notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 5 functions 1 error number Information STA topology change notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 5 functions 1 error number 1 Information Unit 1 Port 5 link up notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 5 functions 1 error number 1 Information VLAN 4093 link up notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 5 functions
292. faces switchport ethernet 1 3 4 123 Information of Eth 1 3 Broadcast threshold Enabled 500 packets second LACP status Disabled Ingress rate limit enable K bits per second 25 VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule Enabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 5 GVRP status Disabled Allowed VLAN 1 u Forbidden VLAN Private VLAN mode NONE Private VLAN host association NONE Private VLAN mapping NONE Console Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues This switch processes Class of Service CoS priority tagged traffic by using four priority queues for each port with service schedules based on strict or Weighted Round Robin WRR Up to eight separate traffic priorities are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown in the following table Table 3 11 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues Queue 0 1 2 3 Priority 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 3 140 Class of Service Configuration 3 The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802 1p standard for various network applications are shown in the following table However you can map the priority levels to the switch s output queues in any way that benefits application traffic for your own network Table 3 12 CoS Priority Levels Priority Level Traffic Type 1 Background 2 Spare 0 default Best Effort
293. fault VLAN i e associated with the PVID are also transmitted as tagged frames hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames e private vian For an explanation of this command see switchport mode private vlan on page 4 177 Default Setting All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1 and then set the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport mode hybrid Console config if Related Commands switchport acceptable frame types 4 169 4 168 VLAN Commands 4 switchport acceptable frame types This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport acceptable frame types all tagged no switchport acceptable frame types all The port accepts all frames tagged or untagged tagged The port only receives tagged frames Default Setting All frame types Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Example The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1 to tagged frames Console config interface ethe
294. figures the transmission limit for RSTP MSTP GC 4 148 transmission limit spanning tree Changes to MSTP configuration mode GC 4 148 mst configuration mst vlan Adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance MST 4 149 mst priority Configures the priority of a spanning tree instance MST 4 149 name Configures the name for the multiple spanning tree MST 4 150 revision Configures the revision number for the multiple spanning MST 4 151 tree max hops Configures the maximum number of hops allowed in the MST 4 151 region before a BPDU is discarded spanning tree Disables spanning tree for an interface Cc 4 152 spanning disabled spanning tree cost Configures the spanning tree path cost of an interface 0 4 152 spanning tree port priority Configures the spanning tree priority of an interface Cc 4 153 spanning tree edge port Enables fast forwarding for edge ports C 4 154 spanning tree portfast Sets an interface to fast forwarding c 4 154 spanning tree link type Configures the link type for RSTP MSTP Cc 4 155 spanning tree mst cost Configures the path cost of an instance in the MST 0 4 156 spanning tree mst Configures the priority of an instance in the MST c 4 157 port priority spanning tree Re checks the appropriate BPDU format PE 4 158 protocol migration show spanning tree Shows spanning tree configuration for the common PE 4 158 spanning tree i e overall bridge a selected interface or an instance within the multiple spanning tree show spanning tree mst Shows
295. first set an SNMP engine ID or accept the default specify read and write access views for the MIB tree configure SNMP user groups with the required security model i e SNMP v1 v2c or v3 and security level i e authentication and privacy and then assign SNMP users to these groups along with their specific authentication and privacy passwords Table 4 37 SNMP Commands Command Function Mode Page snmp server Enables the SNMP agent GC 4 99 show snmp Displays the status of SNMP communications NE PE 4 99 snmp server community Sets up the community access string to permit access to GC 4 100 SNMP commands 4 98 SNMP Commands 4 Table 4 37 SNMP Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page snmp server contact Sets the system contact string GC 4 101 snmp server location Sets the system location string GC 4 101 snmp server host Specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification operation GC 4 102 snmp server enable traps Enables the device to send SNMP traps i e SNMP GC 4 104 notifications snmp server engine id Sets the SNMP engine ID GC 4 105 show snmp engine id Shows the SNMP engine ID PE 4 106 snmp server view Adds an SNMP view GC 4 107 show snmp view Shows the SNMP views PE 4 108 snmp server group Adds an SNMP group mapping users to views GC 4 108 show snmp group Shows the SNMP groups PE 4 110 snmp server user Adds a user to an
296. following points e Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop e You can create up to eight trunks on a switch with up to eight ports per trunk The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports e When configuring static trunks on switches of different types they must be compatible with the Cisco EtherChannel standard The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk 3 79 3 Configuring the Switch Statically Configuring a Trunk Command Usage When configuring static trunks you may not be able to link switches of different types statically configured depending on the manufacturer s implementation However note that the static m trunks on this switch are Cisco EtherChannel TETEE compatible active To avoid creating a loop in the network be sure links you add a static trunk via the configuration interface before connecting the ports and also disconnect the ports before removing a static trunk via the configuration interface Command Attributes
297. for flash memory is errors i e default level 3 0 the message level for RAM is informational i e default level 6 0 Console show logging flash Syslog logging Enabled History logging in FLASH level errors Console show logging ram Syslog logging Enabled History logging in RAM level informational Console Table 4 19 show logging flash ram display description Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command History logging in FLASH The message level s reported based on the logging history command History logging in RAM The message level s reported based on the logging history command 4 47 4 Command Line Interface The following example displays settings for the trap function Console show logging trap Syslog logging Enable REMOTELOG status disable REMOTELOG facility type local use 7 REMOTELOG level type Debugging messages REMOTELOG server IP address 1 2 3 4 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 Console Table 4 20 show logging trap display description Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command REMOTELOG status Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging trap command REMOTELOG The facility type for r
298. formation 3 10 Switch Information Shows the number of ports hardware firmware version 3 11 numbers and power status Bridge Extension Shows the bridge extension parameters 3 13 Configuration IP Configuration Sets the IP address for management access 3 14 Jumbo Frames Enables jumbo frame packets 3 17 File Management 3 17 Copy Operation Allows the transfer and copying files 3 17 Delete Allows deletion of files from the flash memory 3 18 Set Start Up Sets the startup file 3 18 Line 3 21 Console Sets console port connection parameters 3 21 Telnet Sets Telnet connection parameters 3 23 Log 3 25 Logs Stores and displays error messages 3 25 System Logs Sends error messages to a logging process 3 26 Remote Logs Configures the logging of messages to a remote logging process 3 27 SMTP Sends an SMTP client message to a participating server 3 28 Reset Restarts the switch 3 30 SNTP 3 31 Configuration Configures SNTP client settings including broadcast mode or a 3 31 specified list of servers Clock Time Zone Sets the local time zone for the system clock 3 32 SNMP 3 33 Configuration Configures community strings and related trap functions 3 33 Agent Status Enables or disables SNMP Agent Status 3 35 SNMPv3 3 36 Engine ID Sets the SNMP v3 engine ID on this switch 3 36 Main Menu 3 Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Remote Engi
299. g 3 139 4 183 4 191 DSCP 3 145 4 189 layer 3 4 priorities 3 144 4 189 queue mapping 3 140 4 186 queue mode 3 142 4 184 traffic class weights 3 143 4 185 D default gateway configuration 3 14 4 216 default priority ingress port 3 139 4 184 default settings system 1 5 DHCP 3 16 4 215 client 3 14 dynamic configuration 2 5 DHCP snooping global configuration 4 223 4 231 specifying trusted interfaces 4 226 verifying MAC addresses 4 227 4 228 VLAN configuration 4 225 Differentiated Code Point Service See DSCP Differentiated Services See DiffServ DiffServ 3 147 4 191 binding policy to interface 3 153 4 198 class map 3 147 4 192 4 195 policy map 3 150 4 194 service policy 3 153 4 198 downloading software 3 18 4 64 DSCP enabling 3 144 4 189 mapping priorities 3 145 4 189 dynamic addresses displaying 3 99 4 139 E edge port STA 3 110 3 112 4 154 event logging 4 43 F firmware displaying version 3 11 4 62 upgrading 3 18 4 64 G GARP VLAN Registration Protocol See GVRP gateway default 3 14 4 216 GVRP global setting 3 122 4 162 interface configuration 4 163 Index 1 index H hardware version displaying 3 11 4 62 HTTPS 3 49 4 31 HTTPS secure server 3 49 4 31 l IEEE 802 1D 3 101 4 143 IEEE 802 1s 4 143 IEEE 802 1w 3 101 4 143 IEEE 802 1X 3 57 3 64 4 79 IGMP groups displaying 3 159 4 204 Layer 2 3 154 4 200 query 3 154 4 205 qu
300. g 4 179 show vlan private vlan 4 179 Configuring Protocol based VLANs 4 180 protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Groups 4 180 protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Interfaces 4 181 show protocol vlan protocol group 4 182 show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group 4 182 Priority Commands 4 183 Priority Commands Layer 2 4 183 Contents queue mode 4 184 switchport priority default 4 184 queue bandwidth 4 185 queue cos map 4 186 show queue mode 4 187 show queue bandwidth 4 188 show queue cos map 4 188 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 4 189 map ip dscp Global Configuration 4 189 map ip dscp Interface Configuration 4 189 show map ip dscp 4 190 Quality of Service Commands 4 191 class map 4 192 match 4 193 policy map 4 194 class 4 195 set 4 196 police 4 197 service policy 4 198 show class map 4 198 show policy map 4 199 show policy map interface 4 199 Example 4 200 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 200 IGMP Snooping Commands 4 200 ip igmp snooping 4 201 ip igmp snooping vlan static 4 201 ip igmp snooping version 4 202 ip igmp snooping leave proxy 4 202 ip igmp snooping immediate leave 4 203 show ip igmp snooping 4 203 show mac address table multicast 4 204 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 4 205 ip igmp snooping querier 4 205 ip igmp snooping query count 4 205 ip igmp snooping query interval 4 206 ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 207 ip igmp snooping router port expire time 4 207 Static Multicast Routing Comm
301. g cluster internal IP addresses There can be up to 36 Member switches in one cluster Cluster switches are limited to within a single IP subnet 3 176 Switch Clustering 3 Once a switch has been configured to be a cluster Commander it automatically discovers other cluster enabled switches in the network These Candidate switches only become cluster Members when manually selected by the administrator through the management station Note Cluster Member switches can be managed through only using a Telnet connection to the Commander From the Commander CLI prompt use the recommand command see page 4 233 to connect to the Member switch Cluster Configuration To create a switch cluster first be sure that clustering is enabled on the switch the default is enabled then set the switch as a Cluster Commander Set a Cluster IP Pool that does not conflict with the network IP subnet Cluster IP addresses are assigned to switches when they become Members and are used for communication between Member switches and the Commander Command Attributes e Cluster Status Enables or disables clustering on the switch Cluster Commander Enables or disables the switch as a cluster Commander e Role Indicates the current role of the switch in the cluster either Commander Member or Candidate Cluster IP Pool An internal IP address pool that is used to assign IP addresses to Member switches in the clust
302. g config Copies a file from a TFTP server to the running config tftp to startup config Copies a file from a TFTP server to the startup config e TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server e File Type Specify config configuration to copy configuration settings e File Name The file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Note The maximum number of user defined configuration files is limited only by available flash memory space Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the startup file or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination file to directly replace it Note that the file Factory_Default_Config cfg can be copied to the TFTP server but cannot be used as the destination on the switch Web Click System File Copy Operation Select tftp to startup config or tftp to file and enter the IP address of the TFTP server Specify the name of the file to download and select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name then click Apply EeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeE Copy tftp to startup config TFTP Server
303. g requests for a time update from a time server Range 16 16384 seconds Default 16 seconds SNTP Server Sets the IP address for up to three time servers The switch attempts to update the time from the first server if this fails it attempts an update from the next server in the sequence Web Select SNTP Configuration Modify any of the required parameters and click Apply SNTP Configuration ISNTP Client M Enabled ISNTP Polling Interval 16 16384 60 1 SNTP Server 10 1 0 19 137 82 14080 128 250 36 2 Figure 3 21 SNTP Configuration 3 31 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP unicast client and then displays the current time and settings Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 4 54 Console config sntp poll 60 4 55 Console config sntp client 4 53 Console config exit Console show sntp Current time Jan 6 14 56 05 2004 Poll interval 60 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 10 1 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 Current server 128 250 36 2 Console Setting the Time Zone SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time or UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the time at the Earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC
304. g tree cost 50 Console config if spanning tree port priority This command configures the priority for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree port priority priority no spanning tree port priority priority The priority for a port Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Default Setting 128 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 4 153 4 Command Line Interface Related Commands spanning tree cost 4 152 spanning tree edge port This command specifies an interface as an edge port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no spanning tree edge port Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass di
305. generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x or above and Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Table 3 5 HTTPS System Support Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape Navigator 6 2 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Solaris 2 6 To specify a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 50 Command Attributes HTTPS Status Allows you to enable disable the HTTPS server feature on the switch Default Enabled Change HTTPS Port Number Specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS connection to the switch s web interface Default Port 443 3 49 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Security HTTPS Settings Enable HTTPS and specify the port number then click Apply HTTPS Settings HTTPS Status Enabled Change HTTPS Port Number 1 65535 Z Figure 3 34 HTTPS Settings CLI This example enables the HTTP secure server and modifies the port number Console config ip http secure server 4 31 Console config ip http secure port 443 4 32 Console config
306. gned or properly configured If there is too much broadcast traffic on your network performance can be severely degraded or everything can come to complete halt You can protect your network from broadcast storms by setting a threshold for broadcast traffic Any broadcast packets exceeding the specified threshold will then be dropped Command Usage Broadcast Storm Control is enabled by default e Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic Command Attributes Port Port number e Type Indicates the port type 100BASE TX 1000BASE T or SFP Protect Status Shows whether or not broadcast storm control has been enabled Default Enabled Threshold Threshold as percentage of port bandwidth Range 64 100000 kilobits per second for Fast Ethernet ports 64 1000000 kilobits per second for Gigabit ports Trunk Shows if a port is a trunk member 3 90 Port Configuration 3 Web Click Port Port Trunk Broadcast Control Set the threshold mark the Enabled field for the desired interface and click Apply a Port Broadcast Control For a 100 Mbps port the threshold range is 64 to 100000 kilobits per second For a 1 Gbps port the threshold range is 64 to 1000000 kilobits per second Port Type Protect Status Threshold 64 1000000 Trunk J 4 100Base Tx El Enabled e4 kbits sec 2 100Base TX Enabled 64 kbits sec 3 100Base TX Enabled 64 kbits sec 4 10
307. gured as a tagged or untagged member Acceptable Frame Type Sets the interface to accept all frame types including tagged or untagged frames or only tagged frames When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Options All Tagged Default All Ingress Filtering Determines how to process frames tagged for VLANs for which the ingress port is not a member Ingress Filtering is always enabled Default Enabled Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames If a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STP However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP Mode Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface Default Hybrid 1Q Trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN Note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID are also transmitted as tagged frames Hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page 3 130 VLAN Configuration 3 Web C
308. h1 35 Ss Eth1 36 S Eth1 37 S Eth1 38 S Eth1 39 S Eth1 40 Ss Eth1 41 S Eth1 42 S Eth1 43 S Eth1 44 S Eth1 45 s Eth1 46 S Eth1 47 S Eth1 48 S Eth1 49 S Eth1 50 S Eth1 51 S Eth1 52 S Vlan ID 2 Type Static Name R amp D Status Active Ports Port Channel Console Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802 1Q VLAN compliant devices or untagged they are not connected to any VLAN aware devices Or configure a port as forbidden to prevent the switch from automatically adding it to a VLAN via the GVRP protocol Notes 1 You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by Port page to configure VLAN groups based on the port index page 3 129 However note that this configuration page can only add ports to a VLAN as tagged members 3 126 VLAN Configuration 3 2 VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN containing all ports on the switch and can only be modified by first reassigning the default port VLAN ID as described under Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces on page 3 130 Command Attributes VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets Port Port identifier Membership Typ
309. he member list click Apply LACP Configuration Member List Current New Uniti Port Uniti Port2 Unit Port3 Uniti Porta LSA Pon ME Uniti Por5 Remove j Unit Port Figure 3 51 LACP Trunk Configuration 3 82 Port Configuration 3 CLI The following example enables LACP for ports 1 to 6 Just connect these ports to LACP enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 6 Console config if lacp Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 100TX Mac address 00 12 CF 12 34 89 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Flow control status Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Current status Created by Lacp Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 1 Eth1l 2 Eth1 3 Eth1 4 Eth1 5 Eth1 6 Console 4 114 4 130 4 121 Configuring LACP Parameters Dynamically Creating a Port Channel Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria e Ports must have the same LACP System Priority e Ports must have the same LACP port Admin Key e However if the port channel
310. he attached router switch to ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all appropriate interfaces within the switch Static IGMP Host Interface For multicast applications that you need to control more carefully you can manually assign a multicast service to specific interfaces on the switch page 3 160 3 154 Multicast Filtering 3 Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently Based on the IGMP query and report messages the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that request multicast traffic This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly disrupting network performance Command Usage IGMP Snooping This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query and Report packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast host groups to identify the IP multicast group members It simply monitors the IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures the multicast filters accordingly IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast sw
311. he current interface Use the no form to remove the protocol mapping for this interface Syntax protocol vlan protocol group group id vlan vian id no protocol vian protocol group group id vlan group id Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 vian id VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded Range 1 4094 Default Setting No protocol groups are mapped for any interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage When creating a protocol based VLAN only assign interfaces via this command If you assign interfaces using any of the other VLAN commands such as vlan on page 4 166 these interfaces will admit traffic of any protocol type into the associated VLAN 1 SNAP frame types are not supported by this switch due to hardware limitations 4 181 4 Command Line Interface e When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protocol VLAN it is processed in the following manner Ifthe frame is tagged it will be processed according to the standard rules applied to tagged frames Ifthe frame is untagged and the protocol type matches the frame is forwarded to the appropriate VLAN Ifthe frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match the frame is forwarded to the default VLAN for this interface Example The following example maps the traffic entering Port 1 which matches the protocol type specified in protocol group 1 to VLAN 2
312. he protocol version for compatibility with other devices on the network Range 1 2 Default 2 Notes 1 All systems on the subnet must support the same version 2 Some attributes are only enabled for IGMPv2 including IGMP Report Delay and IGMP Query Timeout 3 155 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Configuration Adjust the IGMP settings as required and then click Apply The default settings are shown below IGMP Configuration GMP Status v Enabled Act as IGMP Querier Enabled GMP Query Count 2 10 2 GMP Query Interval 60 125 125 seconds GMP Report Delay 5 25 10 seconds GMP Query Timeout 300 500 300 seconds GMP Version 1 2 2 Figure 3 94 IGMP Configuration CLI This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering and then displays the current status Console config ip igmp snooping 4 201 Console config ip igmp snooping querier 4 205 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 4 205 Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 4 206 Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 4 207 Console config ip igmp snooping router port expire time 300 4 207 Console config ip igmp snooping version 2 4 202 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping 4 202 Service status Enabled Querier status Enabled Leave proxy status Disabled Query count 10 Query interval 100 sec Query max response
313. he speed and duplex mode of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled Use the no form to restore the default Syntax speed duplex 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half no speed duplex e 1000full Forces 1000 Mbps full duplex operation 100full Forces 100 Mbps full duplex operation e 100half Forces 100 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Forces 10 Mbps full duplex operation 10half Forces 10 Mbps half duplex operation 4 115 A Command Line Interface Default Setting e Auto negotiation is enabled by default e When auto negotiation is disabled the default speed duplex setting is 100half for 1OOBASE TX ports and 1000full for Gigabit Ethernet ports Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a speed duplex command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface e When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To set the speed duplex mode under auto negotiation the required mode must be specified in the capabilities list for an interface Example The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps half duplex operation Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 5 config if speed duplex 100half config if no negotiation config if
314. he switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that contains any VLAN aware devices the switch should include VLAN tags When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that does not contain any VLAN aware devices including the destination host the switch must first strip off the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame When the switch receives a tagged frame it will pass this frame onto the VLAN s indicated by the frame tag However when this switch receives an untagged frame from a VLAN unaware device it first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices and propagated throughout the network GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch Default Disabled Note GVRP is not supported in the current software Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN GVRP Status Enable or disable GVRP click Apply GVRP Status GYRP Enable Figure 3 70 Globally Enabling GVRP CLI This example enables GVRP for the switch Console config bridge ext gvrp 4 168 Console
315. he switch provides a wide range of advanced performance enhancing features Flow control eliminates the loss of packets due to bottlenecks caused by port saturation Broadcast storm suppression prevents broadcast traffic storms from engulfing the network Port based and private VLANs plus support for automatic GVRP VLAN registration provide traffic security and efficient use of network bandwidth CoS priority queueing ensures the minimum delay for moving real time multimedia data across the network While multicast filtering provides support for real time network applications Some of the management features are briefly described below Configuration Backup and Restore You can save the current configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server and later download this file to restore the switch configuration settings Authentication This switch authenticates management access via the console port Telnet or web browser User names and passwords can be configured locally or can be verified via a remote authentication server i e RADIUS or TACACS Port based authentication is also supported via the IEEE 802 1X protocol This protocol uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs EAPOL to request user credentials from the 802 1X client and then verifies the client s right to access the network via an authentication server Other authentication options include HTTPS for secure management access via the web SSH for secure managem
316. hed directly to these hosts and core switches in the network enable GVRP on the links between these devices You should also determine security boundaries in the network and disable GVRP on the boundary ports to prevent advertisements from being propagated or forbid those ports from joining restricted VLANs Note If you have host devices that do not support GVRP you should configure static or untagged VLANs for the switch ports connected to these devices as described in Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index on page 3 126 But you can still enable GVRP on these edge switches as well as on the core switches in the network Port based VLAN 2 w lt 1 9 7 8 fe ig cfc Sees ae ese LJ LE Fo 18 10 11 J 19 3 121 3 Configuring the Switch Forwarding Tagged Untagged Frames If you want to create a small port based VLAN for devices attached directly to a single switch you can assign ports to the same untagged VLAN However to participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches you should create a VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged VLANs but are only allowed one untagged VLAN Each port on t
317. hentication Retries Specifies the number of authentication attempts that a client is allowed before authentication fails and the client has to restart the authentication process Range 1 5 times Default 3 e SSH Server Key Size Specifies the SSH server key size Range 512 896 bits Default 768 The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch The host key is shared with the SSH client and is fixed at 1024 bits Web Click Security SSH Settings Enable SSH and adjust the authentication parameters as required then click Apply Note that you must first generate the host key pair on the SSH Host Key Settings page before you can enable the SSH server SSH Server Settings SSH Server Status I Enabled Version 2 0 SSH Authentication Timeout 1 120 1 20 seconds SSH Authentication Retries 1 5 E SSH Server Key Size 512 896 768 Figure 3 35 SSH Server Settings 3 53 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example enables SSH sets the authentication parameters and displays the current configuration It shows that the administrator has made a connection via SHH and then disables this connection Console config ip ssh server 4 36 Console config ip ssh timeout 100 4 37 Console config ip ssh authentication retries 5 4 37 Console config ip ssh server key size 512 4 38 Console config end Console show ip ssh 4 40 SSH Enabled version 2 0 Negotiation tim
318. his command is only effective if the dot1x mode is set to auto by the dot1x port control command page 4 81 In multi host mode only one host connected to a port needs to pass authentication for all other hosts to be granted network access Similarly a port can become unauthorized for all hosts if one attached host fails re authentication or sends an EAPOL logoff message Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1x operation mode multi host max count 10 Console config if dot1x re authenticate This command forces re authentication on all ports or a specific interface Syntax dot1x re authenticate interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 52 4 82 Authentication Commands 4 Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console dot1ix re authenticate Console dot1x re authentication This command enables periodic re authentication globally for all ports Use the no form to disable re authentication Syntax no dot1x re authentication Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1ix re authentication Console config if dotix timeout quiet period This command sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Use the no form to reset the def
319. his method is based on the IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 This method is based on the IEEE 802 1 Spanning Tree Protocol Default Setting Long method Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Note that path cost page 4 152 takes precedence over port priority page 4 153 Example Console config spanning tree pathcost method long Console config 4 147 4 Command Line Interface spanning tree transmission limit This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP MSTP BPDUs Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree transmission limit count no spanning tree transmission limit count The transmission limit in seconds Range 1 10 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs Example Console config spanning tree transmission limit 4 Console config spanning tree mst configuration This command changes to Multiple Spanning Tree MST configuration mode Default Setting e No VLANs are mapped to any MST instance The region name is set the switch s MAC ad
320. i Discarding afojn gt Discarding 128 8 e Discarding 1 Forwarding 128 Discarding 128 Discarding 128 Discarding 128 Clalalala Discarding 128 EN Figure 3 69 Displaying MSTP Interface Settings CLI This example sets the MSTP attributes for port 4 Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 4 config if spanning tree mst port priority 0 config if spanning tree mst cost 50 config if VLAN Configuration IEEE 802 1Q VLANs In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage g
321. iately request a new address Note that the switch will also broadcast a request for IP configuration settings on each power reset IP Configuration Management VLAN IP Address Mode IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 MAC Address 00 00 35 28 10 03 Restart DHCP Figure 3 7 DHCP IP Configuration Note If you lose your management connection use a console connection and enter show ip interface to determine the new switch address CLI Specify the management interface and set the IP address mode to DHCP or BOOTP and then enter the ip dhcp restart command Console config Console config interface vlan 1 4 114 Console config if ip address dhcp 4 215 Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart 4 217 Console show ip interface 4 217 IP address and netmask 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode User specified Console Renewing DCHP DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a specific period of time If the address expires or the switch is moved to another network segment you will lose management access to the switch In this case you can reboot the switch or submit a client request to restart DHCP service via the CLI 3 16 Basic Configuration 3 Web If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning you will not be able to renew the IP settings via the web interface You can only restart DHCP
322. icker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to reconfigure when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device e Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Information or STA Trunk Information STA Port Information i i i as es ei j Oper Oper Spanning STA Forward Designated Designated Designated pi Trunk Port Tree Status Transitions Cost Bridge Port Link Edge PortRole Member Type Port 1 Enabled Forwarding 1 0 32768 0012CFOBOD00 128 1 eis Disabled Designated 2 Enabled Discarding 0 0 32768 0012CF0B0D00 128 2 it Disabled Disabled ji 3 Enabled Discarding 0 o 32768 0012CF0B0D00 128 3 Ena Disabled Disabled to 4 Enabled Discarding 0 O 82768 0012CF0B0D00 1284 Porto Disabled Disabled TPointto 5 Enabled Discarding 0 0 32768 0012CFOBOD00 128 5 j ad Disabled D
323. ient can reject the authentication method and request another depending on the configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server The authentication method must be MD5 The client responds to the appropriate method with its credentials such as a password or certificate The RADIUS server verifies the client credentials and responds with an accept or reject packet If authentication is successful the switch allows the client to access the network Otherwise network access is denied and the port remains blocked in TTT TT ia ALLEN 1 Client attempts to access a switch port 2 Switch sends client an identity request 3 Client sends back identity information 4 Switch forwards this to authentication server 5 Authentication server challenges client 6 Client responds with proper credentials 7 Authentication server approves access 8 Switch grants client access to this port The operation of 802 1X on the switch requires the following The switch must have an IP address assigned RADIUS authentication must be enabled on the switch and the IP address of the RADIUS server specified 802 1X must be enabled globally for the switch Each switch port that will be used must be set to dot1X Auto mode Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1X client software installed and properly configured e The RADIUS server and 802 1X client support EAP
324. imit Kbps Trunk 1 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled C Enabled am nm ei wih Enabled Figure 3 58 Input Rate Limit Port Configuration CLI This example sets the rate limit level for input traffic passing through port 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 114 Console config if rate limit input 500 4 127 Console config if 3 93 3 Configuring the Switch Showing Port Statistics You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces Group and Ethernet like MIBs as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic based on the RMON MIB Interfaces and Ethernet like statistics display errors on the traffic passing through each port This information can be used to identify potential problems with the switch such as a faulty port or unusually heavy loading RMON statistics provide access to a broad range of statistics including a total count of different frame types and sizes passing through each port All values displayed have been accumulated since the last system reboot and are shown as counts per second Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds by default Note RMON groups 2 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP management software such as HP OpenView Table 3 10 Port Statistics Parameter Description Interface Statistics Received Octets The total number of octetts received on the interface incl
325. incoming traffic based on input from the end station application These functions can be used to provide independent priorities for delay sensitive data and best effort data This switch also supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic can be prioritized based on the DSCP field in the IP frame When these services are enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Quality of Service Differentiated Services DiffServ provides policy based management mechanisms used for prioritizing network resources to meet the requirements of specific traffic types on a per hop basis Each packet is classified upon entry into the network based on access lists IP Precedence or DSCP values or VLAN lists Using access lists allows you select traffic based on Layer 2 Layer 3 or Layer 4 information contained in each packet Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Multicast Filtering Specific multicast traffic can be assigned to its own VLAN to ensure that it does not interfere with normal network traffic and to guarantee real time delivery by setting the required priority level for the designated VLAN The switch uses IGMP Snooping and Query to manage multicast group registration It also supports Multicast VLAN Registration MVR which allows c
326. ing LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the remote side of an link aggregation Table 3 9 LACP Neighbor Configuration Information Field Description Partner Admin System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the user Partner Oper System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol Partner Admin Port Number Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner Partner Oper Port Number Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port s protocol partner Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner Admin State Administrative values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Oper State Operational values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Web Click Port LACP Port Neighbors Information Select a port channel to display the corresponding information LACP Port Neighbors Information Interface Pon 2 gt Trunk ID 1 Partner Admin System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper System ID 32768 00 12
327. ing Protocol based VLANs The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN This may require non standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs including security and easy accessibility To avoid these problems you can configure this switch with protocol based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol When a frame is received at a port its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type in use by the inbound packets Table 4 59 Protocol based VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page protocol vlan protocol group Maps a protocol group to a VLAN IC 4 181 show protocol vlan Shows the configuration of protocol groups PE 4 182 protocol group show interfaces Shows the interfaces mapped to a protocol group and the PE 4 182 protocol vlan protocol group corresponding VLAN To configure protocol based VLANs follow these steps 1 First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use page 4 166 Although not mandatory we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network Do not add port members at this time 2 Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN
328. ing the Switch Basic Configuration Displaying System Information You can easily identify the system by displaying the device name location and contact information Field Attributes e System Name Name assigned to the switch system e Object ID MIB II object ID for switch s network management subsystem e Location Specifies the system location e Contact Administrator responsible for the system e System Up Time Length of time the management agent has been up These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch Web server Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled Web server port Shows the TCP port number used by the web interface Web secure server Shows if management access via HTTPS is enabled e Web secure server port Shows the TCP port used by the HTTPS interface Telnet server Shows if management access via Telnet is enabled Telnet port Shows the TCP port used by the Telnet interface Jumbo Frame Shows if jumbo frames are enabled e POST result Shows results of the power on self test Web Click System System Information Specify the system name location and contact information for the system administrator then click Apply This page also includes a Telnet button that allows access to the Command Line Interface via Telnet Home System amp SNTP a SNMP
329. ion with the ES3528M is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console configure Console config username guest password 0 password Console config username admin password 0 password Console config Setting an IP Address You must establish IP address information for the stack to obtain management access through the network This can be done in either of the following ways Manual You have to input the information including IP address and subnet mask If your management station is not in the same IP subnet as the stack s master unit you will also need to specify the default gateway router Dynamic The switch sends IP configuration requests to BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network Manual Configuration You can manually assign an IP address to the switch You may also need to specify a default gateway that resides between this device and management stations that exist on another network segment Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default 2 4 Basic Configuration 2 Before you can assign an IP address to the switch you must obtain the following information from your network administrator IP address for the switch Default gateway for the network e Network mask for this network To assign an IP add
330. ipate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port Note VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging E tagged frames E VA VA VA VLAN Aware VU VLAN Unaware a tagged untagged E frames frames AARRE _ VA VA VU VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a 3 120 VLAN Configuration 3
331. is discarded Use the no form to restore the default Syntax max hops hop number hop number Maximum hop number for multiple spanning tree Range 1 40 Default Setting 20 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage An MSTI region is treated as a single node by the STP and RSTP protocols Therefore the message age for BPDUs inside an MSTI region is never changed However each spanning tree instance within a region and the internal spanning tree IST that connects these instances use a hop count to 4 151 4 Command Line Interface specify the maximum number of bridges that will propagate a BPDU Each bridge decrements the hop count by one before passing on the BPDU When the hop count reaches zero the message is dropped Example Console config mstp max hops 30 Console config mstp spanning tree spanning disabled This command disables the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface Use the no form to reenable the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface Syntax no spanning tree spanning disabled Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example This example disables the spanning tree algorithm for port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree spanning disabled Console config if spanning tree cost This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface
332. isabled i Figure 3 65 Displaying Spanning Tree Port Information 3 110 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 CLI This example shows the STA attributes for port 5 Console show spanning tree ethernet 1 5 4 158 Eth 1 5 information Admin status enabled Role disable State discarding Path cost 10000 Priority 128 Designated cost 0 Designated port 128 5 Designated root 32768 0012CFOBOD00 Designated bridge 32768 0012CFOBOD00 Fast forwarding disabled Forward transitions 0 Admin edge port disabled Oper edge port disabled Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enabled Console Configuring Interface Settings You can configure RSTP and MSTP attributes for specific interfaces including port priority path cost link type and edge port You may use a different priority or path cost for ports of the same media type to indicate the preferred path link type to indicate a point to point connection or shared media connection and edge port to indicate if the attached device can support fast forwarding References to ports in this section means interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Command Attributes The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed e STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 108 for additional info
333. ital Signature Standard DSS and the last string is the encoded modulus Example Console show public key host Host RSA 1024 35 1568499540186766925933394677505461732531367489083654725415020245593199868 5443583616519999233297817660658309586108259132128902337654680172627257141 3428762941301196195566782595664104869574278881462065194174677298486546861 5717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545240839717526463580581767 16709574804776117 DSA ssh dss AAAB3NzaC1lkc3MAAACBAPWKZTPbsSRIB8ydEXcxM3 dyV yrDbKStI1nzD Dg0h2Hxc YV44sXZ270XhamLK6P8bvuiyacWbUW a4 PAtp1KMSdqsKeh3hKoA3vRRSy1N2XF fAKx15 fwFfv J1Pd0kFgzLGMinvSNYQwiQXbKTBHOZ4mUZpE8 5 PWxDZMaCNBPj BrRAAAAFQChb4vsdfQGNIjw bvwrNLaQ77isiwAAATEAsy5YWDC99ebYHNRJ5kh47wY4i 8cZvH p9cnrfwFTMU01VFD1y3IR 2G3 95NLy50d7ZDxfAIMCOFLT yyEfbobMIZi 80GCstSNOxrZZVnMqwrTY fdrKX7YKBw Kjw6Bm iFq70 jAhf1Dg4510Ac27s6TLdtny1lwRq ow2eTCD5nekAAACBAJ 8rMccXTxHLFAczWS7Ej Oy Dbs1oBf PuSAb4oAsyj KXKVYNLOkKTLZfcFRu41bS2KV5LAwecsigF DjKGWt PNIQqabKgYCw2 o dVzxX4Gg yqdT1YmGA7 fHGm8ARGeiG4ssFKy4Z6DmYPXFum1Yg0 fhLwuHpOSKdxT3kk475S7 wOW Console 4 42 System Management Commands 4 Event Logging Commands Table 4 17 Event Logging Commands Command Function Mode Page logging on Controls logging of error messages GC 4 43 logging history Limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on GC 4 44 severity logging host Adds a syslog server host IP addres
334. itch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Note Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Command Attributes IGMP Status When enabled the switch will monitor network traffic to determine which hosts want to receive multicast traffic This is also referred to as IGMP Snooping Default Enabled Act as IGMP Querier When enabled the switch can serve as the Querier which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Default Enabled IGMP Query Count Sets the maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default 2 IGMP Query Interval Sets the frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 seconds Default 125 IGMP Report Delay Sets the time between receiving an IGMP Report for an IP multicast address on a port before the switch sends an IGMP Query out of that port and removes the entry from its list Range 5 25 seconds Default 10 IGMP Query Timeout The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port i e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 seconds Default 300 IGMP Version Sets t
335. its 4 17 disconnect 4 18 show line 4 18 General Commands 4 19 enable 4 19 disable 4 20 configure 4 21 show history 4 21 reload 4 22 end 4 22 exit 4 23 quit 4 23 Contents vi System Management Commands Device Designation Commands prompt hostname User Access Commands username enable password IP Filter Commands management show management Web Server Commands ip http port ip http server ip http secure server ip http secure port Telnet Server Commands ip telnet port ip telnet server Secure Shell Commands ip ssh server ip ssh timeout ip ssh authentication retries ip ssh server key size delete public key ip ssh crypto host key generate ip ssh crypto zeroize ip ssh save host key show ip ssh show ssh show public key Event Logging Commands logging on logging history logging host logging facility logging trap clear logging show logging show log SMTP Alert Commands logging sendmail host logging sendmail level logging sendmail source email logging sendmail destination email logging sendmail 4 24 4 24 4 24 4 25 4 25 4 26 4 27 4 28 4 28 4 29 4 30 4 30 4 30 4 31 4 32 4 33 4 33 4 33 4 34 4 36 4 37 4 37 4 38 4 38 4 39 4 39 4 40 4 40 4 41 4 42 4 43 4 43 4 44 4 45 4 45 4 46 4 46 4 47 4 48 4 49 4 49 4 50 4 51 4 51 4 52 show logging sendmail Time Commands sntp client sntp server sntp poll show sntp clock timezone calendar set show calendar System Status Commands show s
336. ity Table Figure 3 90 Mapping IP DSCP Priority Values 3 145 3 Configuring the Switch CLI The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on the switch maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 on port 1 and then displays the DSCP Priority settings Console config map ip dscp 4 189 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 114 Console config if map ip dscp 1 cos 0 4 189 Console config if end Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 4 190 DSCP mapping status disabled Port DSCP COS Eth 1 1 0 0 Eth 1 1 1 0 Eth 1 1 2 0 Eth 1 1 3 0 Eth 1 1 61 0 Eth 1 1 62 0 Eth 1 1 63 0 Console Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch Quality of Service The commands described in this section are used to configure Quality of Service QoS classification criteria and service policies Differentiated Services DiffServ provides policy based management mechanisms used for prioritizing network resources to meet the requirements of specific traffic types on a per hop basis Each packet is classified upon entry into the network based on access lists IP Precedence DSCP values or VLAN lists Using access lists allows you select traffic based on Layer 2 Layer 3 or Layer 4 information contained in each packet Based on configured network policies different kinds of traffic can be ma
337. ive DHCP packets from a client that already includes DHCP Option 82 information The switch can be configured to set the action policy for these packets Either the switch can drop the DHCP packets keep the existing information or replace it with the switch s relay information Note DHCP snooping must be enabled on the switch for the DHCP Option 82 information to be inserted into packets Command Attributes DHCP Snooping Information Option Status Enables or disables DHCP Option 82 information relay DHCP Snooping Information Option Policy Sets the DHCP snooping information option policy for DHCP client packets that include Option 82 information e Replace Overwrites the DHCP client packet information with the switch s relay information Keep Retains the client s DHCP information e Drop Discards all DHCP client packets with Option 82 information 3 170 DHCP Snooping 3 Web Click DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration DHCP Snooping Information Option Status C Enabled DHCP Snooping Information Option Policy Replace J Figure 3 107 DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration CLI This example enables DHCP Snooping Information Option and sets the policy as replace Console config ip dhcp snooping information option 4 227 Console config ip dhcp snooping information policy replace 4 228 Console config
338. l bridges outside of the scope of 802 1Q defined VLANs e GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP allows network devices to register endstations with multicast groups This switch does not support GMRP it uses the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP to provide automatic multicast filtering Web Click System Bridge Extension Configuration Bridge Extension Configuration Bridge Capability Extended Multicast Filtering Services No Traffic Classes Enabled Static Entry Individual Port Yes VLAN Learning SVL Configurable PVID Tagging Yes Local VLAN Capable No GMRP F Enabled Figure 3 5 Bridge Extension Configuration 3 13 3 Configuring the Switch CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 4 162 Max support VLAN numbers 256 Max support VLAN ID 4094 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning SVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Disabled GMRP Disabled Console Setting the Switch s IP Address This section describes how to configure an IP interface for management access over the network The IP address for the stack is obtained via DHCP by default To manually configure an address you need to change the switch s default settings IP address 192 168 1 1 and netmask 255 255 255 0 to values that are compatible with you
339. l in User Service RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch Table 4 29 RADIUS Client Commands Command Function Mode Page radius server host Specifies the RADIUS server GC 4 73 radius server port Sets the RADIUS server network port GC 4 73 radius server key Sets the RADIUS encryption key GC 4 74 radius server retransmit Sets the number of retries GC 4 74 radius server timeout Sets the interval between sending authentication requests GC 4 75 show radius server Shows the current RADIUS settings PE 4 75 4 72 Authentication Commands 4 radius server host This command specifies primary and backup RADIUS servers and authentication parameters that apply to each server Use the no form to restore the default values Syntax no radius server index host host_ip_address host_alias auth port auth_port timeout timeout retransmit retransmit key key index Allows you to specify up to five servers These servers are queried in sequence until a server responds or the retransmit period expires e host_ip_address IP address of server e host_alias Symbolic name of server Maximum length 20 characters e po
340. le config cluster member mac address 00 12 34 56 78 9a id 5 Console config rcommand This command provides access to a cluster Member CLI for configuration Syntax rcommand id lt member id gt member id The ID number of the Member switch Range 1 36 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command only operates through a Telnet connection to the Commander switch Managing cluster Members using the local console CLI on the Commander is not supported There is no need to enter the username and password for access to the Member switch CLI Example Vty O rcommand id 1 CLI session with the 24 48 L2 L4 GE Switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Vty O 4 233 4 Command Line Interface show cluster This command shows the switch clustering configuration Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show cluster Role commander Interval heartbeat 30 Heartbeat loss count 3 Number of Members 1 Number of Candidates 2 Console show cluster members This command shows the current switch cluster members Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show cluster members Cluster Members ID 1 Role Active member IP Address 10 254 254 2 MAC Address 00 12 cf 23 49 c0 Description 24 48 L2 L4 IPV4 IPV6 GE Switch Console show cluster candidates This command shows the discovered Candidate switches in the network Co
341. learned on the port Example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip igmp snooping immediate leave Console config if show ip igmp snooping This command shows the IGMP snooping configuration Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 155 for a description of the displayed items 4 203 4 Command Line Interface Example The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration Console show ip igmp snooping Service status Enabled Querier status Enabled Leave proxy status Disabled Query count 10 Query interval 100 sec Query max response time 20 sec Router port expire time 300 sec Immediate Leave Processing Disabled on all VLAN IGMP snooping version Version 2 Console show mac address table multicast This command shows known multicast addresses Syntax show mac address table multicast vlan vian id user igmp snooping e vian id VLAN ID 1 to 4094 e user Display only the user configured multicast entries igmp snooping Display only entries learned through IGMP snooping Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Member types displayed include IGMP or USER depending on selected options Example The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for VLAN 1 Console show mac address table multica
342. led and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Synchronization The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC i e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted Aggregation The system considers this link to be aggregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation Long timeout Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate LACP Activity Activity control value with regard to this link 0 Passive 1 Active Port channel 1 Partner Oper Partner Oper Port Oper Pri Admin Key 0 Oper Key 4 Admin State Oper State Console show lacp 1 neighbors neighbors Partner Admin System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 01 Partner Admin Port Number 1 Port Number 1 Port Admin Priority 32768 ority 32768 defaulted distributing collecting synchronization long timeout distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity 4 136 Table 4 49 Link Aggregation Commands 4 show lacp neighbors display description Field Description Partner Admin System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the user Partner Oper Sys
343. lerts Event Handler Enabled but no server defined SNTP Clock Synchronization Disabled DHCP Snooping Status Disabled IP Source Guard Status Disabled all ports Switch Clustering Status Enabled Commander Disabled 4 Introduction Chapter 2 Initial Configuration Connecting to the Switch Configuration Options The switch includes a built in network management agent The agent offers a variety of management options including SNMP RMON Groups 1 2 3 9 anda web based interface A PC may also be connected directly to the switch for configuration and monitoring via a command line interface CLI Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To change this address see Setting an IP Address on page 2 4 The switch s HTTP web agent allows you to configure switch parameters monitor port connections and display statistics using a standard web browser such as Netscape version 6 2 and higher or Microsoft IE version 5 0 and higher The switch s web management interface can be accessed from any computer attached to the network The CLI program can be accessed by a direct connection to the RS 232 serial console port on the switch or remotely by a Telnet connection over the network The switch s management agent also supports SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol This SNMP agent permits the switch to be managed from any system in the network using network management software such as
344. lick VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Fill in the required settings for each interface click Apply VLAN Port Configuration Port PVID Acceptable Frame Type lngress Filtering Mode Trunk Member ALL 7 M Enabled Hybrid z ALL M M Enabled Hybrid ATT AL Enabled Hybond M Enabled Hybid M Enabled Hybrid M Enabled Hybrid M Enabled Hybrid x Al R Enahlad Hubrid i Figure 3 76 Configuring VLANs per Port gt i f 4 pa i r 4 gt fi r 4 DLN OD ALB wlrno CLI This example sets port 3 to accept only tagged frames assigns PVID 3 as the native VLAN ID and then sets the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 114 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged 4 169 Console config if switchport ingress filtering 4 169 Console config if switchport native vlan 3 4 170 Console config if switchport mode hybrid 4 168 Console config if Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN This switch supports two types of private VLANs primary secondary associated groups and stand alone isolated VLANs A primary VLAN contains promiscuous ports that can communicate with all other ports in the private VLAN group while a secondary or community VLAN contains communit
345. ly to ACLs e Each ACL can have up to 100 rules e However due to resource restrictions the average number of rules bound to the ports should not exceed 20 e When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL If these rules are included in ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking the bind operation will fail The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows 1 User defined rules in the Egress IP ACL for egress ports 2 User defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports 3 Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports 4 If no explicit rule is matched the implicit default is permit all Setting the ACL Name and Type Use the ACL Configuration page to designate the name and type of an ACL Command Attributes e Name Name of the ACL Maximum length 15 characters e Type There are three filtering modes Standard IP ACL mode that filters packets based on the source IP address Extended IP ACL mode that filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol port number MAC MAC ACL mode that filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type RFC 1060 3 65 3 C
346. ly to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match for a list of all permit rules the packet is dropped and if no rules match for a list of all deny rules the packet is accepted There are three filtering modes e Standard IP ACL mode STD ACL filters packets based on the source IP address Extended IP ACL mode EXT ACL filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol port number The following restrictions apply to ACLs e Each ACL can have up to 100 rules e However due to resource restrictions the average number of rules bound the ports should not exceed 20 e This switch supports ACLs for ingress filtering only You can only bind one IP ACL to any port for ingress filtering In other words only one ACL can be bound to an interface Ingress IP ACL The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows 1 User defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports 2 Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports 3 If no explicit rule is matched the implicit default is permit all Table 4 33 Access Control Lists Command Groups Function Page IP ACLs Configures ACLs based on IP addresses TC
347. managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system Console Connection To access the switch through the console port perform these steps 1 At the console prompt enter the user name and password The default user names are admin and guest with corresponding passwords of admin and guest When the administrator user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console prompt and enters privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec But when the guest user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console gt prompt and enters normal access mode i e Normal Exec 2 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 3 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After connecting to the system through the console port the login screen displays User Access Verification Username admin Password CLI session with the ES3528M is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console 4 Command Line Interface Telnet Connection Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol In this environment your management station and any network device you want to manage over the network must have a valid IP address Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Each address consists of a ne
348. mand Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same UDP port If you enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x and Netscape Navigator 6 2 or later versions The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Table 4 13 HTTPS System Support Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape Navigator 6 2 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Solaris 2 6 e To specify a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 50 Also refer to the copy command on page 4 64 4 31 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config ip http secure server Console config
349. mand enables 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP for the current interface Use the no form to disable it Syntax no lacp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex and auto negotiation e Atrunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available port channel ID e Ifthe target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails 4 130 Link Aggregation Commands 4 Example The following shows LACP enabled on ports 11 13 Because LACP has also been enabled on the ports at the other end of the links the show interfaces status port channel 1 command shows that Trunk 1 has been established Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 13 Console config if lacp e Consol config if exit Console config exit Console show interfaces status port channel 1 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 100TX Mac address
350. mands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified addresses displaying current entries clearing the table or setting the aging time Table 4 51 Address Table Commands Command Function Mode Page mac address table static Maps a static address to a port ina VLAN GC 4 138 clear mac address table Removes any learned entries from the forwarding database PE 4 139 dynamic show mac address table Displays entries in the bridge forwarding database PE 4 139 mac address table Sets the aging time of the address table GC 4 140 aging time show mac address table Shows the aging time for the address table PE 4 141 aging time mac address table static This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN Use the no form to remove an address Syntax mac address table static mac address interface interface vlan vian id action no mac address table static mac address vlan vlan id mac address MAC address interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 52 port channel channel id Range 1 8 e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 action delete on reset Assignment lasts until the switch is reset permanent Assignment is permanent Default Setting No static addresses are defined The default mode is permanent Command Mode Global Configuration 4 138 Address Table Commands 4 Comm
351. mbers The IP address must start 10 x x x Default Setting 10 254 254 1 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e An internal IP address pool is used to assign IP addresses to Member switches in the cluster Internal cluster IP addresses are in the form 10 x x member ID Only the base IP address of the pool needs to be set since Member IDs can only be between 1 and 36 e Seta Cluster IP Pool that does not conflict with addresses in the network IP subnet Cluster IP addresses are assigned to switches when they become Members and are used for communication between Member switches and the Commander You cannot change the cluster IP pool when the switch is currently in Commander mode Commander mode must first be disabled Example Console config cluster ip pool 10 2 3 4 Console config cluster member This command configures a Candidate switch as a cluster Member Use the no form to remove a Member switch from the cluster Syntax cluster member mac address lt mac address gt id lt member id gt no cluster member id lt member id gt mac address The MAC address of the Candidate switch 4 232 Switch Cluster Commands 4 member id The ID number to assign to the Member switch Range 1 36 Default Setting No Members Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The maximum number of cluster Members is 36 The maximum number of switch Candidates is 100 Example Conso
352. mmand Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show cluster candidates Cluster Candidates Role Mac Description ACTIVE MEMBER 00 12 cf 23 49 c0 24 48 L2 L4 IPV4 IPV6 GE Switch CANDIDATE 00 12 cf 0b 47 a0 24 48 L2 L4 IPV4 IPV6 GE Switch Console 4 234 Appendix A Software Specifications Software Features Authentication Local RADIUS TACACS Port 802 1X HTTPS SSH Port Security Access Control Lists IP MAC 100 rules per system DHCP Client Port Configuration 100BASE TX 10 100 Mbps half full duplex 1000BASE T 10 100 Mbps at half full duplex 1000 Mbps at full duplex 1000BASE SX LX LH 1000 Mbps at full duplex SFP Flow Control Full Duplex IEEE 802 3 2002 Half Duplex Back pressure Broadcast Storm Control Traffic throttled above a critical threshold Port Mirroring Multiple source ports one destination port Rate Limits Input limit Output limit Port Trunking Static trunks Cisco EtherChannel compliant Dynamic trunks Link Aggregation Control Protocol Spanning Tree Algorithm Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w VLAN Support Up to 255 groups port based or tagged 802 1Q Private VLANs Protocol based VLANs Class of Service Supports 4 levels of priority and Weighted Round Robin Queueing which can be configured by VLAN tag or port Layer 3 4 priority mapping IP DSCP Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Layer 2 Multicast VLAN
353. mple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is used to send email messages between servers The messages can be retrieved using POP or IMAP clients Command Attributes e Admin Status Enables disables the SMTP function Default Enabled e Email Source Address This command specifies SMTP servers email addresses that can send alert messages 3 28 Basic Configuration 3 Severity Specifies the degree of urgency that the message carries Debugging Sends a debugging notification Level 7 Information Sends informatative notification only Level 6 e Notice Sends notification of a normal but significant condition such as a cold start Level 5 e Warning Sends notification of a warning condition such as return false or unexpected return Level 4 Error Sends notification that an error conditions has occurred such as invalid input or default used Level 3 e Critical Sends notification that a critical condition has occurred such as memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted Level 2 e Alert Sends urgent notification that immediate action must be taken Level 1 e Emergency Sends an emergency notification that the system is now unusable Level 0 e SMTP Server List Specifies a list of recipient SMTP servers e SMTP Server Specifies anew SMTP server address to add to the SMTP Server List Email Destination Address List Sp
354. multiple spanning tree MST Syntax show spanning tree interface mst instance_id interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 instance_id Instance identifier of the multiple spanning tree Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 158 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Command Usage Use the show spanning tree command with no parameters to display the spanning tree configuration for the switch for the Common Spanning Tree CST and for every interface in the tree Use the show spanning tree interface command to display the spanning tree configuration for an interface within the Common Spanning Tree CST Use the show spanning tree mst instance_id command to display the spanning tree configuration for an instance within the Multiple Spanning Tree MST For a description of the items displayed under Spanning tree information see Configuring Global Settings on page 3 128 For a description of the items displayed for specific interfaces see Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 132 Example Console show spanning tree Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enable disable enable Instance 0 Vlans configuration 1 4094 Priority 32768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 15 Root
355. n Displaying Current VLANs Configuring a VLAN Static List Configuring a VLAN Static Table VLAN Static Membership by Port Configuring VLANs per Port Private VLAN Information Private VLAN Configuration Private VLAN Association Private VLAN Port Information Private VLAN Port Configuration Protocol VLAN Configuration Protocol VLAN Port Configuration Port Priority Configuration Traffic Classes Enable Traffic Classes Queue Mode 3 67 3 69 3 71 3 72 3 73 3 75 3 77 3 80 3 82 3 84 3 86 3 88 3 89 3 91 3 92 3 93 3 97 3 99 3 100 3 101 3 104 3 107 3 110 3 113 3 114 3 116 3 119 3 122 3 123 3 124 3 126 3 128 3 129 3 131 3 133 3 134 3 134 3 135 3 137 3 138 3 138 3 140 3 141 3 142 3 143 Figure 3 88 Figure 3 89 Figure 3 90 Figure 3 91 Figure 3 92 Figure 3 93 Figure 3 94 Figure 3 95 Figure 3 96 Figure 3 97 Figure 3 98 Figure 3 99 Figure 3 100 Figure 3 101 Figure 3 102 Figure 3 103 Figure 3 104 Figure 3 105 Figure 3 106 Figure 3 107 Figure 3 108 Figure 3 109 Figure 3 110 Figure 3 111 Figure 3 112 Figure 3 113 Figure 3 114 Figure 3 115 Figure 3 116 Configuring Queue Scheduling IP DSCP Priority Status Mapping IP DSCP Priority Values Configuring Class Maps Configuring Policy Maps Service Policy Settings IGMP Configuration IGMP Immediate Leave Displaying Multicast Router Port Information Static Multicast Router Port Configuration IP Multicast Registration Table IGMP Member Port
356. n Mode Page show queue cos map Shows the class of service map PE 4 188 show interfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational status of an PE 4 123 interface queue mode This command sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round Robin WRR for the class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax queue mode strict wrr no queue mode e strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues wrr Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1 2 4 8 for queues 0 3 respectively Default Setting Weighted Round Robin Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Example The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode Console config queue mode strict Console config
357. n an unknown PDU or 2 are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type Marker Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype Web Click Port LACP Port Counters Information Select a member port to display the corresponding information LACP Port Counters Information Member Port fi x Trunk ID 2 LACPDUs Sent 307 LACPDUs Receive 296 Marker Sent D Marker Receive 0 Marker Unknown Pkts 0 Marker Illegal Pkts 0 Figure 3 53 LACP Port Counters Information CLI The following example displays LACP counters Console show lacp counters 4 134 Port channel 1 Eth 1 1 LACPDUs Sent 91 LACPDUs Receive 43 Marker Sent 0 Marker Receive 0 LACPDUs Unknown Pkts 0 LACPDUs Illegal Pkts 0 3 86 Port Configuration 3 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the local side of an link aggregation Table 3 8 LACP Internal Configuration Information Field Description Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port LACPDUs Interval Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information LACP System P
358. n can access this information using software such as HP OpenView Access rights to the onboard agent are controlled by community strings To communicate with the switch the management station must first submit a valid community string for authentication The options for configuring community strings trap functions and restricting access to clients with specified IP addresses are described in the following sections Setting Community Access Strings You may configure up to five community strings authorized for management access All community strings used for IP Trap Managers should be listed in this table For security reasons you should consider removing the default strings Command Attributes SNMP Community Capability Indicates that the switch supports up to five community strings Community String A community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Default strings public read only private read write Range 1 32 characters case sensitive Access Mode Read Only Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects Read Write Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects 3 33 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click SNMP Configuration Add new community strings as required select the access rights from the Access Mode drop down list then click Add
359. nabling SNMP Management Access The switch can be configured to accept management commands from Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP applications such as HP OpenView You can configure the switch to 1 respond to SNMP requests or 2 generate SNMP traps When SNMP management stations send requests to the switch either to return information or to set a parameter the switch provides the requested data or sets the specified parameter The switch can also be configured to send information to SNMP managers without being requested by the managers through trap messages which inform the manager that certain events have occurred The switch includes an SNMP agent that supports SNMP version 1 2c and 3 clients To provide management access for version 1 or 2c clients you must specify a community string The switch provides a default MIB View i e an SNMPv3 construct for the default public community string that provides read access to the entire MIB tree and a default view for the private community string that provides read write access to the entire MIB tree However you may assign new views to version 1 or 2c community strings that suit your specific security requirements see page 3 42 Community Strings for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients Community strings are used to control management access to SNMP version 1 and 2c stations as well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages from the switch You therefore nee
360. nd history buffer Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and 10 Configuration commands Example In this example the show history command lists the contents of the command history buffer Console show history Execution command history 2 config 1 show history Configuration command history 4 interface vlan 1 3 exit 2 interface vlan 1 1 end Console 4 21 4 Command Line Interface The command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode and commands from the Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration modes In this example the 2 command repeats the second command in the Execution history buffer config Console 2 Console config Console config reload This command restarts the system Note When the system is restarted it will always run the Power On Self Test It will also retain all configuration information stored in non volatile memory by the copy running config startup config command Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command resets the entire system Example This example shows how to reset the switch Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y end This command returns to Privileged Exec mode
361. nd to specify a policy map and enter Policy Map configuration mode Then use the class command to enter Policy Map Class configuration mode And finally use the set and police commands to specify the match criteria where the set command classifies the service that an IP packet will receive police command defines the maximum throughput burst rate and the action that results from a policy violation e You can configure up to 16 rules per Class Map You can also include multiple classes in a Policy Map 4 195 4 Command Line Interface Example This example creates a policy called rd_policy uses the class command to specify the previously defined rd_class uses the set command to classify the service that incoming packets will receive and then uses the police command to limit the average bandwidth to 100 000 Kbps the burst rate to 1522 bytes and configure the response to drop any violating packets Console config policy map rd_policy Console config pmap class rd_class Console config pmap c set ip dscp 3 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522 exceed action drop Console config pmap c set This command services IP traffic by setting a CoS DSCP or IP Precedence value in a matching packet as specified by the match command on page 4 193 Use the no form to remove the traffic classification Syntax no set cos new cos ip dscp new dscp ip precedence new precedence ipv6 dscp new dscp
362. ne m Enabled led Z T Enab 9 jo Enabled fon 2 mj Enabi ed ed fm Enable 10 T Enabled none m Enabled none m Enabled none M Enab 11 D Enabled none Z M Enabled none Z M Enabled none 2 M Enab 12 Enabled none I Enabled none z Enabled nane Enabled nane z 13 Enabled none Z Enabled none 7 Enabled none Z M Enabled none 14 I Enabled none M Enabled none z Enabled none Enab 15 C Enabled none Enabled inone Z Enabled none Z m Enab 16 C Enabled none Z Enabled inone z m Enabled I Enab 17 T Enabled none Z M Enabled none m Enabled m Enab 18 7 Enabled none m Enabled none Enabled none Z Enabled none Z xl Figure 3 46 Configuring ACL Port Binding CLI This example assigns an IP access list to port 1 and an IP access list to port 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 114 Console config if ip access group david in 4 92 Console config if exit Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 3 config if ip access group david in config if Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access You create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups that are allowed management access to the switch through the web interface SNMP or Telnet
363. ne databits 7 Console config line Related Commands parity 4 16 parity This command defines the generation of a parity bit Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax parity none even odd no parity none No parity even Even parity odd Odd parity Default Setting No parity Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems often require a specific parity bit setting Example To specify no parity enter this command Console config line parity none Console config line 4 16 Line Commands 4 speed This command sets the terminal line s baud rate This command sets both the transmit to terminal and receive from terminal speeds Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax speed bps no speed bps Baud rate in bits per second Options 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps Default Setting 9600 Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be supported The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported Example To specify 57600 bps enter this command Console config line speed 57600 Console config line stopbits This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byt
364. ne ID Sets the SNMP v3 engine ID for a remote device 3 37 Users Configures SNMP v3 users on this switch 3 37 Remote Users Configures SNMP v3 users from a remote device 3 38 Groups Configures SNMP v3 groups 3 39 Views Configures SNMP v3 views 3 42 Security 3 44 User Accounts Assigns a new password for the current user 3 44 Authentication Settings Configures authentication sequence RADIUS and TACACS 3 46 HTTPS Settings Configures secure HTTP settings 3 49 SSH 3 51 Settings Configures Secure Shell server settings 3 56 Host Key Settings Generates the host key pair public and private 3 54 Port Security Configures per port security including status response for 3 56 security breach and maximum allowed MAC addresses 802 1X Port authentication 3 57 Information Displays global configuration settings 3 59 Configuration Configures the global configuration setting 3 59 Port Configuration Sets parameters for individual ports 3 60 Statistics Displays protocol statistics for the selected port 3 63 ACL 3 64 Configuration Configures packet filtering based on IP or MAC addresses 3 64 Port Binding Binds a port to the specified ACL 3 71 IP Filter Sets IP addresses of clients allowed management access via 3 72 the web SNMP and Telnet Port 3 74 Port Information Displays port connection status 3 74 Trunk Information Displays trunk connection status 3 74 Port Configuration Configures port connection settings 3 76 Trunk Configuration Configures trunk connection
365. ne character Ctrl C Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt Ctrl E Shifts cursor to end of command line Ctrl F Shifts cursor to the right one character Ctrl K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line Ctrl L Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl N Enters the next command line in the history buffer Ctrl P Enters the last command Ctrl R Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl U Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line Ctrl W Deletes the last word typed Esc B Moves the cursor back one word Esc D Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word Delete key or backspace key Erases a mistake when entering a command Command Groups 4 Command Groups The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below Table 4 4 Command Groups Command Group Description Page Line Sets communication parameters for the serial port and Telnet 4 10 including baud rate and console time out General Basic commands for entering privileged access mode restarting the 4 19 system or quitting the CLI System Management Controls system logs system passwords user name browser 4 24 management options and a variety of other system information Flash File Manages code image or switch configuration files 4 64 Authentication Configures logon access using local or remot
366. ned by the snmp server group command page 4 108 Example Console config snmp server enable traps link up down Console config Related Commands snmp server host 4 102 snmp server engine id This command configures an identification string for the SNMPv3 engine Use the no form to restore the default Syntax snmp server engine id local remote ip address engineid string no snmp server engine id local remote ip address e local Specifies the SNMP engine on this switch remote Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device jp address The Internet address of the remote device engineid string String identifying the engine ID Range 10 64 hexadecimal characters Default Setting A unique engine ID is automatically generated by the switch based on its MAC address Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage An SNMP engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides either on this switch or on a remote device This engine protects against message replay delay and redirection The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPVv3 packets A remote engine ID is required when using SNMPv3 informs See snmp server host on page 4 102 The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host SNMP passwords are localized using the e
367. nfigured VLAN 1 4094 Up Time at Creation Time this VLAN was created i e System Up Time 8 Web Only 3 123 3 Configuring the Switch Status Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic GVRP Automatically learned via GVRP Permanent Added as a static entry Egress Ports Shows all the VLAN port members Untagged Ports Shows the untagged VLAN port members Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Current Table Select any ID from the scroll down list VLAN Current Table VLAN ID 1 Up Time at Creation 0 d 0 h 0 min 18 s Status Permanent Egress Ports Until Poni a Uniti Pon Uniti Pon3 Uniti Port4 Unit Uniti F Uniti Uniti Port8 Untagged Ports Figure 3 72 Displaying Current VLANs Command Attributes CLI VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes Type Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic Automatically learned via GVRP Static Added as a static entry Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets Ports Channel groups Shows the VLAN interface members 3 124 VLAN Configuration 3 CLI Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following command Console show vlan id 1 4 173 Vlan ID 2 Type Static Nam
368. nfigured in the source guard binding table An inbound packet s IP address sip option or both its IP address and corresponding MAC address sip mac option are checked against the binding table If no matching entry is found the packet is dropped Command Attributes Filter Type Configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based source IP address or source IP address and corresponding MAC address Default None e None Disables IP source guard filtering on the port SIP Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses stored in the binding table e SIP MAC Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses and corresponding MAC addresses stored in the binding table Web Click IP Source Guard Port Configuration a IP Source Guard Port Configuration J Port Filter Type 2 None ba 3 None 4 None Mi 5 None i 6 None 7 None v 8 None Nj J Figure 3 110 IP Source Guard Port Configuration 3 173 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example shows how to enable IP source guard on port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if ip source guard sip 4 219 Console config if end Console show ip source guard 4 222 Interface Filter type Eth 1 1 DISABLED Eth 1 2 DISABLED Eth 1 3 DISABLED Eth 1 4 DISABLED Eth 1 5 SIP Eth 1 6 DISABLED Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration Adds a static addresses to the source guard binding tabl
369. ng 802 1X Port Authentication Network switches can provide open and easy access to network resources by simply attaching a client PC Although this automatic configuration and access is a desirable feature it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily intrude and possibly gain access to sensitive network data The IEEE 802 1X dot1X standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Access to all switch ports in a network can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network 3 57 3 Configuring the Switch This switch uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs EAPOL ats to exchange authentication client protocol messages with the client and a remote RADIUS authentication server to verify user identity and access RADIUS rights When a client i e ch Supplicant connects to a switch port the switch i e Authenticator responds with an EAPOL identity request The client provides its identity such as a user name in an EAPOL response to the switch which it forwards to the RADIUS server The RADIUS server verifies the client identity and sends an access challenge back to the client The EAP packet from the RADIUS server contains not only the challenge but the authentication method to be used The cl
370. ng configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1 Console config ip igmp snooping version 1 Console config ip igmp snooping leave proxy This command enables IGMP leave proxy on the switch Use the no form to disable the feature Syntax no ip igmp snooping leave proxy Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The IGMP snooping leave proxy feature suppresses all unnecessary IGMP leave messages so that the non querier switch forwards an IGMP leave packet only when the last dynamic member port leaves a multicast group 4 202 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 The leave proxy feature does not function when a switch is set as the querier Example Console config ip igmp snooping leave proxy Console config ip igmp snooping immediate leave This command enables IGMP immediate leave for specific VLAN Use the no form to disable the feature for a VLAN Syntax no ip igmp snooping immediate leave Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage The IGMP snooping immediate leave feature enables a Layer 2 LAN interface to be removed from the multicast forwarding table without first sending an IGMP group specific query to the interface Upon receiving a group specific IGMPv2 leave message the switch immediately removes the interface from the Layer 2 forwarding table entry for that multicast group unless a multicast router was
371. ngine ID of the authoritative agent For informs the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent You therefore need to configure the remote agent s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it 4 105 4 Command Line Interface e Trailing zeroes need not be entered to uniquely specify a engine ID In other words the value 0123456789 is equivalent to 0123456789 followed by 22 zeroes A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch This is referred to as the default engine ID If the local engine ID is deleted or changed all SNMP users will be cleared You will need to reconfigure all existing users page 4 111 Example Console config snmp server engine id local 12345 Console config snmp server engineID remote 54321 192 168 1 19 Console config Related Commands snmp server host 4 102 show snmp engine id This command shows the SNMP engine ID Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows the default engine ID Console show snmp engine id Local SNMP engineID 8000002a8000000000e8666672 Local SNMP engineBoots 1 Remote SNMP engineID IP address 80000000030004e2b316c54321 192 168 1 19 Console Table 4 38 show snmp engine id display description Field Description Local SNMP enginelD String identifying the engine ID Local SNMP engineBoots The number of times that the engine has re initialized since the snm
372. nit 1 Port 5 Host Figure 3 77 Private VLAN Information CLI This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5 and secondary VLAN 6 Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped to VLAN 5 while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as a host ports and are associated with VLAN 6 This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3 Console show vlan private vlan 4 153 Primary Secondary Type Interfaces 5 primary Ethl 3 5 6 community Eth1 4 Eth1 5 Configuring Private VLANs The Private VLAN Configuration page is used to create remove primary community or isolated VLANs Command Attributes e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 2 4094 Type There are three types of private VLANs Primary VLANs Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports and to community ports within secondary or community VLANs Community VLANs Conveys traffic between community ports and to their promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN e Current Displays a list of the currently configured VLANs 3 133 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Configuration Enter the VLAN ID number select Primary Isolated or Community type then click Add To remove a private VLAN from the switch highlight an entry in the Current list box and then click Remove Note that all member ports must be removed from the VLAN before it can be deleted Private VLA
373. no spanning tree hello time time Time in seconds Range 1 10 seconds The maximum value is the lower of 10 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 2 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the time interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Example Console config spanning tree hello time 5 Console config Related Commands spanning tree forward time 4 144 spanning tree max age 4 145 4 145 4 Command Line Interface spanning tree max age This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree max age seconds no spanning tree max age seconds Time in seconds Range 6 40 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 6 or 2 x hello time 1 The maximum value is the lower of 40 or 2 x forward time 1 Default Setting 20 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the de
374. nstallation Guide To connect a terminal to the console port complete the following steps 1 Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal or a PC running terminal emulation software and tighten the captive retaining screws on the DB 9 connector 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RS 232 serial port on the switch 3 Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows Select the appropriate serial port COM port 1 or COM port 2 Set the baud rate to 9600 bps e Set the data format to 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity e Set flow control to none e Set the emulation mode to VT100 e When using HyperTerminal select Terminal keys not Windows keys Notes 1 Refer to Line Commands on page 4 10 for a complete description of console configuration options 2 Once you have set up the terminal correctly the console login screen will be displayed For a description of how to use the CLI see Using the Command Line Interface on page 4 1 For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed information on using the CLI refer to Command Groups on page 4 9 Basic Configuration 2 Remote Connections Prior to accessing the switch s onboard agent via a network connection you must first configure it with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using a console connection DHCP or BOOTP protocol The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To man
375. ntax enable password level eve 0 7 password no enable password level evel e level eve Level 15 for Privileged Exec Levels 0 14 are not used 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password password for this privilege level Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting e The default is level 15 The default password is super Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You cannot set a null password You will have to enter a password to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable command page 4 19 The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console config enable password level 15 0 admin Console config Related Commands enable 4 19 authentication enable 4 71 4 27 A Command Line Interface IP Filter Commands Table 4 11 IP Filter Commands Command Function Mode Page management Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access GC 4 28 show management Displays the switch to be monitored or configured from a PE 4 29 browser management This command specifies the
376. ntax authentication enable local radius tacacs no authentication enable e local Use local password only e radius Use RADIUS server password only tacacs Use TACACS server password Default Setting Local Command Mode Global Configuration 4 71 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage e RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet e RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server e You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter authentication enable radius tacacs local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted on the TACACS server If the TACACS server is not available the local user name and password is checked Example Console config authentication enable radius Console config Related Commands enable password sets the password for changing command modes 4 27 RADIUS Client Remote Authentication Dia
377. ntiseconds community string Password like community string sent with the notification operation to SNMP V1 and V2c hosts Although you can set this string using the snmp server host command by itself we recommend that you define this string using the snmp server community command prior to using the snmp server host command Maximum length 32 characters version Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP Version 1 2c or 3 traps Range 1 2c 3 Default 1 auth noauth priv This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication no authentication or with authentication and privacy See Simple Network Management Protocol on page 5 1 for further information about these authentication and encryption options port Host UDP port to use Range 1 65535 Default 162 SNMP Commands 4 Default Setting e Host Address None Notification Type Traps SNMP Version 1 UDP Port 162 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Ifyou do not enter an snmp server host command no notifications are sent In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server host command In order to enable multiple hosts you must issue a separate snmp server host command for each host The snmp server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp server enable traps command Use the snmp server enable traps command to enable the sending of traps or informs and to specify whi
378. ntity MIB RFC 2737 Ether like MIB RFC 2665 Extended Bridge MIB RFC 2674 Extensible SNMP Agents MIB RFC 2742 Forwarding Table MIB RFC 2096 IGMP MIB RFC 2933 Interface Group MIB RFC 2233 Interfaces Evolution MIB RFC 2863 IP Multicasting related MIBs MAU MIB RFC 2668 MIB Il RFC 1213 Port Access Entity MIB IEEE 802 1X Port Access Entity Equipment MIB Private MIB Quality of Service MIB RADIUS Authentication Client MIB RFC 2621 RMON MIB RFC 2819 RMON II Probe Configuration Group RFC 2021 partial implementation SNMPv2 IP MIB RFC 2011 SNMP Community MIB RFC 3584 SNMP Framework MIB RFC 3411 SNMP MPD MIB RFC 3412 SNMP Target MIB SNMP Notification MIB RFC 3413 SNMP User Based SM MIB RFC 3414 SNMP View Based ACM MIB RFC 3415 TACACS Authentication Client MIB TCP MIB RFC 2013 Trap RFC 1215 UDP MIB RFC 2012 A Software Specifications A 4 Appendix B Troubleshooting Problems Accessing the Management Interface Table B 1 Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Action Cannot connect using Telnet web browser or SNMP software Be sure the switch is powered up Check network cabling between the management station and the switch e Check that you have a valid network connection to the switch and that the port you are using has not been disabled Be sure you have configured the VLAN interface through which the management station is connected with a valid IP address
379. ntry is removed from the table Web Click DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping Binding Information DHCP Snooping Binding Information Store DHCP snooping binding entry to flash No Unit Port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address IP Address Type Lease Time Seconds Figure 3 109 DHCP Snooping Binding Information CLI This example shows how to display the DHCP Snooping binding table entries Console show ip dhcp snooping binding 4 230 MacAddress IpAddress Lease sec Type VLAN Interface 11 22 33 44 55 66 192 168 0 99 0 Dynamic 1 Eth 1 5 Console 3 172 IP Source Guard 3 IP Source Guard IP Source Guard is a security feature that filters IP traffic on network interfaces based on manually configured entries in the IP Source Guard table or static and dynamic entries in the DHCP Snooping table when enabled see DHCP Snooping on page 3 168 IP source guard can be used to prevent traffic attacks caused when a host tries to use the IP address of a neighbor to access the network This section describes commands used to configure IP Source Guard IP Source Guard Port Configuration IP Source Guard is used to filter traffic on an unsecure port which receives messages from outside the network or firewall and therefore may be subject to traffic attacks caused by a host trying to use the IP address of a neighbor When enabled traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping or static addresses co
380. nu list 3 4 panel display 3 3 ES3528M ES3552M E092006 MT R0O2 149100010700H
381. o this interface This parameter is determined by manual configuration or 3 108 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 by auto detection as described for Admin Link Type in STA Port Configuration on page 3 111 Oper Edge Port This parameter is initialized to the setting for Admin Edge Port in STA Port Configuration on page 3 111 i e true or false but will be set to false if a BPDU is received indicating that another bridge is attached to this port Port Role Roles are assigned according to whether the port is part of the active topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge i e root port connecting a LAN through the bridge to the root bridge i e designated port or is an alternate or backup port that may provide connectivity if other bridges bridge ports or LANs fail or are removed The role is set to disabled i e disabled port if a port has no role within the spanning tree Alternate port receives more R Root Port useful BPDUs from another N A Alternate Port bridge and is therefore not D Designated Port selected as the designated B Backup Port port R R A ii JD B X NS E ws Backup port receives more useful BPDUs from the same bridge and is therefore not selected as the designated R R port Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Information only These additional parameters are only displayed for
382. of host IP addresses allowed is five Example Console config logging host 10 1 0 3 Console config logging facility This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages Use the no form to return the type to the default Syntax no logging facility type type A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service Range 16 23 Default Setting 23 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See RFC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to store messages in the corresponding database Example Console config logging facility 19 Console config 4 45 4 Command Line Interface logging trap This command enables the logging of system messages to a remote server or limits the syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity Use this command without a specified level to enable remote logging Use the no form to disable remote logging Syntax logging trap evel no logging trap level One of the level arguments listed below Messages sent include the selected level up through level 0 Refer to the table on page 4 44 Default Setting Enabled e Level 6 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Using this
383. of the current Telnet session 3 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 4 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After entering the Telnet command the login screen displays Username admin Password CLI session with the ES3528M is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Vty O Note You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet Entering Commands 4 Entering Commands This section describes how to enter CLI commands Keywords and Arguments A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments Keywords identify a command and arguments specify configuration parameters For example in the command show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 show interfaces and status are keywords ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type and 1 5 specifies the unit port You can enter commands as follows To enter a simple command enter the command keyword To enter multiple commands enter each command in the required order For example to enable Privileged Exec command mode and display the startup configuration enter Console gt enable Console show startup config To enter commands that require parameters enter the required parameters after the command keyword For example to set a password for the administrator enter Console config username admin password 0 smith Minimum Abbreviation The CLI will accept
384. ole reload 4 22 Console Port Settings You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the switch s serial console port Management access through the console port is controlled by various parameters including a password timeouts and basic communication settings These parameters can be configured via the web or CLI interface Command Attributes Login Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session Range 0 300 seconds Default 0 seconds e Exec Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected If user input is not detected within the timeout interval the current session is terminated Range 0 65535 seconds Default 600 seconds e Password Threshold Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts When the logon attempt threshold is reached the 3 21 3 Configuring the Switch system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time set by the Silent Time parameter before allowing the next logon attempt Range 0 120 Default 3 attempts Silent Time Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts has been exceeded Range 0 65535 Default 0 e Data Bits Sets the number of dat
385. ommands login 4 11 password thresh 4 14 timeout login response This command sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI Use the no form to restore the default Syntax timeout login response seconds no timeout login response seconds Integer that specifies the timeout interval Range 0 300 seconds 0 disabled Default Setting e CLI Disabled 0 seconds e Telnet 600 seconds Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e Ifa login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting Example To set the timeout to two minutes enter this command Console config line timeout login response 120 Console config line Related Commands silent time 4 15 exec timeout 4 14 exec timeout This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected Use the no form to restore the default Syntax exec timeout seconds no exec timeout seconds Integer that specifies the number of seconds Range 0 65535 seconds 0 no timeout 4 13 4 Command Line Interface Default Setting CLI No timeout Telnet 10 minutes Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e If user input is detected
386. ommon multicast traffic such as television channels to be transmitted across a single network wide multicast VLAN shared by hosts residing in other standard or private VLAN groups while preserving security and data isolation for normal traffic System Defaults System Defaults 4 The switch s system defaults are provided in the configuration file Factory_Default_Config cfg To reset the switch defaults this file should be set as the startup configuration file page 3 19 The following table lists some of the basic system defaults Table 1 2 System Defaults Function Parameter Default Console Port Baud Rate 9600 Connection Data bits 8 Stop bits 1 Parity none Local Console Timeout 0 disabled Authentication Privileged Exec Level Username admin Password admin Normal Exec Level Username guest Password guest Enable Privileged Exec from Normal Exec Level Password super RADIUS Authentication Disabled TACACS Authentication Disabled 802 1X Port Authentication Disabled HTTPS Enabled SSH Disabled Port Security Disabled IP Filtering Disabled Web Management HTTP Server Enabled HTTP Port Number 80 HTTP Secure Server Enabled HTTP Secure Port Number 443 SNMP Community Strings public read only private read write Traps Authentication traps enabled Link up down events enabled
387. ompatible VLAN instance assignments Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes Changing modes stops all spanning tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode temporarily disrupting user traffic Command Attributes Basic Configuration of Global Settings Spanning Tree State Enables disables STA on this switch Default Enabled Spanning Tree Type Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D i e when this option is selected the switch will use RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w RSTP is the default MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC STP and RSTP BPDUs are transmitted as untagged frames and will cross any VLAN boundaries 3 105 3 Configuring the Switch address will then become the root device Note that lower numeric values indicate higher priority Default 32768 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Root Device Configuration Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root devi
388. on Configures information that uniquely identifies this switch 4 24 User Access Configures the basic user names and passwords for management access 4 25 IP Filter Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access 4 28 Web Server Enables management access via a web browser 4 30 Telnet Server Enables management access via Telnet 4 33 Secure Shell Provides secure replacement for Telnet 4 34 Event Logging Controls logging of error messages 4 43 Time System Clock Sets the system clock automatically via NTP SNTP server or manually 4 53 System Status Displays system configuration active managers and version information 4 57 Frame Size Enables support for jumbo frames 4 63 Device Designation Commands Table 4 8 Device Designation Commands Command Function Mode Page prompt Customizes the prompt used in PE and NE mode GC 4 24 hostname Specifies the host name for the switch GC 4 25 snmp server contact Sets the system contact string GC 4 101 snmp server location Sets the system location string GC 4 101 prompt This command customizes the CLI prompt Use the no form to restore the default prompt Syntax prompt string no prompt string Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting Console Command Mode Global Configuration 4 24 System Management Commands 4 Example Console config prompt RD2 RD2 config hostname This comman
389. one 225 0 0 3 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 4 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 5 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 6 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 7 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 8 INACTIVE None 225160049 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 10 INACTIVE None Console Configuring MVR Interface Status Each interface that participates in the MVR VLAN must be configured as an MVR source port or receiver port If only one subscriber attached to an interface is receiving multicast services you can enable the immediate leave function Command Usage One or more interfaces may be configured as MVR source ports e MVR receiver ports cannot be members of a trunk Receiver ports can belong to different VLANs but should not be configured as a member of the MVR VLAN IGMP snooping can be used to allow a source port or receiver port to dynamically join or leave multicast groups within the MVR VLAN using the standard rules for multicast filtering Multicast groups can also be statically assigned to a source port or receiver port see Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces on page 3 167 3 165 3 Configuring the Switch Immediate leave applies only to receiver ports When enabled the receiver port is immediately removed from the multicast group identified in the leave message When immediate leave is disabled the switch follows the standard rules by sending a group specific query to the receiver port and waiting for a response to determine if there are any
390. onfig file startup config tftp copy startup config file running config tftp copy tftp file running config startup config https certificate public key copy unit file e file Keyword that allows you to copy to from a file running config Keyword that allows you to copy to from the current running configuration startup config The configuration used for system initialization tftp Keyword that allows you to copy to from a TFTP server 4 64 Flash File Commands 4 https certificate Copies an HTTPS certificate from an TFTP server to the switch public key Keyword that allows you to copy a SSH key from a TFTP server Secure Shell Commands on page 4 34 unit Keyword that allows you to copy to from a unit Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command The destination file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files The maximum number of user defined configuration files depends on available memory You can use Factory_Default_Config cfg as the sou
391. onfig if clear counters This command clears statistics on an interface Syntax clear counters interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 52 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Default Setting None 4 120 Interface Commands 4 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Statistics are only initialized for a power reset This command sets the base value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management session However if you log out and back into the management interface the statistics displayed will show the absolute value accumulated since the last power reset Example The following example clears statistics on port 5 Console clear counters ethernet 1 5 Console show interfaces status This command displays the status for an interface Syntax show interfaces status interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 52 port channel channel id Range 1 8 e vlan vian id Range 1 4094 Default Setting Shows the status for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Displaying Connection Status on page 3 74 4 121 4 Command Line Interface Example Information of
392. onfiguring the Switch Web Select Security ACL Configuration Enter an ACL name in the Name field select the list type IP Standard IP Extended or MAC and click Add to open the configuration page for the new list ACL Configuration Type Name Remove Edit Name Type Standard Add Figure 3 42 Selecting ACL Type CLI This example creates a standard IP ACL named david Console config access list ip standard david 4 89 Console config std acl Configuring a Standard IP ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules Address Type Specifies the source IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any IP Address Source IP address e Subnet Mask A subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The mask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned 3 66 Access Control Lists 3 Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select
393. ons This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in full duplex mode Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Internal MAC Transmit Errors A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error Multiple Collision Frames A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision Carrier Sense Errors The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame SQE Test Errors A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sublayer for a particular interface Frames Too Long A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size Deferred Transmissions A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy Internal MAC Receive Errors A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error RMON Statistics Drop Events The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources Jabbers The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits
394. oon as it is powered on To automatically configure the switch by communicating with BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network complete the following steps 1 From the Global Configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 At the interface configuration mode prompt use one of the following commands To obtain IP settings via DHCP type ip address dhcp and press lt Enter gt To obtain IP settings via BOOTP type ip address bootp and press lt Enter gt 3 Type end to return to the Privileged Exec mode Press lt Enter gt 4 Type ip dhcp restart to begin broadcasting service requests Press lt Enter gt 2 Initial Configuration 5 Wait a few minutes and then check the IP configuration settings by typing the show ip interface command Press lt Enter gt 6 Then save your configuration changes by typing copy running config startup config Enter the startup file name and press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode User specified Console copy running config startup config Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success E
395. oot 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 Designated bridge 32768 0 0030F1552000 Fast forwarding disable Forward transitions 1 Admin edge port enable Oper edge port disable Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enable Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP You can configure the STA interface settings for an MST Instance using the MSTP Port Configuration and MSTP Trunk Configuration pages Field Attributes The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed e STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 108 for additional information 3 117 3 Configuring the Switch Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Configuration only The following interface attributes can be configured MST Instance ID Instance identifier to configure Default 0 Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the s
396. oot change notification evel 6 module 6 function 1 and event no evel 6 module 6 function 1 and event no VLAN 1 link up notification ram 01 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 change notification 01 0 evel 6 module 6 function 1 and event no Console SMTP Alert Commands These commands configure SMTP event handling and forwarding of alert messages to the specified SMTP servers and email recipients Table 4 21 SMTP Alert Commands Command Function Mode _ Page logging sendmail host SMTP servers to receive alert messages GC 4 49 logging sendmail level Severity threshold used to trigger alert messages GC 4 50 logging sendmail Email address used for From field of alert messages GC 4 51 source email logging sendmail Email recipients of alert messages GC 4 51 destination email logging sendmail Enables SMTP event handling GC 4 52 show logging sendmail Displays SMTP event handler settings NE PE 4 52 logging sendmail host This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages Use the no form to remove an SMTP server Syntax no logging sendmail host ip_address ip_address IP address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert messages for event handling Default Setting None 4 49 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing
397. or MSTI 1 and adds VLANs 1 5 to this MSTI Console Console Console Console config spanning tree mst configuration config mst mst 1 priority 4096 config mstp mst 1 vlan 1 5 config mst 3 114 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 CLI This example sets STA attributes for port 1 followed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree mst 2 Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enable disable enable Instance 2 Vlans configuration 2 Priority 4096 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 15 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 15 Max hops 20 Remaining hops 20 Designated Root 4096 2 0000E9313131 Current root port 0 Current root cost 0 Number of topology changes 0 Last topology changes time sec 646 Transmission limit 3 Path Cost Method long Admin status enable Role disable State discarding External path cost 10000 Internal path cost 10000 Priority 128 Designated cost 0 Designated port 128 7 Designated root 4096 2 0000E9313131 Designated bridge 4096 2 0000E9313131 Fast forwarding enable Forward transitions 0 Admin edge port enable Oper edge port enable Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enable Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP The MSTP Port Inf
398. or further information about these authentication and encryption options readview Defines the view for read access 1 64 characters writeview Defines the view for write access 1 64 characters notifyview Defines the view for notifications 1 64 characters SNMP Commands 4 Default Setting Default groups public16 read only private17 read write readview Every object belonging to the Internet OID space 1 3 6 1 writeview Nothing is defined notifyview Nothing is defined Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A group sets the access policy for the assigned users When authentication is selected the MD5 or SHA algorithm is used as specified in the snmp server user command When privacy is selected the DES 56 bit algorithm is used for data encryption For additional information on the notification messages supported by this switch see Supported Notification Messages on page 5 13 Also note that the authentication link up and link down messages are legacy traps and must therefore be enabled in conjunction with the snmp server enable traps command page 4 104 Example Console config snmp server group r amp d v3 auth write daily Console config 16 No view is defined 17 Maps to the defaultview 4 109 A Command Line Interface show snmp group Four default groups are provided SNMPv1 read only access and read write access and SNMPv2c read only access
399. or this switch is obtained via DHCP by default You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server when it is powered on You may also need to a establish a default gateway between this device and management stations or other devices that exist on another network segment Table 4 74 IP Interface Commands Command Function Mode Page ip address Sets the IP address for the current interface IC 4 215 ip default gateway Defines the default gateway through which this switch can reach GC 4 216 other subnetworks ip dhcp restart Submits a BOOTP or DHOP client request PE 4 217 show ip interface Displays the IP settings for this device PE 4 217 show ip redirects Displays the default gateway configured for this device PE 4 218 ping Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the NE 4 218 network PE ip address This command sets the IP address for the currently selected VLAN interface Use the no form to restore the default IP address Syntax ip address ip address netmask bootp dhcp no ip address jp address IP address e netmask Network mask for the associated IP subnet This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets bootp Obtains IP address from BOOTP e dhcp Obtains IP address from DHCP Default Setting DHCP Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage e You must
400. ord Default Setting Local 4 70 Authentication Commands 4 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server e You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter authentication login radius tacacs local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted on the TACACS server If the TACACS server is not available the local user name and password is checked Example Console config authentication login radius Console config Related Commands username for setting the local user names and passwords 4 26 authentication enable This command defines the authentication method and precedence to use when changing from Exec command mode to Privileged Exec command mode with the enable command see page 4 19 Use the no form to restore the default Sy
401. orized force unauthorized no dot1x port control auto Requires a dot1x aware connected client to be authorized by the RADIUS server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access force authorized Configures the port to grant access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise force unauthorized Configures the port to deny access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise Default force authorized Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1x port control auto Console config if 4 81 A Command Line Interface dot1x operation mode This command allows single or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1X authorized port Use the no form with no keywords to restore the default to single host Use the no form with the multi host max count keywords to restore the default maximum count Syntax dot1x operation mode single host multi host max count count no dot1x operation mode multi host max count e single host Allows only a single host to connect to this port multi host Allows multiple host to connect to this port max count Keyword for the maximum number of hosts count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port Range 1 1024 Default 5 Default Single host Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage e The max count parameter specified by t
402. ormation and MSTP Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the selected MST instance Command Attributes MST Instance ID Instance identifier to configure Default 0 Note The other attributes are described under Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 108 3 115 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP Port or Trunk Information Select the required MST instance to display the current spanning tree values MSTP Port Information MST Instance ID 0 z Port STA Forward Designated Designated Designated opor oper ppor Port Role Trunk Status Transitions Cost Bridge Port n g Member Cost Type Port 1 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 128 1 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 2 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 128 2 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 3 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 128 3 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 4 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 1284 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 5 Forwarding 1 0 32768 000035281003 128 5 100000 ree Enabled Designated 6 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 128 6 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 7 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 128 7 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 8 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 128 8 _ 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 9 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 128 9 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 10 Discarding 0 0 32768 000035281003 1
403. ort within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 11 4 208 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4 209 VLAN M cast Router Port Type 1 Eth 1711 Static Console Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and multicast service Command Attributes VLAN ID Selects the VLAN for which to display port members e Multicast IP Address The IP address for a specific multicast service Multicast Group Port List Shows the interfaces that have already been assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast service Web Click IGMP Snooping IP Multicast Registration Table Select a VLAN ID and the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll down lists The switch will display all the interfaces that are propagating this multicast service 3 159 3 Configuring the Switch IP Multicast Registration Table VLAN ID fi X Multicast IP Address 224 11 12 S Multicast Group Port List Unit Port User Figure 3 98 IP Multicast Registration Table CLI This example displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 along with the ports propagating the corresponding services The Type field shows if this entry was learned dynamically or was statically configured Console show bridge 1 multicast vlan 1 4 204 VLAN M cast IP addr Member p
404. orts Type 1 224 1 1 12 Eth1 12 USER 1 224 152 23 Eth1 12 IGMP Console Assigning Ports to Multicast Services Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query messages as described in Configuring IGMP snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 133 For certain applications that require tighter control you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the switch First add all the ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN group Command Usage e Static multicast addresses are never aged out e When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN Command Attributes Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router switch e Multicast IP The IP address for a specific multicast service e Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router switch 3 160 Multicast VLAN Registration 3 Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Member Port Table Specify the interface attached to a multicast service via an IGMP enabled switch or multicast router indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast service specify the multicast IP address and click Add After you have completed adding
405. ost key from RAM i e volatile memory to flash memory Otherwise the host key pair is stored to RAM by default Note that you must select this item prior to generating the host key pair e Generate This button is used to generate the host key pair Note that you must first generate the host key pair before you can enable the SSH server on the SSH Server Settings page e Clear This button clears the host key from both volatile memory RAM and non volatile memory Flash 3 54 User Authentication 3 Web Click Security SSH Host Key Settings Select the host key type from the drop down box select the option to save the host key from memory to flash if required prior to generating the key and then click Generate SSH Host Key Settings Public Key of Host Key IRSA DSA Host Key Type Both I Save Host Key from Memory to Flash Generate Clear Figure 3 36 SSH Host Key Settings CLI This example generates a host key pair using both the RSA and DSA algorithms stores the keys to flash memory and then displays the host s public keys Console ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 36 Console ip ssh save host key 4 36 Console show public key host 4 36 Host RSA 1024 65537 127250922544926402131336514546131189679055192360076028653006761 82409690947448320102524878965977592168322225584652387791546479807396314033 86925793105105765212243052807865885485789272602937866089236841423275912127 603259196
406. otocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Broadcast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent 3 94 Port Configuration 3 Table 3 10 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description Transmit Discarded Packets The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Transmit Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors The number of alignment errors missynchronized data packets Late Collisions The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet FCS Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check This count does not include frames received with frame too long or frame too short error Excessive Collisions A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisi
407. ou can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual aggregate link A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments where bottlenecks exist as well as providing a fault tolerant link between two devices You can create up to four trunks at a time The switch supports both static trunking and dynamic Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Static trunks have to be manually configured at both ends of the link and the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard On the other hand LACP configured ports can automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device You can configure any number of ports on the switch as LACP as long as they are not already configured as part of a static trunk If ports on another device are also configured as LACP the switch and the other device will negotiate a trunk link between them If an LACP trunk consists of more than eight ports all other ports will be placed in a standby mode Should one link in the trunk fail one of the standby ports will automatically be activated to replace it Command Usage Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk the other ports provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails However before making any physical connections between devices use the web interface or CLI to specify the trunk on the devices at both ends When using a port trunk take note of the
408. our router you can manually configure that interface to join all the current multicast groups Example The following shows how to configure port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 11 Console config show ip igmp snooping mrouter This command displays information on statically configured and dynamically learned multicast router ports Syntax show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan vian id vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 Default Setting Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Multicast router port types displayed include Static Example The following shows that port 11 in VLAN 1 is attached to a multicast router Console tshow ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 VLAN M cast Router Ports Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static 2 Eth 1 12 Static Console 4 209 4 Command Line Interface Multicast VLAN Registration Commands This section describes commands used to configure Multicast VLAN Registration MVR A single network wide VLAN can be used to transmit multicast traffic such as television channels across a service provider s network Any multicast traffic entering an MVR VLAN is sent to all subscribers This can significantly reduce to processing overhead required to dynamically monitor and establish the distribution tree for a normal multicast VLAN Also note that MVR maintains
409. ows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice e Flow Control Status Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or None e Autonegotiation Shows if auto negotiation is enabled or disabled e Media Type Media type used for the combo ports Options Coppper Forced SFP Forced or SFP Preferred Auto Default SFP Preferred Auto e Trunk Member Shows if port is a trunk member e Creation5 Shows if a trunk is manually configured or dynamically set via LACP 3 Port information only 4 Port information only 5 Trunk information only 3 74 Port Configuration 3 Web Click Port Port Information or Trunk Information Port Information PortNName Type Admin ger t oo Autonegotiation Media Type PLLA 1 Enabled Down Ohalf one Enabled one 2 ei Enabled Down Ohalf one Enabled one 3 RGS Enabled Down Ohalf lone Enabled one 4 es Enabled Down Ohalf one Enabled one 5 ee Enabled Up OOfull lone Enabled one 6 on Enabled Down Ohalf one Enabled one 7 eas Enabled Down Ohalf i one Enabled one 8 al Enabled Down Ohalf one Enabled one H Figure 3 48 Displaying Port Trunk Information Field Attributes CLI Basic Information Port type Indicates the port type 100BASE TX 1000BASE T or SFP MAC address The physical layer ad
410. p EnginelD was last configured Remote SNMP enginelD String identifying an engine ID on a remote device IP address IP address of the device containing the corresponding remote SNMP engine 4 106 SNMP Commands 4 snmp server view This command adds an SNMP view which controls user access to the MIB Use the no form to remove an SNMP view Syntax snmp server view view name oid tree included excluded no snmp server view view name view name Name of an SNMP view Range 1 64 characters oid tree Object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string Refer to the examples e included Defines an included view e excluded Defines an excluded view Default Setting defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Views are used in the snmp server group command to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree The predefined view defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree Examples This view includes MIB 2 Console config snmp server view mib 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 included Console config This view includes the MIB 2 interfaces table ifDescr The wild card is used to select all the index values in this table Console config snmp server view ifEntry 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 included Console config This view includes the
411. p file Press lt Enter gt Console tcopy running config startup config Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console Managing System Files 2 Managing System Files The switch s flash memory supports three types of system files that can be managed by the CLI program web interface or SNMP The switch s file system allows files to be uploaded and downloaded copied deleted and set as a start up file The three types of files are e Configuration This file stores system configuration information and is created when configuration settings are saved Saved configuration files can be selected as a system start up file or can be uploaded via TFTP to a server for backup A file named Factory_Default_Config cfg contains all the system default settings and cannot be deleted from the system See Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings on page 3 19 for more information Operation Code System software that is executed after boot up also known as run time code This code runs the switch operations and provides the CLI and web management interfaces See Managing Firmware on page 3 17 for more information Diagnostic Code Software that is run during system boot up also known as POST Power On Self Test Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files However you can have as
412. packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned Example This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 21 and another rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Related Commands access list ip 4 89 permit deny Extended ACL This command adds a rule to an Extended IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets with specific source or destination IP addresses protocol types or source or destination protocol ports Use the no form to remove a rule 4 90 Access Control List Commands 4 Syntax no permit deny protoco number udp any source address bitmask host source any destination address bitmask host destination source port sport end destination port dport end no permit deny tcp any source address bitmask host source any destination address bitmask host destination source port sport end destination port dport end protocol number A specific protocol number Range 0 255 source Source IP address destination Destination IP address address bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match host Keyword followed by a specific IP address e sport Protocol 4 source port number Range 0 65535 e dport Protocol 4 destination
413. ping Configuration DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration DHCP Snooping Port Configuration DHCP Snooping Binding Information IP Source Guard IP Source Guard Port Configuration Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Information Switch Clustering Cluster Configuration Cluster Member Configuration Cluster Member Information 3 138 3 139 3 139 3 139 3 140 3 142 3 142 3 143 3 144 3 144 3 144 3 145 3 146 3 147 3 147 3 150 3 153 3 154 3 154 3 155 3 156 3 157 3 158 3 159 3 160 3 161 3 162 3 163 3 164 3 165 3 167 3 168 3 169 3 169 3 170 3 171 3 172 3 173 3 173 3 174 3 175 3 176 3 177 3 178 3 178 Contents Cluster Candidate Information 3 179 Chapter 4 Command Line Interface 4 1 Using the Command Line Interface 4 1 Accessing the CLI 4 1 Console Connection 4 1 Telnet Connection 4 2 Entering Commands 4 3 Keywords and Arguments 4 3 Minimum Abbreviation 4 3 Command Completion 4 3 Getting Help on Commands 4 3 Showing Commands 4 4 Partial Keyword Lookup 4 5 Negating the Effect of Commands 4 5 Using Command History 4 5 Understanding Command Modes 4 5 Exec Commands 4 6 Configuration Commands 4 7 Command Line Processing 4 8 Command Groups 4 9 Line Commands 4 10 line 4 10 login 4 11 password 4 12 timeout login response 4 13 exec timeout 4 13 password thresh 4 14 silent time 4 15 databits 4 15 parity 4 16 speed 4 17 stopb
414. ply to the input traffic policy map name Name of the policy map for this interface Range 1 16 characters Default Setting No policy map is attached to an interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e You can only assign one policy map to an interface e You must first define a class map then define a policy map and finally use the service policy command to bind the policy map to the required interface Example This example applies a service policy to an ingress interface Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if service policy input rd_policy Console config if show class map This command displays the QoS class maps which define matching criteria used for classifying traffic Syntax show class map class map name class map name Name of the class map Range 1 16 characters Default Setting Displays all class maps Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 198 Quality of Service Commands 4 Example Console show class map Class Map match any rd_class 1 Match ip dscp 3 Class Map match any rd_class 2 Match ip precedence 5 Class Map match any rd_class 3 Match vlan 1 Console show policy map This command displays the QoS policy maps which define classification criteria for incoming traffic and may include policers for bandwidth limitations Syntax show policy map policy map name class class map name policy m
415. port number Range 0 65535 end Upper bound of the protocol port range Range 0 65535 Default Setting None Command Mode Extended ACL Command Usage All new rules are appended to the end of the list Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned Example This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through Console config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any Console config ext acl 14 Includes TCP UDP or other protocol types 4 91 4 Command Line Interface This allows TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e HTTP Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 Console config ext acl Related Commands access list ip 4 89 show ip access list This command displays the rules for configured IP ACLs Syntax show ip access list
416. ports to the member list click Apply IGMP Member Port Table IGMP Member Port List New Static IGMP Member Port VLAN 1 224 1 1 12 Unit 1 Port Interface Port VLAN ID 1 gt lt lt Add i Multicast IP emove Port 1 gt Trunk a Figure 3 99 IGMP Member Port Table CLI This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1 and then displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 1 1 12 ethernet 1 12 4 201 Console config exit Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 4 204 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 1 1 12 Eth1 12 USER 1 224 1 2 3 Eth1 12 IGMP Console Multicast VLAN Registration Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is a protocol that controls access to a single network wide VLAN most commonly used for transmitting multicast traffic such as television channels or video on demand across a service provider s network Any multicast traffic entering an MVR VLAN is sent to all attached subscribers This protocol can significantly reduce to processing overhead required to dynamically monitor and establish the distribution tree for a normal multicast VLAN This makes it possible to support common multicast services over a wide part of the network without having to use any multicast routing protocol MVR maintains the user isolation and data security provided by VLAN segregation by passing only multicast
417. pply Sets specified values to the system Help Links directly to webhelp Notes 1 To ensure proper screen refresh be sure that Internet Explorer 5 x is configured as follows Under the menu Tools Internet Options General Temporary Internet Files Settings the setting for item Check for newer versions of stored pages should be Every visit to the page 2 When using Internet Explorer 5 0 you may have to manually refresh the screen after making configuration changes by pressing the browser s refresh button Panel Display The web agent displays an image of the switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Active i e up or down Duplex i e half or full duplex or Flow Control i e with or without flow control Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Configuration page as described on page 3 76 Unit 1 Mode Active x Figure 3 2 Panel Display 3 Configuring the Switch Main Menu Using the onboard web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions The following table briefly describes the selections available from this program Table 3 2 Main Menu Menu Description Page System 3 10 System Information Provides basic system description including contact in
418. r Hardware version EPLD Version 4 04 Number of ports 28 Main power status Up Redundant power status Not present Agent master Unit ID 1 Loader version 0 0 0 5 Boot ROM version 0 0 0 8 Operation code version 0 0 1 2 Console 3 12 Basic Configuration 3 Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities The Bridge MIB includes extensions for managed devices that support Multicast Filtering Traffic Classes and Virtual LANs You can access these extensions to display default settings for the key variables Field Attributes Extended Multicast Filtering Services This switch does not support the filtering of individual multicast addresses based on GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol Traffic Classes This switch provides mapping of user priorities to multiple traffic classes Refer to Class of Service Configuration on page 3 139 Static Entry Individual Port This switch allows static filtering for unicast and multicast addresses Refer to Setting Static Addresses on page 3 98 e VLAN Learning This switch uses Shared VLAN Learning SVL where all VLANs share the same address table Configurable PVID Tagging This switch allows you to override the default Port VLAN ID PVID used in frame tags and egress status VLAN Tagged or Untagged on each port Refer to VLAN Configuration on page 3 119 e Local VLAN Capable This switch does not support multiple loca
419. r DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption e You must generate the host key before enabling the SSH server Example Console ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa Console configure Console config ip ssh server Console config Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 39 show ssh 4 41 4 36 System Management Commands 4 ip ssh timeout This command configures the timeout for the SSH server Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh timeout seconds no ip ssh timeout seconds The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation Range 1 120 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the client during the SSH negotiation phase Once an SSH session has been established the timeout for user input is controlled by the exec timeout command for vty sessions Example Console config ip ssh timeout 60 Console config Related Commands exec timeout 4 13 show ip ssh 4 40 ip ssh authentication retries This command configures the number of times the SSH server attempts to reauthenticate a user Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh authentication retries count no ip ssh authentication retries count The number of authentication attempts permitted after which the interface is reset Range 1 5
420. r interfaces including tagged 3 129 untagged or forbidden Port Configuration Specifies default PVID and VLAN attributes 3 130 Trunk Configuration Specifies default trunk VID and VLAN attributes 3 130 Private VLAN 3 131 Information Displays Private VLAN feature information 3 132 Configuration This page is used to create remove primary or community 3 133 VLANs Association Each community VLAN must be associated with a primary VLAN 3 134 Port Information Shows VLAN port type and associated primary or secondary 3 135 VLANs Port Configuration Sets the private VLAN interface type and associates the 3 136 interfaces with a private VLAN Trunk Information Shows VLAN port type and associated primary or secondary 3 135 VLANs Trunk Configuration Sets the private VLAN interface type and associates the 3 136 interfaces with a private VLAN Protocol VLAN 3 137 Configuration Configures protocol VLANs 3 137 Port Configuration Configures protocol VLAN port type and associated protocol 3 138 VLANs Priority 3 139 Default Port Priority Sets the default priority for each port 3 139 Default Trunk Priority Sets the default priority for each trunk 3 139 Traffic Classes Maps IEEE 802 1p priority tags to output queues 3 140 Traffic Classes Status Enables disables traffic class priorities not implemented 3 142 Queue Mode Sets queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round Robin 3 142 Queue Scheduling Configures Weighted Round Robin queueing 3 143 IP DSCP Priority Sta
421. r network You may also need to a establish a default gateway between the stack and management stations that exist on another network segment You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Command Attributes Management VLAN ID of the configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes By default all ports on the switch are members of VLAN 1 However the management station can be attached to a port belonging to any VLAN as long as that VLAN has been assigned an IP address IP Address Mode Specifies whether IP functionality is enabled via manual configuration Static Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or Boot Protocol BOOTP If DHCP BOOTP is enabled IP will not function until a reply has been received from the server Requests will be broadcast periodically by the switch for an IP address DHCP BOOTP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP Address Address of the VLAN interface that is allowed management access Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Default 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets Default 255 0 0 0 Gateway IP address IP address of the gatew
422. r the switch and click Apply 802 1X Configuration 802 1X System Authentication Control 7 Enabled Figure 3 39 802 1X Global Configuration CLI This example enables 802 1X globally for the switch Console config dotlx system auth control 4 80 Console config 3 59 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring Port Settings for 802 1X When 802 1X is enabled you need to configure the parameters for the authentication process that runs between the client and the switch i e authenticator as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication server These parameters are described in this section Command Attributes Port Port number Status Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port Default Disabled Operation Mode Allows single or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1X authorized port Options Single Host Multi Host Default Single Host Max Count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port when the Multi Host operation mode is selected Range 1 1024 Default 5 Mode Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options Auto Requires a dot1x aware client to be authorized by the authentication server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access Force Authorized Forces the port to grant access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise This is the
423. ration MVR include enabling or disabling MVR for the switch selecting the VLAN that will serve as the sole channel for common multicast streams supported by the service provider and assigning the multicast group address for each of these services to the MVR VLAN Command Attributes MVR Status When MVR is enabled on both the switch any multicast data associated an MVR group is sent from all designated source ports and to all 3 162 Multicast VLAN Registration 3 receiver ports that have registered to receive data from that multicast group Default Disabled MVR Running Status Indicates whether or not all necessary conditions in the MVR environment are satisfied MVR VLAN Identifier of the VLAN that serves as the channel for streaming multicast services using MVR Range 1 4094 Default 1 MVR Group IP IP address for an MVR multicast group The IP address range of 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 is used for multicast streams MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224 0 0 x Range 224 0 1 0 239 255 255 255 Default no groups are assigned to the MVR VLAN Count The number of contiguous MVR group addresses Range 1 255 Default 0 Web Click MVR Configuration Enable MVR globally on the switch select the MVR VLAN add the multicast groups that will stream traffic to attached hosts and then click Apply MVR Configuration IMVR Statu
424. ration status Up Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 1 Eth1 2 Console Enabling LACP on Selected Ports Command Usage To avoid creating a loop in the network be sure dynamically you enable LACP before connecting the ports enabled and also disconnect the ports before disabling aS LACP S SL T es active backup If the target switch has also enabled LACP onthe inks L iink connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically A trunk formed with another switch using LACP TAMMAT will automatically be assigned the next available configured trunk ID members If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails All ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex and auto negotiation Trunks dynamically established through LACP will also be shown in the Member List on the Trunk Membership menu see page 3 80 3 81 3 Configuring the Switch Command Attributes Member List Current Shows configured trunks Port e New Includes entry fields for creating new trunks Port Port identifier Range 1 52 Web Click Port LACP Configuration Select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to t
425. rce to copy from the factory default configuration file but you cannot use it as the destination To replace the startup configuration you must use startup config as the destination Use the copy file unit command to copy a local file to another switch in the stack Use the copy unit file command to copy a file from another switch in the stack The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the TFTP server You must follow the instructions in the release notes for new firmware or contact your distributor for help For information on specifying an https certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 50 For information on configuring the switch to use HTTPS for a secure connection see ip http secure server on page 4 31 4 65 A Command Line Interface Example The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on the TFTP server Console copy file tftp Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name startup TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Destination file name startup 01 TFTP completed Success Console The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup file Console tcopy running config file destination file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console The following example shows how to download a configuration file Consol
426. rd packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses e Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses The rules defining port status are A port on a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging device is always forwarding If two ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no other STA device attached to this segment the port with the smaller ID forwards packets and the other is discarding All ports are discarding when the switch is booted then some of them change state to learning and then to forwarding Forward Transitions The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state Designated Cost The cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the current Spanning Tree configuration The slower the media the higher the cost Designated Bridge The bridge priority and MAC address of the device through which this port must communicate to reach the root of the Spanning Tree Designated Port The port priority and number of the port on the designated bridging device through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Oper Link Type The operational point to point status of the LAN segment attached t
427. rd parameter or by passwords set up for specific user name accounts Default Local Web Click System Line Telnet Specify the connection parameters for Telnet access then click Apply Telnet Telnet Status IV Enabled Telnet Port Number es Login Timeout 0 300 300 _ secs 0 Disabled Exec Timeout 0 65535 600 secs 0 Disabled Password Threshold 0 120 B 0 Disabled Figure 3 15 Enabling Telnet 2 CLI only 3 24 Basic Configuration 3 CLI Enter Line Configuration mode for a virtual terminal then specify the connection parameters as required To display the current virtual terminal settings use the show line command from the Normal Exec level Console config line vty 4 10 Console config line login local 4 11 Console config line password 0 secret 4 12 Console config line timeout login response 300 4 13 Console config line exec timeout 600 4 13 Console config line password thresh 3 4 14 Console config line end Console show line 4 18 Console configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout Disabled Login timeout Disabled Silent time Disabled Baudrate 9600 Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 VTY configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout 600 sec Login timeout 300 sec Console Configuring Event Logging The switch allows you to control the logging of error messages including the type o
428. re 3 32 Access Levels CLI Assign a user name to access level 15 i e administrator then specify the password Console config username bob access level 15 4 26 Console config username bob password 0 smith Console config 3 45 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication Use the Authentication Settings menu to restrict management access based on specified user names and passwords You can manually configure access rights on the switch or you can use a remote access authentication server based on RADIUS or TACACS protocols Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS and Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS are logon Telnet authentication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware or RADIUS TACACS aware devices on the La ai network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the switch RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet console jai jai Talol a
429. re 3 75 VLAN Static Membership by Port CLI This example adds Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port and removes Port 3 from VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 114 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 tagged 4 171 Console config if switchport allowed vlan remove 2 3 129 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces You can configure VLAN behavior for specific interfaces including the default VLAN identifier PVID accepted frame types ingress filtering GVRP status and GARP timers Command Usage GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network GARP Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with GVRP registration deregistration Command Attributes PVID VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the interface Default 1 Ifan interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs the PVID must be defined first then the status of the VLAN can be confi
430. rectly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device This command has the same effect as the spanning tree portfast Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree edge port Console config if Related Commands spanning tree portfast 4 154 spanning tree portfast This command sets an interface to fast forwarding Use the no form to disable fast forwarding Syntax no spanning tree portfast Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 154 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Command Usage e This command is used to enable disable the fast spanning tree mode for the selected port In this mode ports skip the Discarding and Learning states and proceed straight to Forwarding Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can be passed through the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by standard convergence time Fast forwarding
431. red rule e An ACL can contain up to 32 rules Example Console config access list mac jerry Console config mac acl1 Related Commands permit deny 4 94 mac access group 4 96 show mac access list 4 96 permit deny MAC ACL This command adds a rule to a MAC ACL The rule filters packets matching a specified MAC source or destination address i e physical layer address or Ethernet protocol type Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask Note The default is for Ethernet II packets no permit deny tagged eth2 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask 4 94 Access Control List Commands 4 no permit deny untagged eth2 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask no permit deny tagged 802 3 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask no permit deny untagged 802 3 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask tagged eth2 Tagged Ethernet II packets
432. regate link i e the ports on the attached device The command attributes have the same meaning as those used for the port actor However configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Web Click Port LACP Aggregation Port Set the System Priority Admin Key and Port Priority for the Port Actor You can optionally configure these settings for the Port Partner Be aware that these settings only affect the administrative state of the partner and will not take effect until the next time an aggregate link is formed with this device After you have completed setting the port LACP parameters click Apply Aggregation Port Set Port Actor Port System Priority Admin Key Port Priority 065535 065535 0 65535 1 fB ha hze 2 B f pze 3 Bb fa pze _ ale fa pee s E ha es elb ha zs 7e ho fpe a P o prse s E ha e r Figure 3 52 LACP Port Configuration 3 84 Port Configuration 3 CLI The following example configures LACP parameters for ports 1 4 Ports 1 4 are used as active members of the LAG Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 114 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 4 131 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 4 132 Console config if lacp actor port priority 128 4 134 Console config
433. remaining subscribers for that multicast group before removing the port from the group list Using immediate leave can speed up leave latency but should only be enabled on a port attached to one multicast subscriber to avoid disrupting services to other group members attached to the same interface Note that immediate leave does not apply to multicast groups which have been statically assigned to a port Command Attributes MVR Type The following interface types are supported Source An uplink port that can send and receive multicast data for the groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Receiver A subscriber port that can receive multicast data sent through the MVR VLAN Non MVR An interface that does not participate in the MVR VLAN This is the default type Immediate Leave Configures the switch to immediately remove an interface from a multicast stream as soon as it receives a leave message for that group e Trunk 3 Shows if port is a trunk member Web Click MVR Port or Trunk Configuration MVR Port Configuration Port MVR Type Immediate Leave Trunk 1 NomMVR m Enabled 2 Non MVR m Enabled 3 NonMVR M Enabled 4 NomMVR m Enabled 5 Non MVR m Enabled 6 Non MVR m Enabled 7 NonMVR m Enabled 8 Non MVA m Enabled 9 Non MVR m Enabled Figure 3 103 MVR Port Configuration 1
434. ress to the switch complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 Type ip address ijp address netmask where ip address is the switch IP address and netmask is the network mask for the network Press lt Enter gt 3 Type exit to return to the global configuration mode prompt Press lt Enter gt 4 Tosetthe IP address of the default gateway for the network to which the switch belongs type ip default gateway gateway where gateway is the IP address of the default gateway Press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 192 168 1 254 Console config Dynamic Configuration If you select the bootp or dhcp option IP will be enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received You therefore need to use the ip dhcp restart command to start broadcasting service requests Requests will be sent periodically in an effort to obtain IP configuration information BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway If the bootp or dhcp option is saved to the startup config file step 6 then the switch will start broadcasting service requests as s
435. rface Syntax show dot1x statistics interface interface e statistics Displays dot1x status for each port e interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 52 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the following information e Global 802 1X Parameters Shows whether or not 802 1X port authentication is globally enabled on the switch 802 1X Port Summary Displays the port access control parameters for each interface including the following items Status Administrative state for port access control Operation Mode Dot1x port control operation mode page 4 82 Mode Dot1x port control mode page 4 81 Authorized Authorization status yes or n a not authorized 4 85 4 Command Line Interface 4 86 802 1X Port Details Displays the port access control parameters for each interface including the following items reauth enabled Periodic re authentication page 4 83 reauth period Time after which a connected client must be re authenticated page 4 84 quiet period Time a port waits after Max Request Count is exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client page 4 83 tx period Time a port waits during authentication session before re transmitting EAP packet page 4 84 supplicant timeout Supplicant timeout server timeout Server timeout reauth max
436. ries to flash memory Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command can be used to store the currently learned dynamic DHCP snooping entries to flash memory These entries will be restored to the snooping table when the switch is reset However note that the lease time shown for a dynamic entry that has been restored from flash memory will no longer be valid Example Console config ip dhcp snooping database flash Console config show ip dhcp snooping This command shows the DHCP snooping configuration settings Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip dhcp snooping Global DHCP Snooping status disable DHCP Snooping is configured on the following VLANs 1 Verify Source Mac Address enable Interface Trusted Eth 1 1 No Eth 1 2 No Eth 1 3 No Eth 1 4 No Eth 1 5 Yes 4 229 4 Command Line Interface show ip dhcp snooping binding This command shows the DHCP snooping binding table entries Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip dhcp snooping binding MacAddress IpAddress Lease sec Type VLAN Interface 11 22 33 44 55 66 192 168 0 99 0 Static 1 Eth 1 5 Console Switch Cluster Commands Switch Clustering is a method of grouping switches together to enable centralized management through a single unit A switch cluster has a Commander unit that is used to manage all other Member switches in the cluster The managemen
437. riority LACP system priority assigned to this port channel LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group Admin State Administrative or operational values of the actor s state parameters Oper State Expired The actor s receive machine is in the expired state Defaulted The actor s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information administratively configured for the partner Distributing If false distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Collecting Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled i e collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Synchronization The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC i e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted Aggregation The system considers this link to be aggregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation Long timeout Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate LACP Activity Activity
438. rity Note that when the Path Cost Method is set to short the maximum path cost is 65 535 e Range Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 Default Ethernet Half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 e Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media This is the default setting Admin Edge Port Fast Forwarding You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Po
439. rity queues for each port It uses Weighted Round Robin to prevent head of queue blockage The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used e Ifthe output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Command Attributes Default Priority9 The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on the specified interface Range 0 7 Default 0 Number of Egress Traffic Classes The number of queue buffers provided for each port 9 CLI displays this information as Priority for untagged traffic 3 139 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Priority Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority Modify the default priority for any interface then click Apply Default Port Priority Port Default Priority 0 7 Number of Egress Traffic Classes Trunk 1 4 Ss OO OH Bl wl ny PHP HEH He Bele ele K Figure 3 84 Port Priority Configuration CLI This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 114 Console config if switchport priority default 5 4 184 Console config if end Console show inter
440. rked for different kinds of forwarding All switches or routers that access the Internet rely on class information to provide the same forwarding treatment to packets in the same class Class information can be assigned by end hosts or switches or routers along the path Priority can then be assigned based on a general policy or a detailed examination of the packet However note that detailed examination of packets should take place close to the network edge so that core switches and routers are not overloaded Switches and routers along the path can use class information to prioritize the resources allocated to different traffic classes The manner in which an individual device handles traffic in the DiffServ architecture is called per hop behavior All devices along a path should be configured in a consistent manner to construct a consistent end to end QoS solution Notes 1 You can configure up to 16 rules per Class Map You can also include multiple classes in a Policy Map 3 146 Quality of Service 3 2 You should create a Class Map before creating a Policy Map Otherwise you will not be able to select a Class Map from the Policy Rule Settings screen see page 3 152 Configuring Quality of Service Parameters To create a service policy for a specific category or ingress traffic follow these steps 1 Use the Class Map to designate a class name for a specific category of traffic 2 Edit the rules for each class to specif
441. rks The standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for authentication IEEE 802 3ac Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging IEEE 802 3x Defines Ethernet frame start stop requests and timers used for flow control on full duplex links Now incorporated in IEEE 802 3 2002 Glossary 2 Glossary IGMP Snooping Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members IGMP Query On each subnetwork one IGMP capable device will act as the querier that is the device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they already belong The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP address in the subnetwork Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast services If there is more than one multicast switch router on a given subnetwork one of the devices is made the querier and assumes responsibility for keeping track of group membership In Band Management Management of the network from a station attached directly to the network IP Multicast Filtering A process whereby
442. rmation Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Configuration only The following interface attributes can be configured e Spanning Tree Enables disables STA on this interface Default Enabled e Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree 3 111 3 Configuring the Switch Protocol is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Default 128 e Range 0 240 in steps of 16 e Path Cost This parameter is used by the STP to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port prio
443. rnet 1 1 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged Console config if Related Commands switchport mode 4 168 switchport ingress filtering This command enables ingress filtering for an interface Note Although the ingress filtering command is available the switch has ingress filtering permanently set to enable Therefore trying to disable the filtering with the no switchport ingress filtering command will produce this error message Note Failed to ingress filtering on ethernet interface Syntax switchport ingress filtering no switchport ingress filtering Default Setting Enabled 4 169 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames e With ingress filtering enabled a port will discard received frames tagged for VLANs for it which it is not a member e Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STA However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP Example The following example shows how to select port 1 and then enable ingress filtering Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport ingress filtering Console config if switchport native vlan This command configures the PVID i e default VLAN ID for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport native vl
444. roups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN 3 119 3 Configuring the Switch This switch supports the following VLAN features Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard e Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging and GVRP protocol e Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs End stations can belong to multiple VLANs e Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices e Priority tagging Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to partic
445. rs with a cryptographic key and encrypt data connections between management clients and the switch Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management services Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time Protocol NTP server Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers Spanning Tree Algorithm STA A technology that checks your network for any loops A loop can often occur in complicated or backup linked network systems Spanning Tree detects and directs data along the shortest available path maximizing the performance and efficiency of the network Telnet Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCPIIP Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS TACACS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS compliant devices on the network Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol and IP as the network layer protocol Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP A TCP IP protocol commonly used for software downloads User Datagram Protocol UDP UDP provides a datagram mode for packet switched comm
446. rt authentication 3 57 3 64 port priority configuring 3 139 4 183 4 191 default ingress 3 139 4 184 STA 3 109 4 153 port security configuring 3 56 4 78 port statistics 3 94 4 122 ports autonegotiation 3 77 4 116 broadcast storm threshold 3 90 4 120 capabilities 3 77 4 117 duplex mode 3 77 4 115 flow control 3 77 4 118 speed 3 77 4 115 ports configuring 3 74 4 114 ports mirroring 3 92 4 125 primary VLAN 3 132 priority default port ingress 3 139 4 184 private VLANs configuring 3 132 4 174 problems troubleshooting B 1 promiscuous ports 3 131 4 174 protocol migration 3 112 4 158 PVLAN association 3 134 community ports 3 131 4 174 interface configuration 3 136 3 137 3 138 isolated ports 3 131 4 174 primary VLAN 3 132 promiscuous ports 3 131 4 174 Q QoS 3 146 4 191 Quality of Service See QoS queue weights 3 143 4 185 R RADIUS logon authentication 4 72 rate limits setting 3 93 4 127 remote logging 4 46 restarting the system 3 30 4 22 RSTP 3 101 4 143 global configuration 3 102 4 143 S secure shell 3 51 4 34 configuration 3 51 4 37 serial port configuring 4 10 Index Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP SNMP 3 33 community string 3 33 3 37 3 38 3 39 3 42 4 100 enabling traps 3 34 4 104 filtering IP addresses 3 72 trap manager 3 34 4 102 software displaying version 3 11 4 62 downloading 3 18 4 64 Spanning Tree Protocol See STA specifications
447. rt should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device Default Disabled e Migration If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the Protocol Migration button to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format RSTP or STP compatible to send on the selected interfaces Default Disabled 3 112 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required attributes then click Apply STA Port Configuration Port Spanning Tree STA State g om ta cone u Mjekesi Admin Link Type sa jesena ber Migration Trunk 1 F Enabled Forwarding fi 28 fiooooo Auto z I Enabled I Enabled 2 F Enabled Discarding fize fiooo00 fAuto Z F Enabled I Enabled 3 F Enabled Discarding fi2e fioooo0 Auo F Enabled I Enabled 4 F Enabled Discarding i28 fiooooo fAuto Z enabled I Enabled 5 F Enabled Discarding fize fiooooo Auto z I Enabled I Enabled 6 F Enabled Discarding 128 fiooooo Auto ZI F Enabled F Enabled a Figure 3 66 Configuring Spanning Tree per Port CLI This example sets STA attributes for port 7 Console config interface ethernet 1 7 4 114 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 4 153 Console config if spanning tree co
448. rt_number RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 timeout Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 65535 e retransmit Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server Range 1 30 e key Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting auth port 1812 timeout 5 seconds retransmit 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server 1 host 192 168 1 20 auth port 181 timeout 10 retransmit 5 key green Console config radius server port This command sets the RADIUS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server port port_number no radius server port port_number RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 1812 4 73 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server port 181 Console config radius server key This command sets the RADIUS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server key key_string no radius server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters
449. s 0 Disabled Password Threshold 0 120 3 0 Disabled Silent Time 0 65535 0 secs 0 Disabled Data Bits a gt Parity None x Speed awe ial Stop Bits PE Figure 3 14 Console Port Settings 1 CLI only 3 22 Basic Configuration 3 CLI Enter Line Configuration mode for the console then specify the connection parameters as required To display the current console port settings use the show line command from the Normal Exec level Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso e config line e show line VTY configuration Password threshold Interactive timeout 600 sec Login timeout Console console login local password 0 secret timeout login response 0 exec timeout 0 password thresh 3 silent time 60 databits 8 parity none speed 19200 stopbits 1 end Console configuration Password threshold Interactive timeout Disabled Login timeout Silent time Baudrate Databits Parity Stopbits 3 times Disabled 60 19200 8 none 3 times 300 sec 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 17 Telnet Settings You can access the onboard configuration program over the network using Telnet i e a virtual terminal Management access via Telnet can be enabled disabled and other various parameters set including the TCP port number timeouts and a password These parameters can be configured
450. s C Enabled MVR Running Status False IMVR VLAN fs MVR Group IP List Current New lt lt Add MVR Group IP C Remove Count O none Figure 3 100 MVR Global Configuration CLI This example first enables IGMP snooping enables MVR globally and then configures a range of MVR group addresses Console config ip igmp snooping 4 201 Console config mvr 4 210 Console config mvr group 228 1 23 1 10 4 210 Console config Displaying MVR Interface Status You can display information about the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN Field Attributes Type Shows the MVR port type 3 163 3 Configuring the Switch e Oper Status Shows the link status e MVR Status Shows the MVR status MVR status for source ports is ACTIVE if MVR is globally enabled on the switch MVR status for receiver ports is ACTIVE only if there are subscribers receiving multicast traffic from one of the MVR groups or a multicast group has been statically assigned to an interface Immediate Leave Shows if immediate leave is enabled or disabled e Trunk Member 2 Shows if port is a trunk member Web Click MVR Port or Trunk Information Port Information Port Type Oper Status MVR Status Immediate Leave Trunk Member 1 Non MVR Down inactive Disabled 2 Non MVR Down inactive Disabled 3 Non MVR Do
451. s administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 Console config if lacp admin key Port Channel This command configures a port channel s LACP administration key string Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner admin key key no lacp actor partner admin key key The port channel admin key is used to identify a specific link aggregation group LAG during local LACP setup on this switch Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Port Channel Command Usage e Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if 1 the LACP system priority matches 2 the LACP port admin key matches and 3 the LACP port channel key matches if configured e Ifthe port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group Note that when the LAG is no longer used the port channel admin key is reset to 0 Example Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if lacp actor admin key 3 Console config if 4 133 4 Command Line Interface
452. s that will receive logging GC 4 45 messages logging facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages GC 4 45 logging trap Limits syslog messages saved to a remote server based on GC 4 46 severity clear logging Clears messages from the logging buffer PE 4 46 show logging Displays the state of logging PE 4 47 show log Displays log messages PE 4 48 logging on This command controls logging of error messages sending debug or error messages to switch memory The no form disables the logging process Syntax no logging on Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory You can use the logging history command to control the type of error messages that are stored Example Console config logging on Console config Related Commands logging history 4 44 clear logging 4 46 4 43 4 Command Line Interface logging history This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level Syntax logging history flash ram evel no logging history flash ram flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset level One of the levels listed below Messages sent include the selected level
453. sabled all DHCP packets are forwarded If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received all DHCP packets are forwarded for a trusted port If the received packet is a DHCP ACK message a dynamic DHCP snooping entry is also added to the binding table If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received but the port is not trusted it is processed as follows Ifthe DHCP packet is a reply packet from a DHCP server including OFFER ACK or NAK messages the packet is dropped Ifthe DHCP packet is from a client such as a DECLINE or RELEASE message the switch forwards the packet only if the corresponding entry is found in the binding table Ifthe DHCP packet is from a client such as a DISCOVER REQUEST INFORM DECLINE or RELEASE message the packet is forwarded if MAC address verification is disabled However if MAC address verification is enabled then the packet will only be forwarded if the client s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet is the same as the source MAC address in the Ethernet header Ifthe DHCP packet is not a recognizable type it is dropped Ifa DHCP packet from a client passes the filtering criteria above it will only be forwarded to trusted ports in the same VLAN Ifa DHCP packet is from server is received on a trusted port it will be forwarded to both trusted and untrusted ports in the same VLAN
454. se the policy map command to specify the name of the policy map and then use the class command to configure policies for traffic that matches criteria defined in a class map A policy map can contain multiple class statements that can be applied to the same interface with the service policy command page 4 198 e You must create a Class Map page 4 194 before assigning it to a Policy Map 4 194 Quality of Service Commands 4 Example This example creates a policy called rd_policy uses the class command to specify the previously defined rd_class uses the set command to classify the service that incoming packets will receive and then uses the police command to limit the average bandwidth to 100 000 Kbps the burst rate to 1522 bytes and configure the response to drop any violating packets Console config policy map rd_policy Console config pmap class rd_class Console config pmap c set ip dscp 3 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522 exceed action drop Console config pmap c class This command defines a traffic classification upon which a policy can act and enters Policy Map Class configuration mode Use the no form to delete a class map and return to Policy Map configuration mode Syntax no class class map name class map name Name of the class map Range 1 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Policy Map Configuration Command Usage Use the policy map comma
455. seconds depending on network traffic Destination does not respond If the host does not respond a timeout appears in ten seconds Destination unreachable The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreachable Network or host unreachable The gateway found no corresponding entry in the route table e Press lt Esc gt to stop pinging 4 218 IP Source Guard Commands 4 Example Console ping 10 1 0 9 Type ESC to abort PING to 10 1 0 9 by 5 32 byte payload ICMP packets timeout is 5 seconds response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms Ping statistics for 10 1 0 9 5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 100 0 packets lost 0 Approximate round trip times Minimum 10 ms Maximum 20 ms Average 10 ms Console Related Commands interface 4 114 IP Source Guard Commands IP Source Guard is a security feature that filters IP traffic on network interfaces based on manually configured entries in the IP Source Guard table or static and dynamic entries in the DHCP Snooping table when enabled see DHCP Snooping Commands on page 4 223 IP source guard can be used to prevent traffic attacks caused when a host tries to use the IP address of a neighbor to access the network This section describes commands used to configure IP Source Guard Table 4 75 IP Source Guard Commands Command
456. service via the web interface if the current address is still available CLI Enter the following command to restart DHCP service Console ip dhcp restart 4 217 Console Enabling Jumbo Frames You can enable jumbo frames to support data packets up to 9000 bytes in size Command Attributes Jumbo Packet Status Check the box to enable jumbo frames Web Click System Jumbo Frames Jumbo Frames Jumbo Packet Status l Enabled Figure 3 8 Bridge Extension Configuration CLI Enter the following command Console tconfig Console config jumbo frame Console config Managing Firmware You can upload download firmware to or from a TFTP server or copy files to and from switch units in a stack By saving runtime code to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore operation You can also set the switch to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version You must specify the method of file transfer along with the file type and file names as required Command Attributes File Transfer Method The firmware copy operation includes these options file to file Copies a file within the switch directory assigning it a new name file to tftp Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server tftp to file Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch e TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server e File Type
457. signed to the MVR VLAN Example The following shows the global MVR settings Console show mvr MVR Status enable MVR running status TRUE MVR multicast vlan 1 MVR Max Multicast Groups 255 MVR Current multicast groups 10 Console Table 4 71 show mvr display description Field Description MVR Status Shows if MVR is globally enabled on the switch MVR running status Indicates whether or not all necessary conditions in the MVR environment are satisfied MVR multicast vian Shows the VLAN used to transport all MVR multicast traffic MVR Max Multicast Groups Shows the maximum number of multicast groups which can assigned to the MVR VLAN MVR Current multicast groups Shows the number of multicast groups currently assigned to the MVR VLAN 4 213 4 Command Line Interface The following displays information about the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN Console show mvr interface Port Type Status Immediate Leave eth1 1 SOURCE ACTIVE UP Disable eth1 2 RECEIVER ACTIVE UP Disable eth1 5 RECEIVER INACTIVE DOWN Disable eth1 6 RECEIVER INACTIVE DOWN Disable eth1 7 RECEIVER INACTIVE DOWN Disable Console Table 4 72 show mvr interface display description Field Description Port Shows interfaces attached to the MVR Type Shows the MVR port type Status Shows the MVR status and interface status MVR status for source ports is ACTIVE if MVR is globally enabled on
458. software A 1 SSH configuring 3 51 4 37 STA 3 101 4 142 edge port 3 110 3 112 4 154 global settings configuring 3 105 4 143 4 148 global settings displaying 3 102 4 158 interface settings 3 108 4 152 4 158 4 159 linktype 3 110 3 112 3 114 3 116 3 119 4 155 path cost 3 103 3 109 4 152 path cost method 3 106 4 147 port priority 3 109 4 153 protocol migration 3 112 4 158 transmission limit 3 106 4 148 standards IEEE A 2 startup files creating 3 20 displaying 3 18 4 57 setting 3 18 4 69 static addresses setting 3 98 4 138 statistics port 3 94 4 122 STP 3 105 4 143 STP Also see STA system clock setting 3 31 4 53 system logs 3 25 system software downloading from server 3 18 T TACACS logon authentication 3 46 4 76 Index 3 index time setting 3 31 4 53 traffic class weights 3 143 4 185 trap manager 2 7 3 34 4 102 troubleshooting B 1 trunk configuration 3 79 4 128 LACP 3 81 4 130 static 3 80 4 129 U upgrading software 3 18 user password 3 44 4 26 4 27 3 129 4 171 creating 3 125 4 166 description 3 119 3 139 displaying basic information 3 123 4 162 displaying port members 3 123 4 173 egress mode 3 130 4 168 interface configuration 3 130 4 169 4 172 private 3 131 3 137 4 174 protocol 4 180 V VLANs 3 119 3 139 4 161 adding static members 3 126 Index 4 Web interface access requirements 3 1 configuration buttons 3 3 home page 3 2 me
459. source guard binding the packet will be forwarded Ifthe DHCP snooping is enabled IP source guard will check the VLAN ID source IP address port number and source MAC address for the sip mac option If a matching entry is found in the binding table and the entry type is static IP source guard binding static DHCP snooping binding or dynamic DHCP snooping binding the packet will be forwarded If IP source guard if enabled on an interface for which IP source bindings dynamically learned via DHCP snooping or manually configured are not IP Source Guard Commands 4 yet configured the switch will drop all IP traffic on that port except for DHCP packets Example This example enables IP source guard on port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if ip source guard sip Console config if Related Commands ip source guard binding 4 221 ip dhcp snooping 4 223 ip dhcp snooping vlan 4 225 ip source guard binding This command adds a static address to the source guard binding table Use the no form to remove a static entry Syntax ip source guard binding mac address vlan vlan id ip address interface ethernet unit port no ip source guard binding mac address vlan vian id mac address A valid unicast MAC address e vian id ID of a configured VLAN Range 1 4094 jp address A valid unicast IP address including classful types A B or C e unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port
460. st 50 4 152 Console config if spanning tree link type auto 4 155 Console config if no spanning tree edge port 4 154 Console config if Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance This provides multiple pathways across the network thereby balancing the traffic load preventing wide scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree MST Instance 0 that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region This switch supports up to 65 instances You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network However remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region page 3 133 with the same set of instances and the same instance on each bridge with the same set of VLANs Also note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree To use multiple spanning trees 1 Set the spanning tree type to MSTP STA Configuration page 3 130 2 Enter the spanning tree priority for the selected MST instance MSTP VLAN Configuration 3 Add the VLANs that will share this MSTI MSTP VLAN Configuration Note All VLANs are automatically added to the IST Instance 0 To ensure that the MSTI maintains connectivity across the network you
461. st vlan 1 igmp snooping VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type Console 4 204 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 Table 4 68 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping querier Allows this device to act as the querier for IGMP snooping GC 4 205 ip igmp snooping Configures the query count GC 4 205 query count ip igmp snooping Configures the query interval GC 4 206 query interval ip igmp snooping Configures the report delay GC 4 207 query max response time ip igmp snooping Configures the query timeout GC 4 207 router port expire time ip igmp snooping querier This command enables the switch as an IGMP querier Use the no form to disable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping querier Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If enabled the switch will serve as querier if elected The querier is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Example Console config ip igmp snooping querier Console config ip igmp snooping query count This command configures the query count Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query count count no ip igmp snooping query count count The maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Rang
462. standard extended acl_name standard Specifies a standard IP ACL extended Specifies an extended IP ACL acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access list standard IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 0 0 255 255 255 0 Console Related Commands permit deny 4 90 ip access group 4 92 ip access group This command binds a port to an IP ACL Use the no form to remove the port Syntax no ip access group acl_name in acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet 4 92 Access Control List Commands 4 Command Usage A port can only be bound to one ACL Ifa port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding with the new one e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port Example Console config int eth 1 25 Console config if ip access group david in Console config if Related Commands show ip access list 4 92 show ip access group This command shows the ports assigned to IP ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access group Interface ethernet 1 25 IP access list david in Console
463. stem Console show s Negating the Effect of Commands For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword no to cancel the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value For example the logging command will log system messages to a host server To disable logging specify the no logging command This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands Using Command History The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered You can scroll back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key Any command displayed in the history list can be executed again or first modified and then executed Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed commands Understanding Command Modes The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes Exec commands generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters Configuration commands on the other hand modify interface parameters or enable certain switching functions These classes are further divided into different modes Available commands depend on the selected mode You can always enter a question mark at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the A Command Line Interface current mode The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the following table Table 4 1 Command Modes Class Mode Exec Normal
464. structure can easily isolate some of the group members MSTP an extension of RSTP is designed to support independent spanning trees based on VLAN groups Once you specify the VLANs to include in a Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI the protocol will automatically build an MSTI tree to maintain connectivity among each of the VLANs MSTP maintains contact with the global network because each instance is treated as an RSTP node in the Common Spanning Tree CST Displaying Global Settings You can display a summary of the current bridge STA information that applies to the entire switch using the STA Information screen Field Attributes Spanning Tree State Shows if the switch is enabled to participate in an STA compliant network Bridge ID A unique identifier for this bridge consisting of the bridge priority and MAC address where the address is taken from the switch system Max Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals 3 102 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports
465. subscribed to this service A 7 i r a k This switch uses IGMP Internet Group J Management Protocol to query for any attached 7 r hosts that want to receive a specific multicast a AN fo service It identifies the ports containing hosts LJ VSI KD XD requesting to join the service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service This procedure is called multicast filtering The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network s performance so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing multicast group hosts or multicast routers switches instead of flooding traffic to all ports in the subnet VLAN Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query IGMP Snooping and Query If multicast routing is not supported on other switches in your network you can use IGMP Snooping and Query page 3 155 to monitor IGMP service requests passing between multicast clients and servers and dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic Static IGMP Router Interface If IGMP snooping cannot locate the IGMP querier you can manually designate a known IGMP querier i e a multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface on your switch page 3 158 This interface will then join all the current multicast groups supported by t
466. switches when they become Members and are used for communication between Member switches and the Commander Switch clusters are limited to a single IP subnet Layer 2 domain A switch can only be a Member of one cluster Configured switch clusters are maintained across power resets and network changes Example Console config cluster Console config cluster commander This command enables the switch as a cluster Commander Use the no form to disable the switch as cluster Commander Syntax no cluster commander Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Once a switch has been configured to be a cluster Commander it automatically discovers other cluster enabled switches in the network These Candidate switches only become cluster Members when manually selected by the administrator through the management station Cluster Member switches can be managed through only using a Telnet connection 4 231 4 Command Line Interface to the Commander From the Commander CLI prompt use the recommand id command to connect to the Member switch Example Console config cluster commander Console config cluster ip pool This command sets the cluster IP address pool Use the no form to reset to the default address Syntax cluster ip pool lt ip address gt no cluster ip pool ip address The base IP address for IP addresses assigned to cluster Me
467. t Command Attributes Interface Port or Trunk indentifier e Protocol Group ID Protocol Group ID assigned to the Protocol VLAN Group Range 1 2147483647 e VLAN ID VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded Range 1 4094 Web Click VLAN Protocol VLAN Port Configuration Protocol VLAN Port Configuration lintertace amp Port Mal C Trunk Query Current New none lt lt Add Protocol Group ID 1 2147483647 Remove VLAN ID 1 4094 Figure 3 83 Protocol VLAN Port Configuration 3 138 Class of Service Configuration 3 Class of Service Configuration Class of Service CoS allows you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with four priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface and configure the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Layer 2 Queue Settings Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch All untagged packets entering the switch are tagged with the specified default port priority and then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at the output port Command Usage e This switch provides four prio
468. t Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage 4 118 Flow control can eliminate frame loss by blocking traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill When enabled back pressure is used for half duplex operation and IEEE 802 3x for full duplex operation To force flow control on or off with the flowcontrol or no flowcontrol command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To enable flow control under auto negotiation flowcontrol must be included in the capabilities list for any port Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub Interface Commands 4 Example The following example enables flow control on port 5 config interface ethernet 1 5 config if flowcontrol config if no negotiation config if Console Console Console Console Related Commands negotiation 4 116 capabilities flowcontrol symmetric 4 117 shutdown This command disables an interface To restart a disabled interface use the no form Syntax no shutdown Default Setting All interfa
469. t and sending a trap message To use port security specify a maximum number of addresses to allow on the port and then let the switch dynamically learn the lt source MAC address VLAN gt pair for frames received on the port Note that you can also manually add secure addresses to the port using the Static Address Table page 3 98 When the port has reached the maximum number of MAC addresses the selected port will stop learning The MAC addresses already in the address table will be retained and will not age out Any other device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the switch Command Usage A secure port has the following restrictions It cannot use port monitoring It cannot be a multi VLAN port It cannot be used as a member of a static or dynamic trunk It should not be connected to a network interconnection device The default maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a secure port is Zero You must configure a maximum address count from 1 1024 for the port to allow access e Ifa port is disabled shut down due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled from the Port Port Configuration page page 3 76 Command Attributes e Port Port number Name Descriptive text page 4 115 Action Indicates the action to be taken when a port security violation is detected None No action should be taken This is the default Trap Send an SNMP trap message Shutdown
470. t native vlan Configures the PVID native VLAN of an interface IC 4 170 switchport allowed vlan Configures the VLANs associated with an interface IC 4 171 switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4 163 switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface IC 4 172 switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames IC 4 18 4 interface vlan This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs which is used to configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface Syntax interface vlan vlan id vlan id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 167 4 Command Line Interface Example The following example shows how to set the interface configuration mode to VLAN 1 and then assign an IP address to the VLAN Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 254 255 255 255 0 Console config if Related Commands shutdown 4 119 switchport mode This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport mode trunk hybrid private vlan no switchport mode trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN Note that frames belonging to the port s de
471. t pass packets e State CLI Enables or disables the specified VLAN Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets Add Adds a new VLAN group to the current list Remove Removes a VLAN group from the current list If any port is assigned to this group as untagged it will be reassigned to VLAN group 1 as untagged 3 125 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static List To create a new VLAN enter the VLAN ID and VLAN name mark the Enable checkbox to activate the VLAN and then click Add VLAN Static List Current New VLAN ID 1 4094 j2 1 DefaultVien Enabled Add VLAN Name R amp D Remove Status F Enabled Figure 3 73 Configuring a VLAN Static List CLI This example creates a new VLAN Console config vlan database 4 165 Console config vlan vlan 2 name R amp D media ethernet state active 4 166 Console config vlan end Console show vlan 4 173 Vlan ID 1 Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port channel Eth1 1 S Eth1 2 S Eth1 3 S Eth1 4 S Eth1 5 S Eth1 6 S Eth1 7 S Eth1 8 S Eth1l 9 S Eth1 10 S Eth1 11 S Eth1 12 S Eth1 13 S Eth1 14 S Eth1 15 s Eth1 16 S Eth1 17 S Eth1 18 S Eth1 19 S Eth1 20 Ss Eth1 21 S Eth1 22 S Eth1 23 S Eth1 24 S Eth1 25 Ss Eth1 26 S Eth1 27 S Eth1 28 S Eth1 29 S Eth1 30 S Eth1 31 S Eth1 32 S Eth1 33 S Eth1 34 S Et
472. t station uses Telnet to communicate directly with the Commander throught its IP address and the Commander manages Member switches using cluster internal IP addresses There can be up to 36 Member switches in one cluster Cluster switches are limited to within a single IP subnet Table 4 77 Switch Cluster Commands Command Function Mode _ Page cluster Configures clustering on the switch GC 4 23 1 cluster commander Configures the switch as a cluster Commander GC 4 23 il cluster ip pool Sets the cluster IP address pool for Members GC 4 23 2 cluster member Sets Candidate switches as cluster members GC 4 23 2 rcommand Provides configuration access to Member switches GC 4 233 show cluster Displays the switch clustering status PE 4 234 show cluster members Displays current cluster Members PE 4 23 4 show cluster candidates Displays current cluster Candidates in the network PE 4 23 4 4 230 Switch Cluster Commands 4 cluster This command enables clustering on the switch Use the no form to disable clustering Syntax no cluster Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage To create a switch cluster first be sure that clustering is enabled on the switch the default is enabled then set the switch as a Cluster Commander Set a Cluster IP Pool that does not conflict with any other IP subnets in the network Cluster IP addresses are assigned to
473. t the appropriate policy map from the scroll down box Web Click QoS DiffServ Service Policy Settings Check Enabled and choose a Policy Map for a port from the scroll down box then click Apply Service Policy Settings Ports Ingress C Enabled Policy E D Enabled Policy E D Enabled Policy A D Enabled Policy _ E Il Enabled Policy E C Enabled Policy E T Enabled Policy _ E T Enabled Policy E C Enabled Policy E m rankina Inan aed i Figure 3 93 Service Policy Settings CLI This example applies a service policy to an ingress interface Console config interface ethernet 1 5 4 120 Console config if service policy input rd_policy 3 4 203 Console config if 3 153 3 Configuring the Switch Multicast Filtering Multicasting is used to support real time Unicast applications such as videoconferencing or J Flow streaming audio A multicast server does not have S to establish a separate connection with each la eX client It merely broadcasts its service to the LA QJ network and any hosts that want to receive the multicast register with their local multicast switch a N a router Although this approach reduces the a A ar network overhead required by a multicast server the broadcast traffic must be carefully pruned at every multicast switch router it passes through to 5N ao ensure that traffic is only passed on to the hosts Bi which
474. tartup config show running config show system show users show version Frame Size Commands jumbo frame Flash File Commands copy delete dir whichboot boot system Authentication Commands Authentication Sequence authentication login authentication enable RADIUS Client radius server host radius server port radius server key radius server retransmit radius server timeout show radius server TACACS Client tacacs server host tacacs server port tacacs server key show tacacs server Port Security Commands port security 802 1X Port Authentication dot1x system auth control dot1x default dot1x max req Contents 4 52 4 53 4 53 4 54 4 55 4 55 4 56 4 56 4 57 4 57 4 57 4 59 4 61 4 61 4 62 4 63 4 63 4 64 4 64 4 67 4 68 4 69 4 69 4 70 4 70 4 70 4 71 4 72 4 73 4 73 4 74 4 74 4 75 4 75 4 76 4 76 4 76 4 77 4 77 4 78 4 78 4 79 4 80 4 80 4 81 vii Contents dot1x port control 4 81 dot1x operation mode 4 82 dot1x re authenticate 4 82 dot1x re authentication 4 83 dot1x timeout quiet period 4 83 dot1x timeout re authperiod 4 84 dot1x timeout tx period 4 84 show dot1x 4 85 Access Control List Commands 4 88 IP ACLs 4 89 access list ip 4 89 permit deny Standard ACL 4 90 permit deny Extended ACL 4 90 show ip access list 4 92 ip access group 4 92 show ip access group 4 93 MAC ACLs 4 93 access list mac 4 94 permit deny MAC ACL 4 94 show mac access list 4 96 mac access group 4 96 show mac a
475. tatic Address Counts 00 E0 29 94 34 DE VLAN 1 Unit 1 Port 1 Permanent Current Static Address Table Interface Port 1 z Trunk x MAC Address ee VLAN 1 gt Add Static Address Remove Static Address Figure 3 60 Configuring a Static Address Table CLI This example adds an address to the static address table but sets it to be deleted when the switch is reset Console config mac address table static 00 12 cf 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset 4 138 Console config Displaying the Address Table The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the source address for traffic entering the switch When the destination address for inbound traffic is found in the database the packets intended for that address are forwarded directly to the associated port Otherwise the traffic is flooded to all ports Command Attributes e Interface Indicates a port or trunk MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface e VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Address Table Sort Key You can sort the information displayed based on MAC address VLAN or interface port or trunk Dynamic Address Counts The number of addresses dynamically learned e Current Dynamic Address Table Lists all the dynamic addresses 3 99 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Address Table Dynamic Addresses Specify the search type i e
476. tatic Members to VLANs Port Index 3 129 Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces 3 130 Private VLANs 3 131 Displaying Current Private VLANs 3 132 Configuring Private VLANs 3 133 Associating VLANs 3 134 Displaying Private VLAN Interface Information 3 135 Configuring Private VLAN Interfaces 3 136 Protocol VLANs 3 137 Protocol VLAN Group Configuration 3 137 Contents Configuring Protocol VLAN Interfaces Class of Service Configuration Layer 2 Queue Settings Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues Enabling CoS Selecting the Queue Mode Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes Layer 3 4 Priority Settings Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values Enabling IP DSCP Priority Mapping DSCP Priority Quality of Service Configuring Quality of Service Parameters Configuring a Class Map Creating QoS Policies Attaching a Policy Map to Ingress Queues Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters Enabling IGMP Immediate Leave Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services Assigning Ports to Multicast Services Multicast VLAN Registration Configuring Global MVR Settings Displaying MVR Interface Status Displaying Port Members of Multicast Groups Configuring MVR Interface Status Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces DHCP Snooping DHCP Snoo
477. tatus vlan Displays status for the specified VLAN interface NE PE 4 121 show interfaces switchport ee the administrative and operational status ofan NE PE 4 123 interface show vlan This command shows VLAN information Syntax show vlan id vian id name vian name private vlan private vian type e id Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID vian id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vian name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters private vlan For an explanation of this command see show vlan private vlan on page 4 179 private vlan type Indicates the private vlan type Options Community Isolated Primary Default Setting Shows all VLANs Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1 Console show vlan id 1 Vian ID Type Name Status Ports Port channel Console 1 Static DefaultVlan Active Eth1 1 S Eth1 2 S Eth1 3 S Eth1 4 S Eth1 5 S Eth1 9 S Eth1 10 S Eth1 14 S Eth1 15 S Eth1 19 S Eth1 20 S Eth1 24 S Eth1 25 S Eth1 6 S Eth1 7 S Eth1 11 S Eth1 12 S Eth1 16 S Eth1 17 S Eth1 21 S Eth1 22 S Eth1 26 S Eth1 8 S Eth1 13 S Eth1 18 S Eth1 23 S 4 173 4 Command Line Interface Configuring Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based securi
478. tch Enabling CoS Enable or disable Class of Service CoS Command Attributes e Traffic Classes Click to enable Class of Service Default Enabled Web Click Priority Traffic Classes Status Traffic Classes Status Traffic Classes M Enabled Figure 3 86 Enable Traffic Classes Selecting the Queue Mode You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Command Attributes WRR Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1 2 4 8 for queues 0 through 3 respectively This is the default selection Strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues 3 142 Class of Service Configuration 3 Web Click Priority Queue Mode Select Strict or WRR then click Apply Queue Mode Queue Mode WRR z Figure 3 87 Queue Mode CLI The following sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode
479. tch are the same the interface with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree Where more than one interface is assigned the highest priority the interface with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 port priority 0 Console config if Related Commands spanning tree mst cost 4 156 4 157 4 Command Line Interface spanning tree protocol migration This command re checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interface Syntax spanning tree protocol migration interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 50 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the spanning tree protocol migration command at any time to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interfaces i e RSTP or STP compatible Example Console spanning tree protocol migration eth 1 5 Console show spanning tree This command shows the configuration for the common spanning tree CST or for an instance within the
480. te 0 after UTC if SNMP server community private rw SNMP server community public ro 1 username admin access level 15 username admin password 7 21232 297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3 username guest access level 0 username guest password 7 084e0343a0486f 05530df6c705c8bb4 enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7alf 783edd 27d254ca 1 logging history ram 6 logging history flash 3 1 1 vlan database vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active f 1 interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 interface VLAN 1 IP address DHCP 1 no map IP DSCP 1 line console 1 line vty 1 end Console Related Commands show startup config 4 57 4 60 System Management Commands 4 show system This command displays system information Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage For a description of the items shown by this command refer to Displaying System Information on page 3 10 The POST results should all display PASS If any POST test indicates FAIL contact your distributor for assistance Example Console show system System Description ES3528M System OID String 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 94 System Information System Up Time 0 days 0 hours 1 minutes and 32 18 seconds System Name NONE System Location NONE System Contact NONE MAC Address Unit1 00 00 35 28 10 03 Web Ser
481. te a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one rule to the list To remove a rule use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule e An ACL can contain up to 100 rules Example Console config access list ip standard david Console config std acl 4 89 4 Command Line Interface Related Commands permit deny 4 90 ip access group 4 92 show ip access list 4 92 permit deny Standard ACL This command adds a rule to a Standard IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets emanating from the specified source Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny any source bitmask host source any Any source IP address source Source IP address bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match host Keyword followed by a specific IP address Default Setting None Command Mode Standard ACL Command Usage e New rules are appended to the end of the list e Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with the address for each IP
482. te that one or more class maps can be assigned to a policy map Command Attributes Class Map Modify Name and Description Configures the name and a brief description of a class map Range 1 16 characters for the name 1 64 characters for the description Edit Rules Opens the Match Class Settings page for the selected class entry Modify the criteria used to classify ingress traffic on this page 3 147 3 Configuring the Switch Add Class Opens the Class Configuration page Enter a class name and description on this page and click Add to open the Match Class Settings page Enter the criteria used to classify ingress traffic on this page Remove Class Removes the selected class Class Configuration Class Name Name of the class map Range 1 16 characters Type Only one match command is permitted per class map so the match any field refers to the criteria specified by the lone match command Description A brief description of a class map Range 1 64 characters Add Adds the specified class Back Returns to previous page with making any changes Match Class Settings Class Name List of class maps ACL List Name of an access control list Any type of ACL can be specified including standard or extended IP ACLs and MAC ACLs Range 1 16 characters IP DSCP A DSCP value Range 0 63 IP Precedence An IP Precedence value Range 0 7 VLAN A V
483. ted Commands silent time 4 15 timeout login response 4 13 silent time This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command Use the no form to remove the silent time value Syntax silent time seconds no silent time seconds The number of seconds to disable console response Range 0 65535 0 no silent time Default Setting The default value is no silent time Command Mode Line Configuration Example To set the silent time to 60 seconds enter this command Console config line silent time 60 Console config line Related Commands password thresh 4 14 databits This command sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax databits 7 8 no databits 7 Seven data bits per character 8 Eight data bits per character Default Setting 8 data bits per character 4 15 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from devices that generate 7 data bits with parity If parity is being generated specify 7 data bits per character If no parity is required specify 8 data bits per character Example To specify 7 data bits enter this command Console config li
484. ted Commands snmp server location 4 101 snmp server location This command sets the system location string Use the no form to remove the location string Syntax snmp server location text no snmp server location text String that describes the system location Maximum length 255 characters 4 101 4 Command Line Interface Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server location WC 19 Console config Related Commands snmp server contact 4 101 snmp server host This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management Protocol notification operation Use the no form to remove the specified host Syntax snmp server host host addr inform retry retries timeout seconds community string version 1 2c 3 auth noauth priv udp port port no snmp server host host addr 4 102 host addr Internet address of the host the targeted recipient Maximum host addresses 5 trap destination IP address entries inform Notifications are sent as inform messages Note that this option is only available for version 2c and 3 hosts Default traps are used retries The maximum number of times to resend an inform message if the recipient does not acknowledge receipt Range 0 255 Default 3 seconds The number of seconds to wait for an acknowledgment before resending an inform message Range 0 2147483647 centiseconds Default 1500 ce
485. tem ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol Partner Admin Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner Port Number Partner Oper Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port s protocol Port Number partner Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner Admin State Administrative values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Oper State Operational values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Console show lacp sysid System Priority Port Channel System MAC Address 1 32768 00 12 CF 8F 2C A7 2 32768 00 12 CF 8F 2C A7 3 32768 00 12 CF 8F 2C A7 4 32768 00 12 CF 8F 2C A7 Console Table 4 50 show lacp sysid display description Field Description Channel group A link aggregation group configured on this switch System Priority LACP system priority for this channel group System MAC Address System MAC address The LACP system priority and system MAC address are concatenated to form the LAG system ID 4 137 4 Command Line Interface Address Table Commands These com
486. ternal MAC Receive Errors LO Lolo oO lojo RMON Statistics Drop Events O Jabbers 0 Received Bytes 188155 Collisions 0 Received Frames 064 Bytes Frames 2249 Broadcast Frames 4765 127 Bytes Frames 459 Multicast Frames 2672 128 255 Bytes Frames 11 CRC Alignment Errors 0 256 511 Bytes Frames 0 Undersize Frames 0 512 1023 Bytes Frames 0 Oversize Frames 0 1024 1518 Bytes Frames 0 Fragments 0 Refresh Figure 3 59 Port Statistics 3 97 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example shows statistics for port 13 Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 13 4 122 Ethernet 1 13 Iftable stats Octets input 868453 Octets output 3492122 Unicast input 7315 Unitcast output 6658 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 17027 Broadcast input 231 Broadcast output 7 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 4422579 Packets 31552 Broadcast pkts 238 Multi cast pkts 17033 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors
487. the Startup Code Figure 3 11 Deleting Files Figure 3 12 Downloading Configuration Settings for Startup Figure 3 13 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings Figure 3 14 Console Port Settings Figure 3 15 Enabling Telnet Figure 3 16 Displaying Logs Figure 3 17 System Logs Figure 3 18 Remote Logs Figure 3 19 Enabling and Configuring SMTP Figure 3 20 Resetting the System Figure 3 21 SNTP Configuration Figure 3 22 Setting the System Clock Figure 3 23 Configuring SNMP Community Strings Figure 3 24 Configuring IP Trap Managers Figure 3 25 Enabling SNMP Agent Status Figure 3 26 Setting an Engine ID Figure 3 27 Setting a Remote Engine ID Figure 3 28 Configuring SNMPv3 Users Figure 3 29 Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users Figure 3 30 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups Figure 3 31 Configuring SNMPv3 Views Figure 3 32 Access Levels Figure 3 33 Authentication Settings Figure 3 34 HTTPS Settings Figure 3 35 SSH Server Settings Figure 3 36 SSH Host Key Settings Figure 3 37 Configuring Port Security Figure 3 38 802 1X Global Information Figure 3 39 802 1X Global Configuration Figure 3 40 802 1X Port Configuration Figure 3 41 Displaying 802 1X Port Statistics Figure 3 42 Selecting ACL Type 3 3 3 10 3 12 3 13 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 18 3 19 3 20 3 21 3 22 3 24 3 25 3 27 3 28 3 29 3 30 3 31 3 32 3 34 3 35 3 35 3 36 3 37 3 38 3 39 3 42 3 43 3 45 3 48 3 50 3 53 3 55 3 57 3 59 3 59 3 61 3 64 3 66 xix Figures Fig
488. then subsequently mapped to the four hardware priority queues This command sets the IP DSCP priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map IP DSCP value 1 to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip dscp 1 cos 0 Console config if show map ip dscp This command shows the IP DSCP priority map Syntax show map ip dscp interface interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 52 port channel channel id Range 1 8 4 190 Quality of Service Commands 4 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 DSCP mapping status disabled Port DSCP COS Eth 1 1 0 0 Eth 1 1 1 0 Eth 1 1 2 0 Eth 1 1 3 0 Console Related Commands map ip dscp Global Configuration 4 189 map ip dscp Interface Configuration 4 189 Quality of Service Commands The commands described in this section are used to configure Differentiated Services DiffServ classification criteria and service policies You can classify traffic based on access lists IP Precedence or DSCP values or VLANs Using access lists allows you select traffic based on Layer 2 Layer 3 or Layer 4 information contained in each packet Table 4 65 Quality of Service Commands Command Function Mode Page class map Creates a class map for a
489. this switch can pass multicast traffic along to participating hosts Layer 2 Data Link layer in the ISO 7 Layer Data Communications Protocol This is related directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addresses Link Aggregation See Port Trunk Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device Management Information Base MIB An acronym for Management Information Base It is a set of database objects that contains information about a specific device MD5 Message Digest Algorithm An algorithm that is used to create digital signatures It is intended for use with 32 bit machines and is safer than the MD4 algorithm which has been broken MD5 is a one way hash function meaning that it takes a message and converts it into a fixed string of digits also called a message digest Glossary 3 Glossary Multicast Switching A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for which no attached host has registered or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast VLAN group Network Time Protocol NTP NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network The time servers operate in a hierarchical master slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio
490. ticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Note The local switch user database has to be set up by manually entering user names and passwords using the CLI See username on page 4 26 3 47 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Security Authentication Settings To configure local or remote authentication preferences specify the authentication sequence i e one to three methods fill in the parameters for RADIUS or TACACS authentication if selected and click Apply Authentication Settings Authentication Local gt RADIUS Settings Global Sererindex C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 Server Port Number 1 65535 haz Secret Text String Number of Sewer Transmits 1 30 eR i Timeout for a reply 1 6555 S eg TACACS Settings Server IP Address homin Server Port Number 1 65535 9 Secret Text String Do Figure 3 33 Authentication Settings CLI Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication Console config authentication login radius 4 70 Console config radius server port 181 4 73 Console config radius server key green 4 74 Console config radius server retransmit 5 4 74 Console config radius server timeout 10 4 75 Console config radius server 1 host 192 168 1 25 4 73 Console config end Console show radius server 4 75 Remote RADIUS server configuration Global settings Communic
491. tination port and mirror mode i e RX TX Example The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 rx Console config if end Console show port monitor Port Mirroring Destination port listen port Eth1 11 Source port monitored port Eth1 6 Mode RX Console 4 126 Rate Limit Commands 4 Rate Limit Commands This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into the network Packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped Table 4 45 Rate Limit Commands Command Function Mode Page rate limit Configures the maximum input rate for a port IC 4 127 rate limit Use this command to define the rate limit level for a specific interface Use this command without specifying a rate to restore the default rate limit level Use the no form to restore the default status of disabled Syntax rate limit lt input output gt rate no rate limit lt input output gt input Input rate limit output Input rate
492. tion 802 1X Port Configuration Port Status Operation Mode Me Re authon Max on Peed Rauh Te Period Authorized Supplicant Trunk 1 Disabled Sro ronz F Enabie m fo pew P ves oo 00 00 000000 2 Disabled SrgieHost z F Enable fo fo 00 00 00 00 00 00 13 Disabled SrgieHost E Z F Enable E f fo a 00 00 00 00 00 00 a Davies Sngieron 3 2 F Enatie fe f0 eo fo 00 00 00 00 00 00 ls Deadia Snge Fost E F F Enae foo fo a 00 00 00 00 00 00 6 g jc fe a 00 00 00 00 00 00 Disabled Single Host z F feo fo 00 00 00 00 00 00 a po oD fo 00 00 00 00 00 00 Disables eee rk feo fo 00 00 00 00 00 00 110 Disabled Segeron a F Enable a h f 00 00 0 0 00 00 11 Disabled 11 abled ergeren F Enatie E m po po 00 0 00 00 00 00 112 Disables Single Host a F Enable E m feo fo 00 00 00 00 00 00 a Figure 3 40 802 1X Port Configuration 3 61 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example sets the 802 1X parameters on port 2 For a description of the additional fields displayed in this example see show dot1x on page 4 85 Console config interface ethernet 1 2 4 114 Console config if dot1x port control auto 4 81 Console co g if dot1lx re authentication 4 83 Console config if dot1lx max req 5 4 81 Console config if dotlx timeout quiet period 30 4 83 Console config if dot1ix timeout re authperiod 1800 4 84
493. tion Syntax no logging sendmail Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config logging sendmail Console config show logging sendmail This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show logging sendmail SMTP servers 1 192 168 1 200 SMTP minimum severity level 4 SMTP destination email addresses 1 geoff acme com SMTP source email address john acme com SMTP status Enabled Console 4 52 System Management Commands 4 Time Commands The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified time servers NTP or SNTP Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries If the clock is not set the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup Table 4 22 Time Commands Command Function Mode Page sntp client Accepts time from specified time servers GC 4 53 sntp server Specifies one or more time servers GC 4 54 sntp poll Sets the interval at which the client polls for time GC 4 55 show sntp Shows current SNTP configuration settings NE PE 4 55 clock timezone Sets the time zone for the switch s internal clock GC 4 56 calendar set Sets the system date and time PE 4 56 show calendar Displays the current date and time
494. tion Code Y 1761944 Factory_Default_Config cfg Config File Y 5197 Total free space 5242880 Console 4 68 Flash File Commands 4 whichboot This command displays which files were booted when the system powered up Syntax whichboot unit unit Stack unit Always unit 1 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command See the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by this command Console whichboot file name file type startup size byte Unit1 D2218 Boot Rom image Y 214124 V2271 Operation Code Y 1761944 Factory_Default_Config cfg Config File Y 5197 Console boot system This command specifies the image used to start up the system Syntax boot system unit boot rom config opcode filename The type of file or image to set as a default includes boot rom Boot ROM config Configuration file opcode Run time operation code filename Name of the configuration file or code image e unit Specifies the unit number Always unit 1 The colon is required Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A colon is required after the specified unit number and file type e Ifthe file contains an error it cannot be set as the default file 4 69 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config
495. to enable filtering for the criteria specified in the match command Use the policy map command to designate a policy name for a specific manner in which ingress traffic will be handled and enter the Policy Map configuration mode Use the class command to identify the class map and enter Policy Map Class configuration mode A policy map can contain multiple class statements Use the set command to modify the QoS value for matching traffic class and use the policer command to monitor the average flow and burst rate and drop any traffic that exceeds the specified rate or just reduce the DSCP service level for traffic exceeding the specified rate Use the service policy command to assign a policy map to a specific interface Notes 1 You can configure up to 16 rules per Class Map You can also include multiple classes in a Policy Map 2 You should create a Class Map page 4 192 before creating a Policy Map page 4 194 Otherwise you will not be able to specify a Class Map with the class command page 4 195 after entering Policy Map Configuration mode class map This command creates a class map used for matching packets to the specified class and enters Class Map configuration mode Use the no form to delete a class map and return to Global configuration mode Syntax no class map class map name match any e match any Match any condition within a class map class map name Name of the class map Range 1 16 characters
496. traffic into other VLANs to which the subscribers belong Even though common multicast streams are passed onto different VLAN groups from the MVR VLAN users in different IEEE 802 1Q or private VLANs cannot exchange any information except through upper level routing services 3 161 3 Configuring the Switch oe i Multicast Server General Configuration Guidelines for MVR fo a N Satelite Services ee Sak we Multicast Router Service Network N Set top Box Set top Box tv TV 1 Enable MVR globally on the switch select the MVR VLAN and add the multicast groups that will stream traffic to attached hosts see Configuring Global MVR Settings on page 3 162 2 Set the interfaces that will join the MVR as source ports or receiver ports see Configuring MVR Interface Status on page 3 165 3 Enable IGMP Snooping to a allow a subscriber to dynamically join or leave an MVR group see Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 155 Note that only IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join or leave messages 4 For multicast streams that will run for a long term and be associated with a stable set of hosts you can statically bind the multicast group to the participating interfaces see Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces on page 3 167 Configuring Global MVR Settings The global settings for Multicast VLAN Regist
497. ts operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 Console config if lacp admin key Ethernet Interface This command configures a port s LACP administration key Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner admin key key no lacp actor partner admin key e actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e key The port admin key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same link aggregation group LAG Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if 1 the LACP system priority matches 2 the LACP port admin key matches and 3 the LACP port channel key matches if configured e Ifthe port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group 4 132 Link Aggregation Commands 4 Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to it
498. tting Generates both the DSA and RSA key pairs Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command stores the host key pair in memory i e RAM Use the ip ssh save host key command to save the host key pair to flash memory e Some SSH client programs automatically add the public key to the known hosts file as part of the configuration process Otherwise you must manually create a known hosts file and place the host public key in it e The SSH server uses this host key to negotiate a session key and encryption method with the client trying to connect to it Example Console ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto zeroize 4 39 ip ssh save host key 4 40 ip ssh crypto zeroize This command clears the host key from memory i e RAM Syntax ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa rsa e dsa DSA key type rsa RSA key type Default Setting Clears both the DSA and RSA key 4 39 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command clears the host key from volatile memory RAM Use the no ip ssh save host key command to clear the host key from flash memory The SSH server must be disabled before you can execute this command Example Console ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 39 ip ssh save host key 4 40 no ip ssh server 4 36 ip ssh save host key This
499. tus Globally selects DSCP Priority or disables it 3 144 IP DSCP Priority Sets IP Differentiated Services Code Point priority mapping a 3 145 DSCP tag to a class of service value 3 Configuring the Switch Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Qos 3 146 DiffServ 3 146 Class Map Sets Class Maps 3 147 Policy Map Sets Policy Maps 3 150 Service Policy Defines service policy settings for ports 3 153 IGMP Snooping 3 154 IGMP Configuration Enables multicast filtering configures parameters for multicast 3 155 query IGMP Immediate Leave Enables the immediate leave function 3 156 Multicast Router Displays the ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast 3 157 Port Information router for each VLAN ID Static Multicast Router Port Assigns ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast router 3 158 Configuration IP Multicast Registration Displays all multicast groups active on this switch including 3 159 Table multicast IP addresses and VLAN ID IGMP Member Port Table Cee multicast addresses associated with the selected 3 160 MVR 3 161 Configuration Globally enables MVR sets the MVR VLAN adds multicast 3 162 stream addresses Port Information Displays MVR interface type MVR operational and activity 3 163 status and immediate leave status Trunk Information Displays MVR interface type MVR operational and activity 3 163
500. twork portion and host portion For example the IP address assigned to this switch 10 1 0 1 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 consists of a network portion 10 1 0 and a host portion 1 Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To access the switch through a Telnet session you must first set the IP address for the Master unit and set the default gateway if you are managing the switch from a different IP subnet For example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 10 1 0 254 255 255 255 0 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to the Internet you need to apply for a registered IP address However if you are attached to an isolated network then you can use any IP address that matches the network segment to which you are attached After you configure the switch with an IP address you can open a Telnet session by performing these steps 1 From the remote host enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the device you want to access 2 Atthe prompt enter the user name and system password The CLI will display the Vty n prompt for the administrator to show that you are using privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec or Vty n gt for the guest to show that you are using normal access mode i e Normal Exec where n indicates the number
501. ty and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN This switch supports two types of private VLANs primary secondary associated groups and stand alone isolated VLANs A primary VLAN contains promiscuous ports that can communicate with all other ports in the private VLAN group while a secondary or community VLAN contains community ports that can only communicate with other hosts within the secondary VLAN and with any of the promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN Isolated VLANs on the other hand consist a single stand alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous port and one or more isolated or host ports In all cases the promiscuous ports are designed to provide open access to an external network such as the Internet while the community or isolated ports provide restricted access to local users Multiple primary VLANs can be configured on this switch and multiple community VLANs can be associated with each primary VLAN One or more isolated VLANs can also be configured Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch This section describes commands used to configure private VLANs Table 4 58 Private VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page Edit Private VLAN Groups private vlan Adds or deletes primary community or isolated VLANs VC 4 175 private vlan association Associates a community VLAN with a primary VLAN ve 4 176 Configure Private VL
502. ually configure this address or enable dynamic address assignment via DHCP or BOOTP see Setting an IP Address on page 2 4 Note This switch supports four concurrent Telnet SSH sessions After configuring the switch s IP parameters you can access the onboard configuration program from anywhere within the attached network The onboard configuration program can be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to the network The switch can also be managed by any computer using a web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape 6 2 or above or from a network computer using SNMP network management software Note The onboard program only provides access to basic configuration functions To access the full range of SNMP management functions you must use SNMP based network management software Basic Configuration Console Connection The CLI program provides two different command levels normal access level Normal Exec and privileged access level Privileged Exec The commands available at the Normal Exec level are a limited subset of those available at the Privileged Exec level and allow you to only display information and use basic utilities To fully configure the switch parameters you must access the CLI at the Privileged Exec level Access to both CLI levels are controlled by user names and passwords The switch has a default user name and password for each level To log into the CLI at Jthe Privileged Exec level
503. uding framing characters Received Unicast Packets The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Rece ived Multicast Packets The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer Rece ived Broadcast Packets The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer Rece ived Discarded Packets The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Rece ived Unknown Packets The number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol Rece ived Errors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol Transmit Octets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters Transmit Unicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Multicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level pr
504. uiet period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max IC 4 83 Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client dot1x timeout re authperiod Sets the time period after which a connected client must IC 4 84 be re authenticated dot1x timeout tx period Sets the time period during an authentication session that IC 4 84 the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet show dot1x Shows all dot1x related information PE 4 85 Console config dot1x system auth control Console config dot1x default This command sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default values Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config Console config dot1x default 4 80 Authentication Commands 4 dot1x max req This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dot1x max req count no dot1x max req count The maximum number of requests Range 1 10 Default 2 Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1x max req 2 Console config if dot1x port control This command sets the dot1x mode on a port interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dot1x port control auto force auth
505. umber of frames including bad packets received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 65 127 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Frames 512 1023 Byte Frames 1024 1518 Byte Frames 1519 1536 Byte Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 3 96 Port Configuration 3 Web Click Port Port Statistics Select the required interface and click Query You can also use the Refresh button at the bottom of the page to update the screen Port Statistics linterface G Pon 1 x C Trunk Query Interface Statistics Received Octets 15020 Received Unicast Packets 0 Received Multicast 177 Recewed Broadcast 0 Packets Packets Received Discarded Recewved Unknown 0 Packets Packets Received Errors O Transmit Octets 168087 Transmit Multicast Transmit Unicast Packets Packets 2420 Transmit Broadcast 7 Transmit Discarded D Packets Packets Transmit Errors 0 xl Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors OlLate Collisions FCS Errors 0 Excessive Collisions Single Collision Frames Internal MAC Transmit Errors Multiple Collision Frames SQE Test Errors O Carrier Sense Errors O Frames Too Long Deferred Transmissions In
506. unications It uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP like services UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets connection less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets UDP is useful when TCP would be too complex too slow or just unnecessary Glossary 5 Glossary Virtual LAN VLAN A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers and allows users to share information and resources as though located on the same LAN XModem A protocol used to transfer files between devices Data is grouped in 128 byte blocks and error corrected Glossary 6 Index Numerics 802 1X port authentication 3 57 3 64 A acceptable frame type 3 130 4 169 Access Control List See ACL ACL Extended IP 4 88 4 89 4 90 MAC 4 93 4 94 4 96 Standard IP 4 88 4 89 4 90 address table 3 98 4 138 aging time 3 101 4 141 B BOOTP 3 16 4 215 BPDU 3 102 broadcast storm threshold 3 90 4 120 Cc Class of Service See CoS CLI showing commands 4 4 command line interface See CLI community ports 3 131 4 174 community string 2 6 3 33 3 37 3 38 3 39 3 42 4 100 community VLANs 3 133 4 175 configuration settings saving or restoring 2 8 3 19 4 64 console port required connections 2 2 CoS configurin
507. ure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 3 52 Figure 3 53 Figure 3 54 Figure 3 55 Figure 3 56 Figure 3 57 Figure 3 58 Figure 3 59 Figure 3 60 Figure 3 61 Figure 3 62 Figure 3 63 Figure 3 64 Figure 3 65 Figure 3 66 Figure 3 67 Figure 3 68 Figure 3 69 Figure 3 70 Figure 3 71 Figure 3 72 Figure 3 73 Figure 3 74 Figure 3 75 Figure 3 76 Figure 3 77 Figure 3 78 Figure 3 79 Figure 3 80 Figure 3 81 Figure 3 82 Figure 3 83 Figure 3 84 Figure 3 85 Figure 3 86 Figure 3 87 XX Configuring Standard IP ACLs Configuring Extended IP ACLs Configuring MAC ACLs Configuring ACL Port Binding Creating an IP Filter List Displaying Port Trunk Information Port Trunk Configuration Configuring Static Trunks LACP Trunk Configuration LACP Port Configuration LACP Port Counters Information LACP Port Internal Information LACP Port Neighbors Information Port Broadcast Control Mirror Port Configuration Input Rate Limit Port Configuration Port Statistics Configuring a Static Address Table Configuring a Dynamic Address Table Setting the Address Aging Time Displaying Spanning Tree Information Configuring Spanning Tree Displaying Spanning Tree Port Information Configuring Spanning Tree per Port Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees Displaying MSTP Interface Settings Displaying MSTP Interface Settings Globally Enabling GVRP Displaying Basic VLAN Informatio
508. ured MAC ACLs Syntax show mac access list ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac access list MAC access list jerry permit any 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console Related Commands permit deny 4 94 mac access group 4 96 mac access group This command binds a port to a MAC ACL Use the no form to remove the port Syntax mac access group acl_name in acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage A port can only be bound to one ACL e Ifa port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding with the new one 4 96 Access Control List Commands 4 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if mac access group jerry in Console config if Related Commands show mac access list 4 96 show mac access group This command shows the ports assigned to MAC ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac access group Interface ethernet 1 5 MAC access list M5 in Console Related Commands mac access group 4 96 ACL Information Table 4 36 ACL Information Command Function Mode Page show access list Show all ACLs and
509. user username groupname remote ip address v1 v2c v3 encrypted auth md5 sha auth password priv des56 priv password no snmp server user username v1 v2c v3 remote username Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters groupname Name of an SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters remote Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device ijp address The Internet address of the remote device v1 v2c v3 Use SNMP version 1 2c or 3 encrypted Accepts the password as encrypted input auth Uses SNMPv3 with authentication md5 sha Uses MD5 or SHA authentication auth password Authentication password Enter as plain text if the encrypted option is not used Otherwise enter an encrypted password A minimum of eight characters is required priv des56 Uses SNMPv3 with privacy with DES56 encryption priv password Privacy password Enter as plain text if the encrypted option is not used Otherwise enter an encrypted password 4 111 4 Command Line Interface Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The SNMP engine ID is used to compute the authentication privacy digests from the password You should therefore configure the engine ID with the snmp server engine id command before using this configuration command Before you configure a remote user use the snmp server engine id command page 4 105 to specify the
510. using the protocol vian protocol group command General Configuration mode 3 Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the protocol vian protocol group command Interface Configuration mode protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Groups This command creates a protocol group or to add specific protocols to a group Use the no form to remove a protocol group Syntax protocol vian protocol group group id add remove frame type frame protocol type protocol 4 180 VLAN Commands 4 no protocol vlan protocol group group id group id Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 frame Frame type used by this protocol Options ethernet rfc_1042 Ilc_other protocol Protocol type The only option for the Ilc_other frame type is ipx_raw The options for all other frames types include ip ipv6 arp rarp and user defined 0801 FFFF hexadecimal Default Setting No protocol groups are configured Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following creates protocol group 1 and specifies Ethernet frames with IP and ARP protocol types Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type ip Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type arp Console config protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Interfaces This command maps a protocol group to a VLAN for t
511. uthenticator in which the frame type is not recognized Rx EAPOL Total The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp ld The number of EAP Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp Oth The number of valid EAP Response frames other than Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP LenError The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid Rx Last EAPOLVer The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Rx Last EAPOLSrc_ The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Tx EAPOL Total The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Id The number of EAP Req Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Oth The number of EAP Request frames other than Rq Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator 3 63 3 Configuring the Switch Web Select Security 802 1X Statistics Select the required port and then click Query Click Refresh to update the statistics 802 1X Statistics Porja Query Rx EAPOL Start olRx EAP LenError 0 Rx EAPOL Logoff OlRx Last EAPOLVer 0 Rx EAPOL Invalid O Rx Last EAPOLSre 00 00 00 00 00 00 Rx EAPOL Total
512. vel 0 to level 3 will be sent to the remote server Range 0 7 Default 6 Host IP List Displays the list of remote server IP addresses that receive the syslog messages The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five 3 27 3 Configuring the Switch Host IP Address Specifies a new server IP address to add to the Host IP List Web Click System Log Remote Logs To add an IP address to the Host IP List type the new IP address in the Host IP Address box and then click Add To delete an IP address click the entry in the Host IP List and then click Remove Remote Logs Remote Log Status F Enabled Logging Facility 16 23 23 Logging Trap 0 7 6 Host IP Address Current New Host IP List none lt lt Add Host IP Address Remove Figure 3 18 Remote Logs CLI Enter the syslog server host IP address choose the facility type and set the logging trap Console config logging host 192 168 1 15 4 45 Console config logging facility 23 4 45 Console config logging trap 4 4 46 Console config end Console show logging trap 4 46 Syslog logging Enabled REMOTELOG status Enabled REMOTELOG facility type local use 7 REMOTELOG level type Warning conditions REMOTELOG server ip address 192 168 1 15 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 Console ooo 0 0 0 0 0 0 Si
513. vel and assigned to a group The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read write and notify view Command Attributes User Name The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters Group Name The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters Model The user security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 Level The security level used for the user noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications This is the default for SNMPv3 AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model Authentication The method used for user authentication Options MD5 SHA Default MD5 Authentication Password A minimum of eight plain text characters is required 3 37 3 Configuring the Switch e Privacy The encryption algorithm use for data privacy only 56 bit DES is currently available e Actions Enables the user to be assigned to another SNMPv3 group Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Users Click New to configure a user name In the New User page define a name and assign it to a group then click Add to save the configuration and return to the User Name list To delete a user check the box next to the user name then cli
514. ver Enabled Web Server Port 80 Web Secure Server Enabled Web Secure Server Port 443 Telnet Server Enable Telnet Server Port 23 Jumbo Frame Disabled POST Result DUMMY TASE 1 arnese dea eee oe PASS UART Loopback Test PASS DRAM TOSE ibrar Werden oranda PASS Timer TESE esse emus eyed ame se 8c ae PASS Switch Int Loopback Test PASS Done All Pass Console show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions including user name idle time and IP address of Telnet client Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 61 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage The session used to execute this command is indicated by a symbol next to the Line i e session index number Example Console show users Username accounts Username Privilege Public Key admin 15 None guest 0 None steve 15 RSA Online users Line Username Idle time h m s Remote IP addr 0 console admin 0 14 14 1 VTY 0 admin 0 00 00 192 168 1 19 2 SSH 1 steve 0 00 06 192 168 1 19 Web online users Line Remote IP addr Username Idle time h m s a HTTP 192 168 1 19 admin 0 00 00 Console show version This command displays hardware and software version information for the system Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions on page 3 11 for detailed information
515. ver NTP or SNTP Range 1 3 addresses Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time updates when set to SNTP client mode The client will poll the time servers in the order specified until a response is received It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Related Commands sntp client 4 53 sntp poll 4 55 show sntp 4 55 4 54 System Management Commands 4 sntp poll This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is set to SNTP client mode Use the no form to restore to the default Syntax sntp poll seconds no sntp poll seconds Interval between time requests Range 16 16384 seconds Default Setting 16 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config sntp poll 60 Console config Related Commands sntp client 4 53 show sntp This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP client and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the current time the poll interval used for sending time synchronization requests and the current SNTP mode i e unicast Example Console show sntp Curr
516. verify Verifies the client s hardware address stored in the DHCP GC 4 22 mac address packet against the source MAC address in the Ethernet header 7 ip dhcp snooping Enables or disables DHCP Option 82 information relay GC 4 22 information option 7 ip dhcp snooping Sets the information option policy for DHCP client packets that GC 4 22 information policy include Option 82 information 8 ip dhcp snooping Writes all dynamically learned snooping entries to flash GC 4 229 database flash memory show ip dhcp snooping Shows the DHCP snooping configuration settings PE 4 229 show ip dhcp snooping Shows the DHCP snooping binding table entries PE 4 23 binding 0 ip dhcp snooping This command enables DHCP snooping globally Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no ip dhcp snooping Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 223 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage 4 224 Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCP messages are received from an outside source DHCP snooping is used to filter DHCP messages received on an unsecure interface from outside the network or firewall When DHCP snooping is enabled globally by this command and enabled on a VLAN interface by the ip dhcp snooping vlan command page 4 225 DHCP messages received on an untrusted interface as specified by the no ip dhcp snooping trust command page 4 226 from a device not listed in the DHCP snooping table will be dropp
517. via the web or CLI interface Command Attributes e Telnet Status Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch Default Enabled Telnet Port Number Sets the TCP port number for Telnet on the switch Default 23 Login Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session Range 0 300 seconds Default 300 seconds Exec Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected If user input is not detected within the timeout interval the current session is terminated Range 0 65535 seconds Default 600 seconds 3 23 3 Configuring the Switch e Password Threshold Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time set by the Silent Time parameter before allowing the next logon attempt Range 0 120 Default 3 attempts e Password Specifies a password for the line connection When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt Default No password Login Enables password checking at login You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the Passwo
518. vice ports attached to the network Example Console config spanning tree max age 40 Console config Related Commands spanning tree forward time 4 144 spanning tree hello time 4 145 spanning tree priority This command configures the spanning tree priority globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree priority priority no spanning tree priority priority Priority of the bridge Range 0 65535 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 4 146 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority i e lower numeric value becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Example Console config spanning tree priority 40000 Console config spanning tree pathcost method This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree pathcost method long short no spanning tree pathcost method long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 T
519. vlan private vlan 2 association 3 Console config 4 176 VLAN Commands 4 switchport mode private vlan Use this command to set the private VLAN mode for an interface Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax switchport mode private vlan host promiscuous no switchport mode private vlan host This port type can subsequently be assigned to a community or isolated VLAN promiscuous This port type can communicate with all other promiscuous ports in the same primary VLAN as well as with all the ports in the associated secondary VLANs Default Setting Normal VLAN Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage To assign a promiscuous port to a primary VLAN use the switchport private vlan mapping command To assign a host port to a community VLAN use the private vlan host association command e To assign a promiscuous port or host port to an isolated VLAN use the switchport private vlan isolated command Example Console Console Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 2 config if switchport mode private vlan promiscuous config if exit config interface ethernet 1 3 config if switchport mode private vlan host config if switchport private vian host association Use this command to associate an interface with a secondary VLAN Use the no form to remove this association Syntax switchport private vian host
520. will be placed in queue 0 of the output port Note that if the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Example The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport priority default 5 queue bandwidth This command assigns weighted round robin WRR weights to the four class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default weights Note This switch does not allow the queue service weights to be set The weights are fixed as 1 2 4 8 for queues 0 through 3 respectively 4 185 4 Command Line Interface Syntax queue bandwidth weight1 weight4 no queue bandwidth weight1 weight4 The ratio of weights for queues 0 3 determines the weights used by the WRR scheduler Range 1 31 Default Setting Weights 1 2 4 8 are assigned to queues 0 3 respectively Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage WRR controls bandwidth sharing at the egress port by defining scheduling weights Example This example shows how to assign WRR weights to priority queues 0 2 Console config queue bandwidth 6 9 12 Console config Related Commands show queue bandwidth 4 188 queue cos map This command assigns class of service CoS values to the priority queues i e hardware output queues 0
521. within the timeout interval the session is kept open otherwise the session is terminated e This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections e The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled e Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting Example To set the timeout to two minutes enter this command Console config line exec timeout 120 Console config line Related Commands silent time 4 15 timeout login response 4 13 password thresh This command sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts Use the no form to remove the threshold value Syntax password thresh threshold no password thresh threshold The number of allowed password attempts Range 1 120 0 no threshold Default Setting The default value is three attempts Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time before allowing the next logon attempt Use the silent time command to set this interval When this threshold is reached for Telnet the Telnet logon interface shuts down e This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections 4 14 Line Commands 4 Example To set the password threshold to five attempts enter this command Console config line password thresh 5 Console config line Rela
522. wn inactive Disabled 4 Non MVR Down inactive Disabled 5 Non MVR Up nactive Disabled 6 Non MVR Down inactive Disabled 7 Non MVR Down Inactive Disabled 8 Non MVR Down inactive Disabled 9 Non MVR Down inactive Disabled 10 Non MVR Down inactive Disabled 11 Non MVR Down inactive Disabled 49 IKlan MAUD Daum Inactivn Mieashiaa xl Figure 3 101 MVR Port Information CLI This example shows information about interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN Console show mvr interface 4 213 Port Type Status Immediate Leave eth1 1 SOURCE ACTIVE UP Disable eth1 2 RECEIVER ACTIVE UP Disable Console Displaying Port Members of Multicast Groups You can display the multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN either through IGMP snooping or static configuration Field Attributes e Group IP Multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Group Port List Shows the interfaces with subscribers for multicast services provided through the MVR VLAN 12 Port Information only 3 164 Multicast VLAN Registration 3 Web Click MVR Group IP Information MVR Group IP Table Group IP none z Group Port List none Figure 3 102 MVR Group IP Information CLI This example following shows information about the interfaces associated with multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Console show mvr interface 4 213 MVR Group IP Status Members 225 0062 ACTIVE eth1 1 d eth1 2 s 225 0 0 2 INACTIVE N
523. y a type of traffic based on an access list a DSCP or IP Precedence value or a VLAN 3 Use the Policy Map to designate a policy name for a specific manner in which ingress traffic will be handled 4 Add one or more classes to the Policy Map Assign policy rules to each class by setting the QoS value to be assigned to the matching traffic class The policy rule can also be configured to monitor the average flow and burst rate and drop any traffic that exceeds the specified rate or just reduce the DSCP service level for traffic exceeding the specified rate 5 Use the Service Policy to assign a policy map to a specific interface Configuring a Class Map A class map is used for matching packets to a specified class Command Usage To configure a Class Map follow these steps Open the Class Map page and click Add Class When the Class Configuration page opens fill in the Class Name field and click Add When the Match Class Settings page opens specify type of traffic for this class based on an access list a DSCP or IP Precedence value or a VLAN and click the Add button next to the field for the selected traffic criteria You can specify up to 16 items to match when assigning ingress traffic to a class map The class map is used with a policy map page 3 150 to create a service policy page 3 153 for a specific interface that defines packet classification service tagging and bandwidth policing No
524. y ports that can only communicate with other hosts within the secondary VLAN and with any of the promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN Isolated VLANs on the other hand consist a single stand alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous port and one or more isolated or host ports In all cases the promiscuous ports are designed to provide open access to an external network such as the Internet while the community or isolated ports provide restricted access to local users Multiple primary VLANs can be configured on this switch and multiple community VLANs can be associated with each primary VLAN One or more isolated VLANs can also be configured Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch 3 131 3 Configuring the Switch To configure primary secondary associated groups follow these steps 1 Use the Private VLAN Configuration menu page 3 133 to designate one or more community VLANs and the primary VLAN that will channel traffic outside of the VLAN groups 2 Use the Private VLAN Association menu page 3 134 to map the secondary i e community VLAN s to the primary VLAN 3 Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration menu page 3 136 to set the port type to promiscuous i e having access to all ports in the primary VLAN or host i e having access restricted to community VLAN members and channeling all other traffic through promiscuous ports Then assign any promiscuous

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

standard terms and conditions of commercial sale  BL 983313-0 BL 983313-1 Indicateurs et contrôleurs de ÉC  Boss Audio Systems Chaos Exxstreme  mxbmn - Ultra Electronics Nuclear Sensors & Process Instrumentation  D-Link DHP-P307AV  FICHE TECHNIQUE baccide gel sans parfum  Peerless PLAV70-UNL-S flat panel wall mount  Instruction Guide  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file